| 1 | % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
|
|---|
| 2 | %
|
|---|
| 3 | % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
|
|---|
| 4 | \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
|
|---|
| 5 | %
|
|---|
| 6 | \def\texinfoversion{2010-05-17.17}
|
|---|
| 7 | %
|
|---|
| 8 | % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
|
|---|
| 9 | % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
|
|---|
| 10 | % 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
|---|
| 11 | %
|
|---|
| 12 | % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
|
|---|
| 13 | % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
|
|---|
| 14 | % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
|
|---|
| 15 | % License, or (at your option) any later version.
|
|---|
| 16 | %
|
|---|
| 17 | % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
|---|
| 18 | % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
|
|---|
| 19 | % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
|
|---|
| 20 | % General Public License for more details.
|
|---|
| 21 | %
|
|---|
| 22 | % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
|---|
| 23 | % along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
|
|---|
| 24 | %
|
|---|
| 25 | % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
|
|---|
| 26 | % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
|
|---|
| 27 | % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
|
|---|
| 28 | %
|
|---|
| 29 | % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
|
|---|
| 30 | % reports; you can get the latest version from:
|
|---|
| 31 | % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
|
|---|
| 32 | % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
|
|---|
| 33 | % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
|
|---|
| 34 | % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
|
|---|
| 35 | % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
|
|---|
| 36 | %
|
|---|
| 37 | % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
|
|---|
| 38 | % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
|
|---|
| 39 | % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
|
|---|
| 40 | %
|
|---|
| 41 | % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
|
|---|
| 42 | % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
|
|---|
| 43 | % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
|
|---|
| 44 | % tex foo.texi
|
|---|
| 45 | % texindex foo.??
|
|---|
| 46 | % tex foo.texi
|
|---|
| 47 | % tex foo.texi
|
|---|
| 48 | % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
|
|---|
| 49 | % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
|
|---|
| 50 | % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
|
|---|
| 51 | % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
|
|---|
| 52 | %
|
|---|
| 53 | % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
|
|---|
| 54 | % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
|
|---|
| 55 | % full Texinfo distribution.
|
|---|
| 56 | %
|
|---|
| 57 | % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
|
|---|
| 58 |
|
|---|
| 59 |
|
|---|
| 60 | \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
|
|---|
| 61 |
|
|---|
| 62 | % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
|
|---|
| 63 | % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
|
|---|
| 64 | % they might have appeared in the input file name.
|
|---|
| 65 | \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
|
|---|
| 66 | \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
|
|---|
| 67 |
|
|---|
| 68 | \chardef\other=12
|
|---|
| 69 |
|
|---|
| 70 | % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
|
|---|
| 71 | % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
|
|---|
| 72 | \let\+ = \relax
|
|---|
| 73 |
|
|---|
| 74 | % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
|
|---|
| 75 | \let\ptexb=\b
|
|---|
| 76 | \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
|
|---|
| 77 | \let\ptexc=\c
|
|---|
| 78 | \let\ptexcomma=\,
|
|---|
| 79 | \let\ptexdot=\.
|
|---|
| 80 | \let\ptexdots=\dots
|
|---|
| 81 | \let\ptexend=\end
|
|---|
| 82 | \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
|
|---|
| 83 | \let\ptexexclam=\!
|
|---|
| 84 | \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
|
|---|
| 85 | \let\ptexgtr=>
|
|---|
| 86 | \let\ptexhat=^
|
|---|
| 87 | \let\ptexi=\i
|
|---|
| 88 | \let\ptexindent=\indent
|
|---|
| 89 | \let\ptexinsert=\insert
|
|---|
| 90 | \let\ptexlbrace=\{
|
|---|
| 91 | \let\ptexless=<
|
|---|
| 92 | \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
|
|---|
| 93 | \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
|
|---|
| 94 | \let\ptexplus=+
|
|---|
| 95 | \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
|
|---|
| 96 | \let\ptexrbrace=\}
|
|---|
| 97 | \let\ptexslash=\/
|
|---|
| 98 | \let\ptexstar=\*
|
|---|
| 99 | \let\ptext=\t
|
|---|
| 100 | \let\ptextop=\top
|
|---|
| 101 | {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
|
|---|
| 102 |
|
|---|
| 103 | % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
|
|---|
| 104 | % starts a new line in the output.
|
|---|
| 105 | \newlinechar = `^^J
|
|---|
| 106 |
|
|---|
| 107 | % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
|
|---|
| 108 | % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
|
|---|
| 109 | %
|
|---|
| 110 | \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
|
|---|
| 111 | \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
|
|---|
| 112 | \else
|
|---|
| 113 | \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
|
|---|
| 114 | \fi
|
|---|
| 115 |
|
|---|
| 116 | % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
|
|---|
| 117 | \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
|
|---|
| 118 | \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
|
|---|
| 119 | \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
|
|---|
| 120 | \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
|
|---|
| 121 | \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
|
|---|
| 122 | \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
|
|---|
| 123 | \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
|
|---|
| 124 | \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
|
|---|
| 125 | \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
|
|---|
| 126 | \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
|
|---|
| 127 | \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
|
|---|
| 128 | \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
|
|---|
| 129 | \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
|
|---|
| 130 | \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
|
|---|
| 131 | \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
|
|---|
| 132 | \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
|
|---|
| 133 | \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
|
|---|
| 134 | \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
|
|---|
| 135 | \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
|
|---|
| 136 | %
|
|---|
| 137 | \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
|
|---|
| 138 | \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
|
|---|
| 139 | \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
|
|---|
| 140 | \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
|
|---|
| 141 | \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
|
|---|
| 142 | \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
|
|---|
| 143 | \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
|
|---|
| 144 | \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
|
|---|
| 145 | \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
|
|---|
| 146 | \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
|
|---|
| 147 | \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
|
|---|
| 148 | \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
|
|---|
| 149 | %
|
|---|
| 150 | \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
|
|---|
| 151 | \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
|
|---|
| 152 | \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
|
|---|
| 153 | \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
|
|---|
| 154 | \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
|
|---|
| 155 |
|
|---|
| 156 | % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
|
|---|
| 157 | \chardef\spacecat = 10
|
|---|
| 158 | \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
|
|---|
| 159 |
|
|---|
| 160 | % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
|
|---|
| 161 | \chardef\colonChar = `\:
|
|---|
| 162 | \chardef\commaChar = `\,
|
|---|
| 163 | \chardef\dashChar = `\-
|
|---|
| 164 | \chardef\dotChar = `\.
|
|---|
| 165 | \chardef\exclamChar= `\!
|
|---|
| 166 | \chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
|
|---|
| 167 | \chardef\questChar = `\?
|
|---|
| 168 | \chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
|
|---|
| 169 | \chardef\semiChar = `\;
|
|---|
| 170 | \chardef\underChar = `\_
|
|---|
| 171 |
|
|---|
| 172 | % Ignore a token.
|
|---|
| 173 | %
|
|---|
| 174 | \def\gobble#1{}
|
|---|
| 175 |
|
|---|
| 176 | % The following is used inside several \edef's.
|
|---|
| 177 | \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
|
|---|
| 178 |
|
|---|
| 179 | % Hyphenation fixes.
|
|---|
| 180 | \hyphenation{
|
|---|
| 181 | Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
|
|---|
| 182 | ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
|
|---|
| 183 | data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
|
|---|
| 184 | man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
|
|---|
| 185 | par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
|
|---|
| 186 | spell-ing spell-ings
|
|---|
| 187 | stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
|
|---|
| 188 | wide-spread wrap-around
|
|---|
| 189 | }
|
|---|
| 190 |
|
|---|
| 191 | % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
|
|---|
| 192 | \newdimen\bindingoffset
|
|---|
| 193 | \newdimen\normaloffset
|
|---|
| 194 | \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
|
|---|
| 195 |
|
|---|
| 196 | % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
|
|---|
| 197 | % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
|
|---|
| 198 | % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
|
|---|
| 199 | %
|
|---|
| 200 | \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
|
|---|
| 201 |
|
|---|
| 202 | % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
|
|---|
| 203 | % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
|
|---|
| 204 | % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
|
|---|
| 205 | % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
|
|---|
| 206 | % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
|
|---|
| 207 | %
|
|---|
| 208 | \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
|
|---|
| 209 | \def\loggingall{%
|
|---|
| 210 | \tracingstats2
|
|---|
| 211 | \tracingpages1
|
|---|
| 212 | \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
|
|---|
| 213 | \tracingparagraphs1
|
|---|
| 214 | \tracingoutput1
|
|---|
| 215 | \tracingmacros2
|
|---|
| 216 | \tracingrestores1
|
|---|
| 217 | \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
|---|
| 218 | \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
|
|---|
| 219 | \tracingscantokens1
|
|---|
| 220 | \tracingifs1
|
|---|
| 221 | \tracinggroups1
|
|---|
| 222 | \tracingnesting2
|
|---|
| 223 | \tracingassigns1
|
|---|
| 224 | \fi
|
|---|
| 225 | \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
|
|---|
| 226 | \errorcontextlines16
|
|---|
| 227 | }%
|
|---|
| 228 |
|
|---|
| 229 | % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
|
|---|
| 230 | % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
|
|---|
| 231 | %
|
|---|
| 232 | \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
|
|---|
| 233 | \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
|
|---|
| 234 | \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
|
|---|
| 235 | \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
|
|---|
| 236 | \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
|
|---|
| 237 | \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
|
|---|
| 238 |
|
|---|
| 239 | % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
|
|---|
| 240 | %
|
|---|
| 241 | \newif\ifcropmarks
|
|---|
| 242 | \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
|
|---|
| 243 | %
|
|---|
| 244 | % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
|
|---|
| 245 | % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
|
|---|
| 246 | %
|
|---|
| 247 | \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
|
|---|
| 248 | \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
|
|---|
| 249 | \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
|
|---|
| 250 | \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
|
|---|
| 251 |
|
|---|
| 252 | % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
|
|---|
| 253 | % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
|
|---|
| 254 | % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
|
|---|
| 255 | %
|
|---|
| 256 | % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
|
|---|
| 257 | % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
|
|---|
| 258 | %
|
|---|
| 259 | % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
|
|---|
| 260 | % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
|
|---|
| 261 | % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
|
|---|
| 262 | % described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
|
|---|
| 263 | % marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
|
|---|
| 264 | % one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
|
|---|
| 265 | \def\domark{%
|
|---|
| 266 | \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
|
|---|
| 267 | \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
|
|---|
| 268 | \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
|
|---|
| 269 | \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
|
|---|
| 270 | \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
|
|---|
| 271 | \mark{%
|
|---|
| 272 | \the\toks0 \the\toks2
|
|---|
| 273 | \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
|
|---|
| 274 | \noexpand\else \the\toks8
|
|---|
| 275 | }%
|
|---|
| 276 | }
|
|---|
| 277 | % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
|
|---|
| 278 | % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
|
|---|
| 279 | % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
|
|---|
| 280 | % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
|
|---|
| 281 | % first @chapter.
|
|---|
| 282 | \def\gettopheadingmarks{%
|
|---|
| 283 | \ifcase0\topmark\fi
|
|---|
| 284 | \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
|
|---|
| 285 | }
|
|---|
| 286 | \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
|
|---|
| 287 | \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
|
|---|
| 288 |
|
|---|
| 289 | % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
|
|---|
| 290 | \def\lastchapterdefs{}
|
|---|
| 291 | \def\lastsectiondefs{}
|
|---|
| 292 | \def\prevchapterdefs{}
|
|---|
| 293 | \def\prevsectiondefs{}
|
|---|
| 294 | \def\lastcolordefs{}
|
|---|
| 295 |
|
|---|
| 296 | % Main output routine.
|
|---|
| 297 | \chardef\PAGE = 255
|
|---|
| 298 | \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
|
|---|
| 299 |
|
|---|
| 300 | \newbox\headlinebox
|
|---|
| 301 | \newbox\footlinebox
|
|---|
| 302 |
|
|---|
| 303 | % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
|
|---|
| 304 | % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
|
|---|
| 305 | \def\onepageout#1{%
|
|---|
| 306 | \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
|
|---|
| 307 | %
|
|---|
| 308 | \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
|
|---|
| 309 | \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
|
|---|
| 310 | %
|
|---|
| 311 | % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
|
|---|
| 312 | % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
|
|---|
| 313 | \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
|
|---|
| 314 | \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
|
|---|
| 315 | \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
|
|---|
| 316 | \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
|
|---|
| 317 | %
|
|---|
| 318 | {%
|
|---|
| 319 | % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
|
|---|
| 320 | % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
|
|---|
| 321 | % before the \shipout runs.
|
|---|
| 322 | %
|
|---|
| 323 | \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
|
|---|
| 324 | \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
|
|---|
| 325 | % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
|
|---|
| 326 | % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
|
|---|
| 327 | % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
|
|---|
| 328 | % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
|
|---|
| 329 | % it needs to be
|
|---|
| 330 | % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
|
|---|
| 331 | \shipout\vbox{%
|
|---|
| 332 | % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
|
|---|
| 333 | \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
|
|---|
| 334 | %
|
|---|
| 335 | \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
|
|---|
| 336 | \hsize = \outerhsize
|
|---|
| 337 | \vskip-\topandbottommargin
|
|---|
| 338 | \vtop to0pt{%
|
|---|
| 339 | \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
|
|---|
| 340 | \nointerlineskip
|
|---|
| 341 | \line{%
|
|---|
| 342 | \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
|---|
| 343 | \hfill
|
|---|
| 344 | \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
|---|
| 345 | }%
|
|---|
| 346 | \vss}%
|
|---|
| 347 | \vskip\topandbottommargin
|
|---|
| 348 | \line\bgroup
|
|---|
| 349 | \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
|
|---|
| 350 | \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
|
|---|
| 351 | \vbox\bgroup
|
|---|
| 352 | \fi
|
|---|
| 353 | %
|
|---|
| 354 | \unvbox\headlinebox
|
|---|
| 355 | \pagebody{#1}%
|
|---|
| 356 | \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
|
|---|
| 357 | % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
|
|---|
| 358 | % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
|
|---|
| 359 | % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
|
|---|
| 360 | \vskip 24pt
|
|---|
| 361 | \unvbox\footlinebox
|
|---|
| 362 | \fi
|
|---|
| 363 | %
|
|---|
| 364 | \ifcropmarks
|
|---|
| 365 | \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
|
|---|
| 366 | \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
|
|---|
| 367 | \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
|
|---|
| 368 | \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
|
|---|
| 369 | \vbox to0pt{\vss
|
|---|
| 370 | \line{%
|
|---|
| 371 | \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
|---|
| 372 | \hfill
|
|---|
| 373 | \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
|---|
| 374 | }%
|
|---|
| 375 | \nointerlineskip
|
|---|
| 376 | \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
|
|---|
| 377 | }%
|
|---|
| 378 | \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
|
|---|
| 379 | \fi
|
|---|
| 380 | }% end of \shipout\vbox
|
|---|
| 381 | }% end of group with \indexdummies
|
|---|
| 382 | \advancepageno
|
|---|
| 383 | \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
|
|---|
| 384 | }
|
|---|
| 385 |
|
|---|
| 386 | \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
|
|---|
| 387 |
|
|---|
| 388 | \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
|
|---|
| 389 | {\catcode`\@ =11
|
|---|
| 390 | \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
|
|---|
| 391 | % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
|
|---|
| 392 | \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
|
|---|
| 393 | \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
|
|---|
| 394 | \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
|
|---|
| 395 | \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
|
|---|
| 396 | \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
|
|---|
| 397 | }
|
|---|
| 398 |
|
|---|
| 399 | % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
|
|---|
| 400 | % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
|
|---|
| 401 | % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
|
|---|
| 402 | %
|
|---|
| 403 | \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
|
|---|
| 404 | \def\nstop{\vbox
|
|---|
| 405 | {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
|
|---|
| 406 | \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
|
|---|
| 407 | \def\nsbot{\vbox
|
|---|
| 408 | {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
|
|---|
| 409 |
|
|---|
| 410 | % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
|
|---|
| 411 | % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
|
|---|
| 412 | % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
|
|---|
| 413 | %
|
|---|
| 414 | \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
|
|---|
| 415 | \def\parseargusing#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 416 | \def\argtorun{#2}%
|
|---|
| 417 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 418 | \obeylines
|
|---|
| 419 | \spaceisspace
|
|---|
| 420 | #1%
|
|---|
| 421 | \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
|
|---|
| 422 | }
|
|---|
| 423 |
|
|---|
| 424 | {\obeylines %
|
|---|
| 425 | \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
|
|---|
| 426 | \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
|
|---|
| 427 | \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
|
|---|
| 428 | }%
|
|---|
| 429 | }
|
|---|
| 430 |
|
|---|
| 431 | % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
|
|---|
| 432 | \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
|
|---|
| 433 | \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
|
|---|
| 434 |
|
|---|
| 435 | % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
|
|---|
| 436 | %
|
|---|
| 437 | % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
|
|---|
| 438 | % @end itemize @c foo
|
|---|
| 439 | % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
|
|---|
| 440 | % by \finishparsearg.
|
|---|
| 441 | %
|
|---|
| 442 | \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
|
|---|
| 443 | \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
|
|---|
| 444 | \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
|
|---|
| 445 | \def\temp{#3}%
|
|---|
| 446 | \ifx\temp\empty
|
|---|
| 447 | % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
|
|---|
| 448 | \let\temp\finishparsearg
|
|---|
| 449 | \else
|
|---|
| 450 | \let\temp\argcheckspaces
|
|---|
| 451 | \fi
|
|---|
| 452 | % Put the space token in:
|
|---|
| 453 | \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
|
|---|
| 454 | }
|
|---|
| 455 |
|
|---|
| 456 | % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
|
|---|
| 457 | % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
|
|---|
| 458 | % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
|
|---|
| 459 | % just before passing the control to \argtorun.
|
|---|
| 460 | % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
|
|---|
| 461 | % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
|
|---|
| 462 | % that a pair of braces would be stripped.
|
|---|
| 463 | %
|
|---|
| 464 | % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
|
|---|
| 465 | %
|
|---|
| 466 | \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
|
|---|
| 467 |
|
|---|
| 468 | % \parseargdef\foo{...}
|
|---|
| 469 | % is roughly equivalent to
|
|---|
| 470 | % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
|
|---|
| 471 | % \def\Xfoo#1{...}
|
|---|
| 472 | %
|
|---|
| 473 | % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
|
|---|
| 474 | % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
|
|---|
| 475 |
|
|---|
| 476 | \def\parseargdef#1{%
|
|---|
| 477 | \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
|
|---|
| 478 | }
|
|---|
| 479 | \def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 480 | \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
|
|---|
| 481 | \def#1##1%
|
|---|
| 482 | }
|
|---|
| 483 |
|
|---|
| 484 | % Several utility definitions with active space:
|
|---|
| 485 | {
|
|---|
| 486 | \obeyspaces
|
|---|
| 487 | \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
|
|---|
| 488 |
|
|---|
| 489 | % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
|
|---|
| 490 | % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
|
|---|
| 491 | % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
|
|---|
| 492 | % should produce a line of output anyway.
|
|---|
| 493 | %
|
|---|
| 494 | \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
|
|---|
| 495 |
|
|---|
| 496 | % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
|
|---|
| 497 | % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
|
|---|
| 498 | % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
|
|---|
| 499 | \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
|
|---|
| 500 | }
|
|---|
| 501 |
|
|---|
| 502 |
|
|---|
| 503 | \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
|
|---|
| 504 |
|
|---|
| 505 | % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
|
|---|
| 506 | %
|
|---|
| 507 | % \envdef\foo{...}
|
|---|
| 508 | % \def\Efoo{...}
|
|---|
| 509 | %
|
|---|
| 510 | % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
|
|---|
| 511 | % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
|
|---|
| 512 | % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
|
|---|
| 513 | % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
|
|---|
| 514 | % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
|
|---|
| 515 | %
|
|---|
| 516 | % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
|
|---|
| 517 | % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
|
|---|
| 518 | % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
|
|---|
| 519 | % special case.)
|
|---|
| 520 |
|
|---|
| 521 |
|
|---|
| 522 | % At run-time, environments start with this:
|
|---|
| 523 | \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
|
|---|
| 524 | % initialize
|
|---|
| 525 | \let\thisenv\empty
|
|---|
| 526 |
|
|---|
| 527 | % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
|
|---|
| 528 | \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
|---|
| 529 | \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
|---|
| 530 |
|
|---|
| 531 | % Check whether we're in the right environment:
|
|---|
| 532 | \def\checkenv#1{%
|
|---|
| 533 | \def\temp{#1}%
|
|---|
| 534 | \ifx\thisenv\temp
|
|---|
| 535 | \else
|
|---|
| 536 | \badenverr
|
|---|
| 537 | \fi
|
|---|
| 538 | }
|
|---|
| 539 |
|
|---|
| 540 | % Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
|
|---|
| 541 | \def\badenverr{%
|
|---|
| 542 | \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|---|
| 543 | \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
|
|---|
| 544 | not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
|---|
| 545 | }
|
|---|
| 546 | \def\inenvironment#1{%
|
|---|
| 547 | \ifx#1\empty
|
|---|
| 548 | out of any environment%
|
|---|
| 549 | \else
|
|---|
| 550 | in environment \expandafter\string#1%
|
|---|
| 551 | \fi
|
|---|
| 552 | }
|
|---|
| 553 |
|
|---|
| 554 | % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
|
|---|
| 555 | % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
|
|---|
| 556 | %
|
|---|
| 557 | \parseargdef\end{%
|
|---|
| 558 | \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
|
|---|
| 559 | \else
|
|---|
| 560 | % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
|
|---|
| 561 | \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
|
|---|
| 562 | \csname E#1\endcsname
|
|---|
| 563 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 564 | \fi
|
|---|
| 565 | }
|
|---|
| 566 |
|
|---|
| 567 | \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
|
|---|
| 568 |
|
|---|
| 569 |
|
|---|
| 570 | % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
|
|---|
| 571 | % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
|
|---|
| 572 | % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
|
|---|
| 573 | % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
|
|---|
| 574 | % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
|
|---|
| 575 | {\catcode`@ = 11
|
|---|
| 576 | % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
|
|---|
| 577 | % if the definition is written into an index file.
|
|---|
| 578 | \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
|
|---|
| 579 | \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
|
|---|
| 580 | }
|
|---|
| 581 |
|
|---|
| 582 | % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
|
|---|
| 583 | \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
|
|---|
| 584 |
|
|---|
| 585 | % @* forces a line break.
|
|---|
| 586 | \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
|
|---|
| 587 |
|
|---|
| 588 | % @/ allows a line break.
|
|---|
| 589 | \let\/=\allowbreak
|
|---|
| 590 |
|
|---|
| 591 | % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
|
|---|
| 592 | \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
|---|
| 593 |
|
|---|
| 594 | % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
|
|---|
| 595 | \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
|---|
| 596 |
|
|---|
| 597 | % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
|
|---|
| 598 | \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
|---|
| 599 |
|
|---|
| 600 | % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
|
|---|
| 601 | %
|
|---|
| 602 | \def\onword{on}
|
|---|
| 603 | \def\offword{off}
|
|---|
| 604 | %
|
|---|
| 605 | \parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
|
|---|
| 606 | \def\temp{#1}%
|
|---|
| 607 | \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
|
|---|
| 608 | \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
|
|---|
| 609 | \else
|
|---|
| 610 | \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|---|
| 611 | \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
|
|---|
| 612 | \fi\fi
|
|---|
| 613 | }
|
|---|
| 614 |
|
|---|
| 615 | % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
|
|---|
| 616 | % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
|
|---|
| 617 | % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
|
|---|
| 618 | \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
|
|---|
| 619 |
|
|---|
| 620 | % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
|
|---|
| 621 | % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
|
|---|
| 622 | % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
|
|---|
| 623 | % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
|
|---|
| 624 | % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
|
|---|
| 625 | % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
|
|---|
| 626 | % the text is small, which looks bad.
|
|---|
| 627 | %
|
|---|
| 628 | % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
|
|---|
| 629 | % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
|
|---|
| 630 | % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
|
|---|
| 631 | % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
|
|---|
| 632 | % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
|
|---|
| 633 | % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
|
|---|
| 634 | %
|
|---|
| 635 | \newbox\groupbox
|
|---|
| 636 | \def\vfilllimit{0.7}
|
|---|
| 637 | %
|
|---|
| 638 | \envdef\group{%
|
|---|
| 639 | \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
|
|---|
| 640 | \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
|
|---|
| 641 | \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
|
|---|
| 642 | \fi
|
|---|
| 643 | \startsavinginserts
|
|---|
| 644 | %
|
|---|
| 645 | \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
|
|---|
| 646 | % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
|
|---|
| 647 | % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
|
|---|
| 648 | % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
|
|---|
| 649 | % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
|
|---|
| 650 | % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
|
|---|
| 651 | % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
|
|---|
| 652 | \comment
|
|---|
| 653 | }
|
|---|
| 654 | %
|
|---|
| 655 | % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
|
|---|
| 656 | % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
|
|---|
| 657 | % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
|
|---|
| 658 | % above. But it's pretty close.
|
|---|
| 659 | \def\Egroup{%
|
|---|
| 660 | % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
|
|---|
| 661 | % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
|
|---|
| 662 | \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
|
|---|
| 663 | \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
|
|---|
| 664 | \egroup % End the \vtop.
|
|---|
| 665 | % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
|
|---|
| 666 | \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
|
|---|
| 667 | % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
|
|---|
| 668 | \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
|
|---|
| 669 | % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
|
|---|
| 670 | % group, force a page break.
|
|---|
| 671 | \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
|
|---|
| 672 | \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
|
|---|
| 673 | \page
|
|---|
| 674 | \fi
|
|---|
| 675 | \fi
|
|---|
| 676 | \box\groupbox
|
|---|
| 677 | \prevdepth = \dimen1
|
|---|
| 678 | \checkinserts
|
|---|
| 679 | }
|
|---|
| 680 | %
|
|---|
| 681 | % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
|
|---|
| 682 | % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
|
|---|
| 683 | %
|
|---|
| 684 | \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
|
|---|
| 685 | group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
|
|---|
| 686 | where each line of input produces a line of output.}
|
|---|
| 687 |
|
|---|
| 688 | % @need space-in-mils
|
|---|
| 689 | % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
|
|---|
| 690 |
|
|---|
| 691 | \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
|
|---|
| 692 |
|
|---|
| 693 | % Old definition--didn't work.
|
|---|
| 694 | %\parseargdef\need{\par %
|
|---|
| 695 | %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
|
|---|
| 696 | %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
|
|---|
| 697 | %{\baselineskip=0pt%
|
|---|
| 698 | %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
|
|---|
| 699 | %\prevdepth=-1000pt
|
|---|
| 700 | %}}
|
|---|
| 701 |
|
|---|
| 702 | \parseargdef\need{%
|
|---|
| 703 | % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
|
|---|
| 704 | % paragraph.
|
|---|
| 705 | \par
|
|---|
| 706 | %
|
|---|
| 707 | % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
|
|---|
| 708 | \dimen0 = #1\mil
|
|---|
| 709 | \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
|
|---|
| 710 | \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
|
|---|
| 711 | \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
|
|---|
| 712 | %
|
|---|
| 713 | % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
|
|---|
| 714 | % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
|
|---|
| 715 | % And a page break here is fine.
|
|---|
| 716 | \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
|
|---|
| 717 | %
|
|---|
| 718 | % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
|
|---|
| 719 | % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
|
|---|
| 720 | % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
|
|---|
| 721 | % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
|
|---|
| 722 | % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
|
|---|
| 723 | %
|
|---|
| 724 | % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
|
|---|
| 725 | % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
|
|---|
| 726 | % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
|
|---|
| 727 | % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
|
|---|
| 728 | % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
|
|---|
| 729 | % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
|
|---|
| 730 | % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
|
|---|
| 731 | \penalty9999
|
|---|
| 732 | %
|
|---|
| 733 | % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
|
|---|
| 734 | \kern -#1\mil
|
|---|
| 735 | %
|
|---|
| 736 | % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
|
|---|
| 737 | \nobreak
|
|---|
| 738 | \fi
|
|---|
| 739 | }
|
|---|
| 740 |
|
|---|
| 741 | % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
|
|---|
| 742 |
|
|---|
| 743 | \let\br = \par
|
|---|
| 744 |
|
|---|
| 745 | % @page forces the start of a new page.
|
|---|
| 746 | %
|
|---|
| 747 | \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
|---|
| 748 |
|
|---|
| 749 | % @exdent text....
|
|---|
| 750 | % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
|
|---|
| 751 |
|
|---|
| 752 | % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
|
|---|
| 753 | % That's how much \exdent should take out.
|
|---|
| 754 | \newskip\exdentamount
|
|---|
| 755 |
|
|---|
| 756 | % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
|
|---|
| 757 | \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
|
|---|
| 758 |
|
|---|
| 759 | % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
|
|---|
| 760 | \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
|
|---|
| 761 | \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
|
|---|
| 762 |
|
|---|
| 763 | % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
|
|---|
| 764 | % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
|
|---|
| 765 | % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
|
|---|
| 766 | %
|
|---|
| 767 | \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
|
|---|
| 768 | \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
|
|---|
| 769 | %
|
|---|
| 770 | \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
|
|---|
| 771 | \nobreak
|
|---|
| 772 | \kern-\strutdepth
|
|---|
| 773 | \vtop to \strutdepth{%
|
|---|
| 774 | \baselineskip=\strutdepth
|
|---|
| 775 | \vss
|
|---|
| 776 | % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
|
|---|
| 777 | % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
|
|---|
| 778 | \ifx#1l%
|
|---|
| 779 | \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
|
|---|
| 780 | \else
|
|---|
| 781 | \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
|
|---|
| 782 | \fi
|
|---|
| 783 | \null
|
|---|
| 784 | }%
|
|---|
| 785 | }}
|
|---|
| 786 | \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
|
|---|
| 787 | \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
|
|---|
| 788 | %
|
|---|
| 789 | % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
|
|---|
| 790 | % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
|
|---|
| 791 | % else use TEXT for both).
|
|---|
| 792 | %
|
|---|
| 793 | \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
|
|---|
| 794 | \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
|
|---|
| 795 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|---|
| 796 | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
|---|
| 797 | \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
|
|---|
| 798 | \def\righttext{#2}%
|
|---|
| 799 | \else
|
|---|
| 800 | \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
|
|---|
| 801 | \def\righttext{#1}%
|
|---|
| 802 | \fi
|
|---|
| 803 | %
|
|---|
| 804 | \ifodd\pageno
|
|---|
| 805 | \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
|
|---|
| 806 | \else
|
|---|
| 807 | \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
|
|---|
| 808 | \fi
|
|---|
| 809 | \temp
|
|---|
| 810 | }
|
|---|
| 811 |
|
|---|
| 812 | % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
|
|---|
| 813 | % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
|
|---|
| 814 | % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
|
|---|
| 815 | % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
|
|---|
| 816 | % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command
|
|---|
| 817 | % is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work.
|
|---|
| 818 | %
|
|---|
| 819 | \def\|{%
|
|---|
| 820 | % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
|
|---|
| 821 | \leavevmode
|
|---|
| 822 | %
|
|---|
| 823 | % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
|
|---|
| 824 | \vadjust{%
|
|---|
| 825 | % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
|
|---|
| 826 | % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
|
|---|
| 827 | \vskip-\baselineskip
|
|---|
| 828 | %
|
|---|
| 829 | % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
|
|---|
| 830 | % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
|
|---|
| 831 | \llap{%
|
|---|
| 832 | %
|
|---|
| 833 | % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
|
|---|
| 834 | \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
|
|---|
| 835 | %
|
|---|
| 836 | % This is the space between the bar and the text.
|
|---|
| 837 | \hskip 12pt
|
|---|
| 838 | }%
|
|---|
| 839 | }%
|
|---|
| 840 | }
|
|---|
| 841 |
|
|---|
| 842 | % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
|
|---|
| 843 | %
|
|---|
| 844 | \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
|
|---|
| 845 | \def\includezzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 846 | \pushthisfilestack
|
|---|
| 847 | \def\thisfile{#1}%
|
|---|
| 848 | {%
|
|---|
| 849 | \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
|
|---|
| 850 | \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
|
|---|
| 851 | \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
|
|---|
| 852 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
|
|---|
| 853 | %
|
|---|
| 854 | % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
|
|---|
| 855 | % definitions, etc.
|
|---|
| 856 | \expandafter
|
|---|
| 857 | }\temp
|
|---|
| 858 | \popthisfilestack
|
|---|
| 859 | }
|
|---|
| 860 | \def\filenamecatcodes{%
|
|---|
| 861 | \catcode`\\=\other
|
|---|
| 862 | \catcode`~=\other
|
|---|
| 863 | \catcode`^=\other
|
|---|
| 864 | \catcode`_=\other
|
|---|
| 865 | \catcode`|=\other
|
|---|
| 866 | \catcode`<=\other
|
|---|
| 867 | \catcode`>=\other
|
|---|
| 868 | \catcode`+=\other
|
|---|
| 869 | \catcode`-=\other
|
|---|
| 870 | \catcode`\`=\other
|
|---|
| 871 | \catcode`\'=\other
|
|---|
| 872 | }
|
|---|
| 873 |
|
|---|
| 874 | \def\pushthisfilestack{%
|
|---|
| 875 | \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
|
|---|
| 876 | }
|
|---|
| 877 | \def\pushthisfilestackX{%
|
|---|
| 878 | \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
|
|---|
| 879 | }
|
|---|
| 880 | \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
|
|---|
| 881 | \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
|
|---|
| 882 | }
|
|---|
| 883 |
|
|---|
| 884 | \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
|
|---|
| 885 | \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
|
|---|
| 886 | the stack of filenames is empty.}}
|
|---|
| 887 |
|
|---|
| 888 | \def\thisfile{}
|
|---|
| 889 |
|
|---|
| 890 | % @center line
|
|---|
| 891 | % outputs that line, centered.
|
|---|
| 892 | %
|
|---|
| 893 | \parseargdef\center{%
|
|---|
| 894 | \ifhmode
|
|---|
| 895 | \let\next\centerH
|
|---|
| 896 | \else
|
|---|
| 897 | \let\next\centerV
|
|---|
| 898 | \fi
|
|---|
| 899 | \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
|
|---|
| 900 | }
|
|---|
| 901 | \def\centerH#1{%
|
|---|
| 902 | {%
|
|---|
| 903 | \hfil\break
|
|---|
| 904 | \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
|
|---|
| 905 | \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
|---|
| 906 | \line{#1}%
|
|---|
| 907 | \break
|
|---|
| 908 | }%
|
|---|
| 909 | }
|
|---|
| 910 | \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
|
|---|
| 911 |
|
|---|
| 912 | % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
|
|---|
| 913 |
|
|---|
| 914 | \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
|
|---|
| 915 |
|
|---|
| 916 | % @comment ...line which is ignored...
|
|---|
| 917 | % @c is the same as @comment
|
|---|
| 918 | % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
|
|---|
| 919 |
|
|---|
| 920 | \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
|
|---|
| 921 | \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
|
|---|
| 922 | \commentxxx}
|
|---|
| 923 | {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
|
|---|
| 924 |
|
|---|
| 925 | \let\c=\comment
|
|---|
| 926 |
|
|---|
| 927 | % @paragraphindent NCHARS
|
|---|
| 928 | % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
|
|---|
| 929 | % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
|
|---|
| 930 | % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
|
|---|
| 931 | %
|
|---|
| 932 | \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
|
|---|
| 933 | \def\noneword{none}
|
|---|
| 934 | %
|
|---|
| 935 | \parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
|
|---|
| 936 | \def\temp{#1}%
|
|---|
| 937 | \ifx\temp\asisword
|
|---|
| 938 | \else
|
|---|
| 939 | \ifx\temp\noneword
|
|---|
| 940 | \defaultparindent = 0pt
|
|---|
| 941 | \else
|
|---|
| 942 | \defaultparindent = #1em
|
|---|
| 943 | \fi
|
|---|
| 944 | \fi
|
|---|
| 945 | \parindent = \defaultparindent
|
|---|
| 946 | }
|
|---|
| 947 |
|
|---|
| 948 | % @exampleindent NCHARS
|
|---|
| 949 | % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
|
|---|
| 950 | % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
|
|---|
| 951 | % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
|
|---|
| 952 | \parseargdef\exampleindent{%
|
|---|
| 953 | \def\temp{#1}%
|
|---|
| 954 | \ifx\temp\asisword
|
|---|
| 955 | \else
|
|---|
| 956 | \ifx\temp\noneword
|
|---|
| 957 | \lispnarrowing = 0pt
|
|---|
| 958 | \else
|
|---|
| 959 | \lispnarrowing = #1em
|
|---|
| 960 | \fi
|
|---|
| 961 | \fi
|
|---|
| 962 | }
|
|---|
| 963 |
|
|---|
| 964 | % @firstparagraphindent WORD
|
|---|
| 965 | % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
|
|---|
| 966 | % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
|
|---|
| 967 | % paragraphs.
|
|---|
| 968 | %
|
|---|
| 969 | % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
|
|---|
| 970 | % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
|
|---|
| 971 | % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
|
|---|
| 972 | % By default, we suppress indentation.
|
|---|
| 973 | %
|
|---|
| 974 | \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
|---|
| 975 | \def\insertword{insert}
|
|---|
| 976 | %
|
|---|
| 977 | \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
|
|---|
| 978 | \def\temp{#1}%
|
|---|
| 979 | \ifx\temp\noneword
|
|---|
| 980 | \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
|
|---|
| 981 | \else\ifx\temp\insertword
|
|---|
| 982 | \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
|
|---|
| 983 | \else
|
|---|
| 984 | \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|---|
| 985 | \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
|
|---|
| 986 | \fi\fi
|
|---|
| 987 | }
|
|---|
| 988 |
|
|---|
| 989 | % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
|
|---|
| 990 | % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
|
|---|
| 991 | %
|
|---|
| 992 | % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
|
|---|
| 993 | % paragraph.
|
|---|
| 994 | %
|
|---|
| 995 | \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
|
|---|
| 996 | \gdef\indent{%
|
|---|
| 997 | \restorefirstparagraphindent
|
|---|
| 998 | \indent
|
|---|
| 999 | }%
|
|---|
| 1000 | \gdef\noindent{%
|
|---|
| 1001 | \restorefirstparagraphindent
|
|---|
| 1002 | \noindent
|
|---|
| 1003 | }%
|
|---|
| 1004 | \global\everypar = {%
|
|---|
| 1005 | \kern -\parindent
|
|---|
| 1006 | \restorefirstparagraphindent
|
|---|
| 1007 | }%
|
|---|
| 1008 | }
|
|---|
| 1009 |
|
|---|
| 1010 | \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
|
|---|
| 1011 | \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
|
|---|
| 1012 | \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
|
|---|
| 1013 | \global \everypar = {}%
|
|---|
| 1014 | }
|
|---|
| 1015 |
|
|---|
| 1016 |
|
|---|
| 1017 | % @refill is a no-op.
|
|---|
| 1018 | \let\refill=\relax
|
|---|
| 1019 |
|
|---|
| 1020 | % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
|
|---|
| 1021 | % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
|
|---|
| 1022 | % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
|
|---|
| 1023 | %
|
|---|
| 1024 | \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
|
|---|
| 1025 | \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
|
|---|
| 1026 |
|
|---|
| 1027 | % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
|
|---|
| 1028 | % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
|
|---|
| 1029 | % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
|
|---|
| 1030 | \def\setfilename{%
|
|---|
| 1031 | \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
|
|---|
| 1032 | \iflinks
|
|---|
| 1033 | \tryauxfile
|
|---|
| 1034 | % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
|
|---|
| 1035 | \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
|
|---|
| 1036 | \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
|
|---|
| 1037 | \openindices
|
|---|
| 1038 | \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
|
|---|
| 1039 | %
|
|---|
| 1040 | % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
|
|---|
| 1041 | % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
|
|---|
| 1042 | \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
|
|---|
| 1043 | \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
|
|---|
| 1044 | \closein 1
|
|---|
| 1045 | %
|
|---|
| 1046 | \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
|
|---|
| 1047 | }
|
|---|
| 1048 |
|
|---|
| 1049 | % Called from \setfilename.
|
|---|
| 1050 | %
|
|---|
| 1051 | \def\openindices{%
|
|---|
| 1052 | \newindex{cp}%
|
|---|
| 1053 | \newcodeindex{fn}%
|
|---|
| 1054 | \newcodeindex{vr}%
|
|---|
| 1055 | \newcodeindex{tp}%
|
|---|
| 1056 | \newcodeindex{ky}%
|
|---|
| 1057 | \newcodeindex{pg}%
|
|---|
| 1058 | }
|
|---|
| 1059 |
|
|---|
| 1060 | % @bye.
|
|---|
| 1061 | \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
|
|---|
| 1062 |
|
|---|
| 1063 |
|
|---|
| 1064 | \message{pdf,}
|
|---|
| 1065 | % adobe `portable' document format
|
|---|
| 1066 | \newcount\tempnum
|
|---|
| 1067 | \newcount\lnkcount
|
|---|
| 1068 | \newtoks\filename
|
|---|
| 1069 | \newcount\filenamelength
|
|---|
| 1070 | \newcount\pgn
|
|---|
| 1071 | \newtoks\toksA
|
|---|
| 1072 | \newtoks\toksB
|
|---|
| 1073 | \newtoks\toksC
|
|---|
| 1074 | \newtoks\toksD
|
|---|
| 1075 | \newbox\boxA
|
|---|
| 1076 | \newcount\countA
|
|---|
| 1077 | \newif\ifpdf
|
|---|
| 1078 | \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
|
|---|
| 1079 |
|
|---|
| 1080 | % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
|
|---|
| 1081 | % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
|
|---|
| 1082 | % borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
|
|---|
| 1083 | \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
|
|---|
| 1084 | \else
|
|---|
| 1085 | \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
|
|---|
| 1086 | \else
|
|---|
| 1087 | \ifcase\pdfoutput
|
|---|
| 1088 | \else
|
|---|
| 1089 | \pdftrue
|
|---|
| 1090 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1091 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1092 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1093 |
|
|---|
| 1094 | % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
|
|---|
| 1095 | % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
|
|---|
| 1096 | % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
|
|---|
| 1097 | % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
|
|---|
| 1098 | % http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
|
|---|
| 1099 | % (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
|
|---|
| 1100 | % user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
|
|---|
| 1101 | % that's what we do).
|
|---|
| 1102 |
|
|---|
| 1103 | % double active backslashes.
|
|---|
| 1104 | %
|
|---|
| 1105 | {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
|
|---|
| 1106 | @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
|
|---|
| 1107 | @catcode`@\=@active
|
|---|
| 1108 | @let\=@doublebackslash}
|
|---|
| 1109 | }
|
|---|
| 1110 |
|
|---|
| 1111 | % To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
|
|---|
| 1112 | % not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
|
|---|
| 1113 | % us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor
|
|---|
| 1114 | % changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission
|
|---|
| 1115 | % from the author, Heiko Oberdiek.
|
|---|
| 1116 | %
|
|---|
| 1117 | % #1 is the tokens to replace.
|
|---|
| 1118 | % #2 is the replacement.
|
|---|
| 1119 | % #3 is the control sequence with the string.
|
|---|
| 1120 | %
|
|---|
| 1121 | \def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
|
|---|
| 1122 | \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
|
|---|
| 1123 | ##1%
|
|---|
| 1124 | \ifx\\##2\\%
|
|---|
| 1125 | \else
|
|---|
| 1126 | #2%
|
|---|
| 1127 | \HyReturnAfterFi{%
|
|---|
| 1128 | \HyPsdReplace##2\END
|
|---|
| 1129 | }%
|
|---|
| 1130 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1131 | }%
|
|---|
| 1132 | \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
|
|---|
| 1133 | }
|
|---|
| 1134 | \long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
|
|---|
| 1135 |
|
|---|
| 1136 | % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
|
|---|
| 1137 | \def\backslashparens#1{%
|
|---|
| 1138 | \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
|
|---|
| 1139 | % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
|
|---|
| 1140 | \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
|
|---|
| 1141 | \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
|
|---|
| 1142 | }
|
|---|
| 1143 |
|
|---|
| 1144 | \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
|
|---|
| 1145 | with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
|
|---|
| 1146 | be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
|
|---|
| 1147 | output) for that.)}
|
|---|
| 1148 |
|
|---|
| 1149 | \ifpdf
|
|---|
| 1150 | %
|
|---|
| 1151 | % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex,
|
|---|
| 1152 | % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
|
|---|
| 1153 | % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
|
|---|
| 1154 | % of actual black.
|
|---|
| 1155 | \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
|
|---|
| 1156 | \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
|
|---|
| 1157 | %
|
|---|
| 1158 | % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
|
|---|
| 1159 | % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
|
|---|
| 1160 | \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
|
|---|
| 1161 | %
|
|---|
| 1162 | % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
|
|---|
| 1163 | % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
|
|---|
| 1164 | \def\setcolor#1{%
|
|---|
| 1165 | \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
|
|---|
| 1166 | \domark
|
|---|
| 1167 | \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
|
|---|
| 1168 | }
|
|---|
| 1169 | %
|
|---|
| 1170 | \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
|
|---|
| 1171 | \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
|
|---|
| 1172 | \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
|
|---|
| 1173 | \def\lastcolordefs{}
|
|---|
| 1174 | %
|
|---|
| 1175 | \def\makefootline{%
|
|---|
| 1176 | \baselineskip24pt
|
|---|
| 1177 | \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
|
|---|
| 1178 | }
|
|---|
| 1179 | %
|
|---|
| 1180 | \def\makeheadline{%
|
|---|
| 1181 | \vbox to 0pt{%
|
|---|
| 1182 | \vskip-22.5pt
|
|---|
| 1183 | \line{%
|
|---|
| 1184 | \vbox to8.5pt{}%
|
|---|
| 1185 | % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
|
|---|
| 1186 | \getcolormarks
|
|---|
| 1187 | % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
|
|---|
| 1188 | \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
|
|---|
| 1189 | }%
|
|---|
| 1190 | \vss
|
|---|
| 1191 | }%
|
|---|
| 1192 | \nointerlineskip
|
|---|
| 1193 | }
|
|---|
| 1194 | %
|
|---|
| 1195 | %
|
|---|
| 1196 | \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
|
|---|
| 1197 | %
|
|---|
| 1198 | % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
|
|---|
| 1199 | \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
|
|---|
| 1200 | \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|---|
| 1201 | \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
|---|
| 1202 | %
|
|---|
| 1203 | % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among
|
|---|
| 1204 | % others). Let's try in that order.
|
|---|
| 1205 | \let\pdfimgext=\empty
|
|---|
| 1206 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 1207 | \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
|
|---|
| 1208 | \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
|
|---|
| 1209 | \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
|
|---|
| 1210 | \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
|
|---|
| 1211 | \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
|
|---|
| 1212 | \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
|
|---|
| 1213 | \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
|
|---|
| 1214 | \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
|
|---|
| 1215 | \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
|
|---|
| 1216 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1217 | \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
|
|---|
| 1218 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1219 | \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
|
|---|
| 1220 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1221 | \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
|
|---|
| 1222 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1223 | \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
|
|---|
| 1224 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1225 | \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
|
|---|
| 1226 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1227 | \closein 1
|
|---|
| 1228 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 1229 | %
|
|---|
| 1230 | % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
|
|---|
| 1231 | % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
|
|---|
| 1232 | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
|---|
| 1233 | \immediate\pdfimage
|
|---|
| 1234 | \else
|
|---|
| 1235 | \immediate\pdfximage
|
|---|
| 1236 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1237 | \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi
|
|---|
| 1238 | \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi
|
|---|
| 1239 | \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
|
|---|
| 1240 | #1.\pdfimgext
|
|---|
| 1241 | \else
|
|---|
| 1242 | {#1.\pdfimgext}%
|
|---|
| 1243 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1244 | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
|
|---|
| 1245 | \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
|
|---|
| 1246 | \fi}
|
|---|
| 1247 | %
|
|---|
| 1248 | \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
|
|---|
| 1249 | % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
|
|---|
| 1250 | % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
|
|---|
| 1251 | \indexnofonts
|
|---|
| 1252 | \turnoffactive
|
|---|
| 1253 | \activebackslashdouble
|
|---|
| 1254 | \makevalueexpandable
|
|---|
| 1255 | \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
|
|---|
| 1256 | \backslashparens\pdfdestname
|
|---|
| 1257 | \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
|
|---|
| 1258 | }}
|
|---|
| 1259 | %
|
|---|
| 1260 | % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
|
|---|
| 1261 | \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
|
|---|
| 1262 | %
|
|---|
| 1263 | % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
|
|---|
| 1264 | % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
|
|---|
| 1265 | \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
|
|---|
| 1266 | \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
|
|---|
| 1267 | \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
|
|---|
| 1268 | %
|
|---|
| 1269 | % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
|
|---|
| 1270 | % come from Petr Olsak
|
|---|
| 1271 | \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
|
|---|
| 1272 | \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
|
|---|
| 1273 | \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
|
|---|
| 1274 | \advance\tempnum by 1
|
|---|
| 1275 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
|
|---|
| 1276 | %
|
|---|
| 1277 | % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
|
|---|
| 1278 | % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
|
|---|
| 1279 | % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
|
|---|
| 1280 | % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
|
|---|
| 1281 | % #4 is the page number
|
|---|
| 1282 | %
|
|---|
| 1283 | \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
|
|---|
| 1284 | % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
|
|---|
| 1285 | % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
|
|---|
| 1286 | % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
|
|---|
| 1287 | % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
|
|---|
| 1288 | \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
|
|---|
| 1289 | \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
|
|---|
| 1290 | \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
|
|---|
| 1291 | \else
|
|---|
| 1292 | % Doubled backslashes in the name.
|
|---|
| 1293 | {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
|
|---|
| 1294 | \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
|
|---|
| 1295 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1296 | %
|
|---|
| 1297 | % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
|
|---|
| 1298 | {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
|---|
| 1299 | \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
|
|---|
| 1300 | %
|
|---|
| 1301 | \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
|
|---|
| 1302 | }
|
|---|
| 1303 | %
|
|---|
| 1304 | \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
|
|---|
| 1305 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 1306 | % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
|
|---|
| 1307 | \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
|
|---|
| 1308 | \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
|
|---|
| 1309 | %
|
|---|
| 1310 | % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
|
|---|
| 1311 | \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
|
|---|
| 1312 | \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|---|
| 1313 | \def\thischapnum{##2}%
|
|---|
| 1314 | \def\thissecnum{0}%
|
|---|
| 1315 | \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
|---|
| 1316 | }%
|
|---|
| 1317 | \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|---|
| 1318 | \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
|
|---|
| 1319 | \def\thissecnum{##2}%
|
|---|
| 1320 | \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
|---|
| 1321 | }%
|
|---|
| 1322 | \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|---|
| 1323 | \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
|
|---|
| 1324 | \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
|
|---|
| 1325 | }%
|
|---|
| 1326 | \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|---|
| 1327 | \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
|
|---|
| 1328 | }%
|
|---|
| 1329 | \def\thischapnum{0}%
|
|---|
| 1330 | \def\thissecnum{0}%
|
|---|
| 1331 | \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
|---|
| 1332 | %
|
|---|
| 1333 | % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
|
|---|
| 1334 | % al. a second time, below.
|
|---|
| 1335 | \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
|
|---|
| 1336 | \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
|---|
| 1337 | \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
|---|
| 1338 | \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
|---|
| 1339 | \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
|
|---|
| 1340 | \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
|---|
| 1341 | \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
|---|
| 1342 | \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
|---|
| 1343 | \readdatafile{toc}%
|
|---|
| 1344 | %
|
|---|
| 1345 | % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
|
|---|
| 1346 | % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
|
|---|
| 1347 | % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
|
|---|
| 1348 | %
|
|---|
| 1349 | % We use the node names as the destinations.
|
|---|
| 1350 | \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|---|
| 1351 | \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|---|
| 1352 | \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|---|
| 1353 | \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|---|
| 1354 | \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|---|
| 1355 | \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|---|
| 1356 | \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
|
|---|
| 1357 | \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|---|
| 1358 | %
|
|---|
| 1359 | % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
|
|---|
| 1360 | % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
|
|---|
| 1361 | % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
|
|---|
| 1362 | % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
|
|---|
| 1363 | % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
|
|---|
| 1364 | %
|
|---|
| 1365 | % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
|
|---|
| 1366 | % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right
|
|---|
| 1367 | % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
|
|---|
| 1368 | \indexnofonts
|
|---|
| 1369 | \setupdatafile
|
|---|
| 1370 | \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
|
|---|
| 1371 | \input \tocreadfilename
|
|---|
| 1372 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 1373 | }
|
|---|
| 1374 | %
|
|---|
| 1375 | \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
|
|---|
| 1376 | \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
|
|---|
| 1377 | \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
|
|---|
| 1378 | \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
|
|---|
| 1379 | \advance\filenamelength by 1
|
|---|
| 1380 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1381 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1382 | \nextsp}
|
|---|
| 1383 | \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
|
|---|
| 1384 | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
|---|
| 1385 | \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
|
|---|
| 1386 | \else
|
|---|
| 1387 | \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
|
|---|
| 1388 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1389 | % make a live url in pdf output.
|
|---|
| 1390 | \def\pdfurl#1{%
|
|---|
| 1391 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 1392 | % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
|
|---|
| 1393 | % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
|
|---|
| 1394 | % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
|
|---|
| 1395 | % people have actually reported a problem with.
|
|---|
| 1396 | %
|
|---|
| 1397 | \normalturnoffactive
|
|---|
| 1398 | \def\@{@}%
|
|---|
| 1399 | \let\/=\empty
|
|---|
| 1400 | \makevalueexpandable
|
|---|
| 1401 | % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
|
|---|
| 1402 | % special-casing \var here?
|
|---|
| 1403 | \def\var##1{##1}%
|
|---|
| 1404 | %
|
|---|
| 1405 | \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
|
|---|
| 1406 | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
|---|
| 1407 | user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
|
|---|
| 1408 | \endgroup}
|
|---|
| 1409 | \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
|
|---|
| 1410 | \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
|---|
| 1411 | \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
|
|---|
| 1412 | \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
|
|---|
| 1413 | \def\maketoks{%
|
|---|
| 1414 | \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
|
|---|
| 1415 | \ifx\first0\adn0
|
|---|
| 1416 | \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
|
|---|
| 1417 | \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
|
|---|
| 1418 | \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
|
|---|
| 1419 | \else
|
|---|
| 1420 | \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
|
|---|
| 1421 | \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
|
|---|
| 1422 | \let\next=\maketoks
|
|---|
| 1423 | \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
|
|---|
| 1424 | \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
|
|---|
| 1425 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1426 | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
|---|
| 1427 | \next}
|
|---|
| 1428 | \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
|
|---|
| 1429 | {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
|
|---|
| 1430 | \def\pdflink#1{%
|
|---|
| 1431 | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
|
|---|
| 1432 | \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
|
|---|
| 1433 | \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
|
|---|
| 1434 | \else
|
|---|
| 1435 | % non-pdf mode
|
|---|
| 1436 | \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
|
|---|
| 1437 | \let\pdfurl = \gobble
|
|---|
| 1438 | \let\endlink = \relax
|
|---|
| 1439 | \let\setcolor = \gobble
|
|---|
| 1440 | \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
|
|---|
| 1441 | \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
|
|---|
| 1442 | \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
|
|---|
| 1443 |
|
|---|
| 1444 |
|
|---|
| 1445 | \message{fonts,}
|
|---|
| 1446 |
|
|---|
| 1447 | % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
|
|---|
| 1448 | % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
|
|---|
| 1449 | % italics, not bold italics.
|
|---|
| 1450 | %
|
|---|
| 1451 | \def\setfontstyle#1{%
|
|---|
| 1452 | \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
|
|---|
| 1453 | \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
|
|---|
| 1454 | }
|
|---|
| 1455 |
|
|---|
| 1456 | % Select #1 fonts with the current style.
|
|---|
| 1457 | %
|
|---|
| 1458 | \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
|
|---|
| 1459 |
|
|---|
| 1460 | \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
|
|---|
| 1461 | \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
|
|---|
| 1462 | \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
|
|---|
| 1463 | \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
|
|---|
| 1464 | \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
|
|---|
| 1465 |
|
|---|
| 1466 | % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
|
|---|
| 1467 | % in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
|
|---|
| 1468 | \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
|
|---|
| 1469 |
|
|---|
| 1470 | % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
|
|---|
| 1471 | % So we set up a \sf.
|
|---|
| 1472 | \newfam\sffam
|
|---|
| 1473 | \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
|
|---|
| 1474 | \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
|
|---|
| 1475 |
|
|---|
| 1476 | % We don't need math for this font style.
|
|---|
| 1477 | \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
|
|---|
| 1478 |
|
|---|
| 1479 |
|
|---|
| 1480 | % Default leading.
|
|---|
| 1481 | \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
|
|---|
| 1482 |
|
|---|
| 1483 | % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
|
|---|
| 1484 | % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
|
|---|
| 1485 | % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
|
|---|
| 1486 | %
|
|---|
| 1487 | \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
|
|---|
| 1488 | \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
|
|---|
| 1489 | \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
|
|---|
| 1490 | %
|
|---|
| 1491 | % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
|
|---|
| 1492 | \def\baselinefactor{1}
|
|---|
| 1493 | %
|
|---|
| 1494 | \def\setleading#1{%
|
|---|
| 1495 | \dimen0 = #1\relax
|
|---|
| 1496 | \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
|
|---|
| 1497 | \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
|
|---|
| 1498 | \normalbaselines
|
|---|
| 1499 | \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
|
|---|
| 1500 | \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
|
|---|
| 1501 | depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
|
|---|
| 1502 | }%
|
|---|
| 1503 | }
|
|---|
| 1504 |
|
|---|
| 1505 | % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
|
|---|
| 1506 | %
|
|---|
| 1507 | % do nothing with this by default.
|
|---|
| 1508 | \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
|
|---|
| 1509 | \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
|
|---|
| 1510 | \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
|
|---|
| 1511 |
|
|---|
| 1512 | % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
|
|---|
| 1513 | % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
|
|---|
| 1514 | % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
|
|---|
| 1515 | \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else
|
|---|
| 1516 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 1517 | \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
|---|
| 1518 | \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
|---|
| 1519 | %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
|---|
| 1520 | %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
|---|
| 1521 | %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
|
|---|
| 1522 | %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
|
|---|
| 1523 | %%Version: 1.000
|
|---|
| 1524 | %%EndComments
|
|---|
| 1525 | /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
|---|
| 1526 | 12 dict begin
|
|---|
| 1527 | begincmap
|
|---|
| 1528 | /CIDSystemInfo
|
|---|
| 1529 | << /Registry (TeX)
|
|---|
| 1530 | /Ordering (OT1)
|
|---|
| 1531 | /Supplement 0
|
|---|
| 1532 | >> def
|
|---|
| 1533 | /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
|
|---|
| 1534 | /CMapType 2 def
|
|---|
| 1535 | 1 begincodespacerange
|
|---|
| 1536 | <00> <7F>
|
|---|
| 1537 | endcodespacerange
|
|---|
| 1538 | 8 beginbfrange
|
|---|
| 1539 | <00> <01> <0393>
|
|---|
| 1540 | <09> <0A> <03A8>
|
|---|
| 1541 | <23> <26> <0023>
|
|---|
| 1542 | <28> <3B> <0028>
|
|---|
| 1543 | <3F> <5B> <003F>
|
|---|
| 1544 | <5D> <5E> <005D>
|
|---|
| 1545 | <61> <7A> <0061>
|
|---|
| 1546 | <7B> <7C> <2013>
|
|---|
| 1547 | endbfrange
|
|---|
| 1548 | 40 beginbfchar
|
|---|
| 1549 | <02> <0398>
|
|---|
| 1550 | <03> <039B>
|
|---|
| 1551 | <04> <039E>
|
|---|
| 1552 | <05> <03A0>
|
|---|
| 1553 | <06> <03A3>
|
|---|
| 1554 | <07> <03D2>
|
|---|
| 1555 | <08> <03A6>
|
|---|
| 1556 | <0B> <00660066>
|
|---|
| 1557 | <0C> <00660069>
|
|---|
| 1558 | <0D> <0066006C>
|
|---|
| 1559 | <0E> <006600660069>
|
|---|
| 1560 | <0F> <00660066006C>
|
|---|
| 1561 | <10> <0131>
|
|---|
| 1562 | <11> <0237>
|
|---|
| 1563 | <12> <0060>
|
|---|
| 1564 | <13> <00B4>
|
|---|
| 1565 | <14> <02C7>
|
|---|
| 1566 | <15> <02D8>
|
|---|
| 1567 | <16> <00AF>
|
|---|
| 1568 | <17> <02DA>
|
|---|
| 1569 | <18> <00B8>
|
|---|
| 1570 | <19> <00DF>
|
|---|
| 1571 | <1A> <00E6>
|
|---|
| 1572 | <1B> <0153>
|
|---|
| 1573 | <1C> <00F8>
|
|---|
| 1574 | <1D> <00C6>
|
|---|
| 1575 | <1E> <0152>
|
|---|
| 1576 | <1F> <00D8>
|
|---|
| 1577 | <21> <0021>
|
|---|
| 1578 | <22> <201D>
|
|---|
| 1579 | <27> <2019>
|
|---|
| 1580 | <3C> <00A1>
|
|---|
| 1581 | <3D> <003D>
|
|---|
| 1582 | <3E> <00BF>
|
|---|
| 1583 | <5C> <201C>
|
|---|
| 1584 | <5F> <02D9>
|
|---|
| 1585 | <60> <2018>
|
|---|
| 1586 | <7D> <02DD>
|
|---|
| 1587 | <7E> <007E>
|
|---|
| 1588 | <7F> <00A8>
|
|---|
| 1589 | endbfchar
|
|---|
| 1590 | endcmap
|
|---|
| 1591 | CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
|---|
| 1592 | end
|
|---|
| 1593 | end
|
|---|
| 1594 | %%EndResource
|
|---|
| 1595 | %%EOF
|
|---|
| 1596 | }\endgroup
|
|---|
| 1597 | \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
|
|---|
| 1598 | \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
|---|
| 1599 | }%
|
|---|
| 1600 | %
|
|---|
| 1601 | % \cmapOT1IT
|
|---|
| 1602 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 1603 | \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
|---|
| 1604 | \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
|---|
| 1605 | %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
|---|
| 1606 | %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
|---|
| 1607 | %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
|
|---|
| 1608 | %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
|
|---|
| 1609 | %%Version: 1.000
|
|---|
| 1610 | %%EndComments
|
|---|
| 1611 | /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
|---|
| 1612 | 12 dict begin
|
|---|
| 1613 | begincmap
|
|---|
| 1614 | /CIDSystemInfo
|
|---|
| 1615 | << /Registry (TeX)
|
|---|
| 1616 | /Ordering (OT1IT)
|
|---|
| 1617 | /Supplement 0
|
|---|
| 1618 | >> def
|
|---|
| 1619 | /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
|
|---|
| 1620 | /CMapType 2 def
|
|---|
| 1621 | 1 begincodespacerange
|
|---|
| 1622 | <00> <7F>
|
|---|
| 1623 | endcodespacerange
|
|---|
| 1624 | 8 beginbfrange
|
|---|
| 1625 | <00> <01> <0393>
|
|---|
| 1626 | <09> <0A> <03A8>
|
|---|
| 1627 | <25> <26> <0025>
|
|---|
| 1628 | <28> <3B> <0028>
|
|---|
| 1629 | <3F> <5B> <003F>
|
|---|
| 1630 | <5D> <5E> <005D>
|
|---|
| 1631 | <61> <7A> <0061>
|
|---|
| 1632 | <7B> <7C> <2013>
|
|---|
| 1633 | endbfrange
|
|---|
| 1634 | 42 beginbfchar
|
|---|
| 1635 | <02> <0398>
|
|---|
| 1636 | <03> <039B>
|
|---|
| 1637 | <04> <039E>
|
|---|
| 1638 | <05> <03A0>
|
|---|
| 1639 | <06> <03A3>
|
|---|
| 1640 | <07> <03D2>
|
|---|
| 1641 | <08> <03A6>
|
|---|
| 1642 | <0B> <00660066>
|
|---|
| 1643 | <0C> <00660069>
|
|---|
| 1644 | <0D> <0066006C>
|
|---|
| 1645 | <0E> <006600660069>
|
|---|
| 1646 | <0F> <00660066006C>
|
|---|
| 1647 | <10> <0131>
|
|---|
| 1648 | <11> <0237>
|
|---|
| 1649 | <12> <0060>
|
|---|
| 1650 | <13> <00B4>
|
|---|
| 1651 | <14> <02C7>
|
|---|
| 1652 | <15> <02D8>
|
|---|
| 1653 | <16> <00AF>
|
|---|
| 1654 | <17> <02DA>
|
|---|
| 1655 | <18> <00B8>
|
|---|
| 1656 | <19> <00DF>
|
|---|
| 1657 | <1A> <00E6>
|
|---|
| 1658 | <1B> <0153>
|
|---|
| 1659 | <1C> <00F8>
|
|---|
| 1660 | <1D> <00C6>
|
|---|
| 1661 | <1E> <0152>
|
|---|
| 1662 | <1F> <00D8>
|
|---|
| 1663 | <21> <0021>
|
|---|
| 1664 | <22> <201D>
|
|---|
| 1665 | <23> <0023>
|
|---|
| 1666 | <24> <00A3>
|
|---|
| 1667 | <27> <2019>
|
|---|
| 1668 | <3C> <00A1>
|
|---|
| 1669 | <3D> <003D>
|
|---|
| 1670 | <3E> <00BF>
|
|---|
| 1671 | <5C> <201C>
|
|---|
| 1672 | <5F> <02D9>
|
|---|
| 1673 | <60> <2018>
|
|---|
| 1674 | <7D> <02DD>
|
|---|
| 1675 | <7E> <007E>
|
|---|
| 1676 | <7F> <00A8>
|
|---|
| 1677 | endbfchar
|
|---|
| 1678 | endcmap
|
|---|
| 1679 | CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
|---|
| 1680 | end
|
|---|
| 1681 | end
|
|---|
| 1682 | %%EndResource
|
|---|
| 1683 | %%EOF
|
|---|
| 1684 | }\endgroup
|
|---|
| 1685 | \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
|
|---|
| 1686 | \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
|---|
| 1687 | }%
|
|---|
| 1688 | %
|
|---|
| 1689 | % \cmapOT1TT
|
|---|
| 1690 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 1691 | \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
|---|
| 1692 | \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
|---|
| 1693 | %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
|---|
| 1694 | %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
|---|
| 1695 | %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
|
|---|
| 1696 | %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
|
|---|
| 1697 | %%Version: 1.000
|
|---|
| 1698 | %%EndComments
|
|---|
| 1699 | /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
|---|
| 1700 | 12 dict begin
|
|---|
| 1701 | begincmap
|
|---|
| 1702 | /CIDSystemInfo
|
|---|
| 1703 | << /Registry (TeX)
|
|---|
| 1704 | /Ordering (OT1TT)
|
|---|
| 1705 | /Supplement 0
|
|---|
| 1706 | >> def
|
|---|
| 1707 | /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
|
|---|
| 1708 | /CMapType 2 def
|
|---|
| 1709 | 1 begincodespacerange
|
|---|
| 1710 | <00> <7F>
|
|---|
| 1711 | endcodespacerange
|
|---|
| 1712 | 5 beginbfrange
|
|---|
| 1713 | <00> <01> <0393>
|
|---|
| 1714 | <09> <0A> <03A8>
|
|---|
| 1715 | <21> <26> <0021>
|
|---|
| 1716 | <28> <5F> <0028>
|
|---|
| 1717 | <61> <7E> <0061>
|
|---|
| 1718 | endbfrange
|
|---|
| 1719 | 32 beginbfchar
|
|---|
| 1720 | <02> <0398>
|
|---|
| 1721 | <03> <039B>
|
|---|
| 1722 | <04> <039E>
|
|---|
| 1723 | <05> <03A0>
|
|---|
| 1724 | <06> <03A3>
|
|---|
| 1725 | <07> <03D2>
|
|---|
| 1726 | <08> <03A6>
|
|---|
| 1727 | <0B> <2191>
|
|---|
| 1728 | <0C> <2193>
|
|---|
| 1729 | <0D> <0027>
|
|---|
| 1730 | <0E> <00A1>
|
|---|
| 1731 | <0F> <00BF>
|
|---|
| 1732 | <10> <0131>
|
|---|
| 1733 | <11> <0237>
|
|---|
| 1734 | <12> <0060>
|
|---|
| 1735 | <13> <00B4>
|
|---|
| 1736 | <14> <02C7>
|
|---|
| 1737 | <15> <02D8>
|
|---|
| 1738 | <16> <00AF>
|
|---|
| 1739 | <17> <02DA>
|
|---|
| 1740 | <18> <00B8>
|
|---|
| 1741 | <19> <00DF>
|
|---|
| 1742 | <1A> <00E6>
|
|---|
| 1743 | <1B> <0153>
|
|---|
| 1744 | <1C> <00F8>
|
|---|
| 1745 | <1D> <00C6>
|
|---|
| 1746 | <1E> <0152>
|
|---|
| 1747 | <1F> <00D8>
|
|---|
| 1748 | <20> <2423>
|
|---|
| 1749 | <27> <2019>
|
|---|
| 1750 | <60> <2018>
|
|---|
| 1751 | <7F> <00A8>
|
|---|
| 1752 | endbfchar
|
|---|
| 1753 | endcmap
|
|---|
| 1754 | CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
|---|
| 1755 | end
|
|---|
| 1756 | end
|
|---|
| 1757 | %%EndResource
|
|---|
| 1758 | %%EOF
|
|---|
| 1759 | }\endgroup
|
|---|
| 1760 | \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
|
|---|
| 1761 | \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
|---|
| 1762 | }%
|
|---|
| 1763 | \fi\fi
|
|---|
| 1764 |
|
|---|
| 1765 |
|
|---|
| 1766 | % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
|
|---|
| 1767 | % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
|
|---|
| 1768 | % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
|
|---|
| 1769 | % encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass
|
|---|
| 1770 | % empty to omit).
|
|---|
| 1771 | \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
|
|---|
| 1772 | \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
|
|---|
| 1773 | \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
|
|---|
| 1774 | }
|
|---|
| 1775 | % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
|
|---|
| 1776 | \let\cmap\gobble
|
|---|
| 1777 | % emacs-page end of cmaps
|
|---|
| 1778 |
|
|---|
| 1779 | % Use cm as the default font prefix.
|
|---|
| 1780 | % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
|
|---|
| 1781 | % before you read in texinfo.tex.
|
|---|
| 1782 | \ifx\fontprefix\undefined
|
|---|
| 1783 | \def\fontprefix{cm}
|
|---|
| 1784 | \fi
|
|---|
| 1785 | % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
|
|---|
| 1786 | \def\rmshape{r}
|
|---|
| 1787 | \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
|
|---|
| 1788 | \def\bfshape{b}
|
|---|
| 1789 | \def\bxshape{bx}
|
|---|
| 1790 | \def\ttshape{tt}
|
|---|
| 1791 | \def\ttbshape{tt}
|
|---|
| 1792 | \def\ttslshape{sltt}
|
|---|
| 1793 | \def\itshape{ti}
|
|---|
| 1794 | \def\itbshape{bxti}
|
|---|
| 1795 | \def\slshape{sl}
|
|---|
| 1796 | \def\slbshape{bxsl}
|
|---|
| 1797 | \def\sfshape{ss}
|
|---|
| 1798 | \def\sfbshape{ss}
|
|---|
| 1799 | \def\scshape{csc}
|
|---|
| 1800 | \def\scbshape{csc}
|
|---|
| 1801 |
|
|---|
| 1802 | % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in
|
|---|
| 1803 | % Texinfo.
|
|---|
| 1804 | %
|
|---|
| 1805 | \def\definetextfontsizexi{%
|
|---|
| 1806 | % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
|
|---|
| 1807 | \def\textnominalsize{11pt}
|
|---|
| 1808 | \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
|
|---|
| 1809 | \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1810 | \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1811 | \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1812 | \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 1813 | \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1814 | \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1815 | \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1816 | \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1817 | \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|---|
| 1818 | \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|---|
| 1819 | \def\textecsize{1095}
|
|---|
| 1820 |
|
|---|
| 1821 | % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
|---|
| 1822 | \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1823 | \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1824 | \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1825 | \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
|
|---|
| 1826 |
|
|---|
| 1827 | % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
|---|
| 1828 | \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
|---|
| 1829 | \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1830 | \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1831 | \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1832 | \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 1833 | \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1834 | \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1835 | \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1836 | \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1837 | \font\smalli=cmmi9
|
|---|
| 1838 | \font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
|---|
| 1839 | \def\smallecsize{0900}
|
|---|
| 1840 |
|
|---|
| 1841 | % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
|---|
| 1842 | \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
|---|
| 1843 | \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1844 | \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1845 | \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1846 | \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 1847 | \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1848 | \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1849 | \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1850 | \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1851 | \font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
|---|
| 1852 | \font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
|---|
| 1853 | \def\smallerecsize{0800}
|
|---|
| 1854 |
|
|---|
| 1855 | % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
|---|
| 1856 | \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
|---|
| 1857 | \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1858 | \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 1859 | \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1860 | \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1861 | \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1862 | \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1863 | \let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
|---|
| 1864 | \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1865 | \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
|---|
| 1866 | \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
|---|
| 1867 | \def\titleecsize{2074}
|
|---|
| 1868 |
|
|---|
| 1869 | % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
|
|---|
| 1870 | \def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
|
|---|
| 1871 | \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1872 | \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 1873 | \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1874 | \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1875 | \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1876 | \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1877 | \let\chapbf=\chaprm
|
|---|
| 1878 | \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1879 | \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
|
|---|
| 1880 | \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
|
|---|
| 1881 | \def\chapecsize{1728}
|
|---|
| 1882 |
|
|---|
| 1883 | % Section fonts (14.4pt).
|
|---|
| 1884 | \def\secnominalsize{14pt}
|
|---|
| 1885 | \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1886 | \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 1887 | \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1888 | \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1889 | \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1890 | \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1891 | \let\secbf\secrm
|
|---|
| 1892 | \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1893 | \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
|---|
| 1894 | \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
|---|
| 1895 | \def\sececsize{1440}
|
|---|
| 1896 |
|
|---|
| 1897 | % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
|
|---|
| 1898 | \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
|
|---|
| 1899 | \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1900 | \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 1901 | \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1902 | \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1903 | \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1904 | \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1905 | \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
|---|
| 1906 | \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1907 | \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
|
|---|
| 1908 | \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
|
|---|
| 1909 | \def\ssececsize{1200}
|
|---|
| 1910 |
|
|---|
| 1911 | % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
|
|---|
| 1912 | \def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
|
|---|
| 1913 | \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1914 | \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1915 | \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1916 | \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 1917 | \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1918 | \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1919 | \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1920 | \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1921 | \font\reducedi=cmmi10
|
|---|
| 1922 | \font\reducedsy=cmsy10
|
|---|
| 1923 | \def\reducedecsize{1000}
|
|---|
| 1924 |
|
|---|
| 1925 | \textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
|
|---|
| 1926 | \textfonts % reset the current fonts
|
|---|
| 1927 | \rm
|
|---|
| 1928 | } % end of 11pt text font size definitions
|
|---|
| 1929 |
|
|---|
| 1930 |
|
|---|
| 1931 | % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
|
|---|
| 1932 | % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
|
|---|
| 1933 | % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
|
|---|
| 1934 | % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
|
|---|
| 1935 | %
|
|---|
| 1936 | \def\definetextfontsizex{%
|
|---|
| 1937 | % Text fonts (10pt).
|
|---|
| 1938 | \def\textnominalsize{10pt}
|
|---|
| 1939 | \edef\mainmagstep{1000}
|
|---|
| 1940 | \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1941 | \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1942 | \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1943 | \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 1944 | \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1945 | \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1946 | \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1947 | \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1948 | \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|---|
| 1949 | \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|---|
| 1950 | \def\textecsize{1000}
|
|---|
| 1951 |
|
|---|
| 1952 | % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
|---|
| 1953 | \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1954 | \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1955 | \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1956 | \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
|
|---|
| 1957 |
|
|---|
| 1958 | % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
|---|
| 1959 | \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
|---|
| 1960 | \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1961 | \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1962 | \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1963 | \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 1964 | \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1965 | \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1966 | \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1967 | \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1968 | \font\smalli=cmmi9
|
|---|
| 1969 | \font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
|---|
| 1970 | \def\smallecsize{0900}
|
|---|
| 1971 |
|
|---|
| 1972 | % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
|---|
| 1973 | \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
|---|
| 1974 | \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1975 | \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1976 | \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1977 | \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 1978 | \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1979 | \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1980 | \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1981 | \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1982 | \font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
|---|
| 1983 | \font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
|---|
| 1984 | \def\smallerecsize{0800}
|
|---|
| 1985 |
|
|---|
| 1986 | % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
|---|
| 1987 | \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
|---|
| 1988 | \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1989 | \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 1990 | \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1991 | \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1992 | \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 1993 | \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1994 | \let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
|---|
| 1995 | \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 1996 | \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
|---|
| 1997 | \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
|---|
| 1998 | \def\titleecsize{2074}
|
|---|
| 1999 |
|
|---|
| 2000 | % Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
|
|---|
| 2001 | \def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
|
|---|
| 2002 | \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2003 | \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 2004 | \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2005 | \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 2006 | \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 2007 | \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2008 | \let\chapbf\chaprm
|
|---|
| 2009 | \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2010 | \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
|---|
| 2011 | \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
|---|
| 2012 | \def\chapecsize{1440}
|
|---|
| 2013 |
|
|---|
| 2014 | % Section fonts (12pt).
|
|---|
| 2015 | \def\secnominalsize{12pt}
|
|---|
| 2016 | \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2017 | \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 2018 | \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2019 | \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 2020 | \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 2021 | \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2022 | \let\secbf\secrm
|
|---|
| 2023 | \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2024 | \font\seci=cmmi12
|
|---|
| 2025 | \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
|
|---|
| 2026 | \def\sececsize{1200}
|
|---|
| 2027 |
|
|---|
| 2028 | % Subsection fonts (10pt).
|
|---|
| 2029 | \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
|
|---|
| 2030 | \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2031 | \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 2032 | \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2033 | \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 2034 | \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 2035 | \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2036 | \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
|---|
| 2037 | \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2038 | \font\sseci=cmmi10
|
|---|
| 2039 | \font\ssecsy=cmsy10
|
|---|
| 2040 | \def\ssececsize{1000}
|
|---|
| 2041 |
|
|---|
| 2042 | % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
|
|---|
| 2043 | \def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
|
|---|
| 2044 | \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2045 | \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 2046 | \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2047 | \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|---|
| 2048 | \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2049 | \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2050 | \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2051 | \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 2052 | \font\reducedi=cmmi9
|
|---|
| 2053 | \font\reducedsy=cmsy9
|
|---|
| 2054 | \def\reducedecsize{0900}
|
|---|
| 2055 |
|
|---|
| 2056 | \divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs
|
|---|
| 2057 | \textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM
|
|---|
| 2058 | \textfonts % reset the current fonts
|
|---|
| 2059 | \rm
|
|---|
| 2060 | } % end of 10pt text font size definitions
|
|---|
| 2061 |
|
|---|
| 2062 |
|
|---|
| 2063 | % We provide the user-level command
|
|---|
| 2064 | % @fonttextsize 10
|
|---|
| 2065 | % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
|
|---|
| 2066 | %
|
|---|
| 2067 | \def\xword{10}
|
|---|
| 2068 | \def\xiword{11}
|
|---|
| 2069 | %
|
|---|
| 2070 | \parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
|
|---|
| 2071 | \def\textsizearg{#1}%
|
|---|
| 2072 | \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
|
|---|
| 2073 | %
|
|---|
| 2074 | % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
|
|---|
| 2075 | % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
|
|---|
| 2076 | %
|
|---|
| 2077 | \begingroup \globaldefs=1
|
|---|
| 2078 | \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
|
|---|
| 2079 | \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
|
|---|
| 2080 | \else
|
|---|
| 2081 | \errhelp=\EMsimple
|
|---|
| 2082 | \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
|
|---|
| 2083 | \fi\fi
|
|---|
| 2084 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 2085 | }
|
|---|
| 2086 |
|
|---|
| 2087 |
|
|---|
| 2088 | % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
|
|---|
| 2089 | % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
|
|---|
| 2090 | % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
|
|---|
| 2091 | % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
|
|---|
| 2092 | % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
|
|---|
| 2093 | %
|
|---|
| 2094 | \def\resetmathfonts{%
|
|---|
| 2095 | \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
|
|---|
| 2096 | \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
|
|---|
| 2097 | \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
|
|---|
| 2098 | }
|
|---|
| 2099 |
|
|---|
| 2100 | % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
|
|---|
| 2101 | % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
|
|---|
| 2102 | % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
|
|---|
| 2103 | % \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
|
|---|
| 2104 | %
|
|---|
| 2105 | % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
|
|---|
| 2106 | % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
|
|---|
| 2107 | % the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
|
|---|
| 2108 | %
|
|---|
| 2109 | % This all needs generalizing, badly.
|
|---|
| 2110 | %
|
|---|
| 2111 | \def\textfonts{%
|
|---|
| 2112 | \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
|
|---|
| 2113 | \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
|
|---|
| 2114 | \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
|
|---|
| 2115 | \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
|
|---|
| 2116 | \def\curfontsize{text}%
|
|---|
| 2117 | \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
|---|
| 2118 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
|
|---|
| 2119 | \def\titlefonts{%
|
|---|
| 2120 | \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
|
|---|
| 2121 | \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
|
|---|
| 2122 | \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
|
|---|
| 2123 | \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
|
|---|
| 2124 | \def\curfontsize{title}%
|
|---|
| 2125 | \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
|
|---|
| 2126 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}}
|
|---|
| 2127 | \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
|
|---|
| 2128 | \def\chapfonts{%
|
|---|
| 2129 | \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
|
|---|
| 2130 | \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
|
|---|
| 2131 | \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
|
|---|
| 2132 | \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
|
|---|
| 2133 | \def\curfontsize{chap}%
|
|---|
| 2134 | \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
|
|---|
| 2135 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
|
|---|
| 2136 | \def\secfonts{%
|
|---|
| 2137 | \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
|
|---|
| 2138 | \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
|
|---|
| 2139 | \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
|
|---|
| 2140 | \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
|
|---|
| 2141 | \def\curfontsize{sec}%
|
|---|
| 2142 | \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
|
|---|
| 2143 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
|
|---|
| 2144 | \def\subsecfonts{%
|
|---|
| 2145 | \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
|
|---|
| 2146 | \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
|
|---|
| 2147 | \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
|
|---|
| 2148 | \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
|
|---|
| 2149 | \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
|
|---|
| 2150 | \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
|
|---|
| 2151 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
|
|---|
| 2152 | \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
|
|---|
| 2153 | \def\reducedfonts{%
|
|---|
| 2154 | \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
|
|---|
| 2155 | \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
|
|---|
| 2156 | \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
|
|---|
| 2157 | \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
|
|---|
| 2158 | \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
|
|---|
| 2159 | \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
|---|
| 2160 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
|
|---|
| 2161 | \def\smallfonts{%
|
|---|
| 2162 | \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
|
|---|
| 2163 | \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
|
|---|
| 2164 | \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
|
|---|
| 2165 | \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
|
|---|
| 2166 | \def\curfontsize{small}%
|
|---|
| 2167 | \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
|---|
| 2168 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
|
|---|
| 2169 | \def\smallerfonts{%
|
|---|
| 2170 | \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
|
|---|
| 2171 | \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
|
|---|
| 2172 | \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
|
|---|
| 2173 | \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
|
|---|
| 2174 | \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
|
|---|
| 2175 | \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
|---|
| 2176 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
|
|---|
| 2177 |
|
|---|
| 2178 | % Fonts for short table of contents.
|
|---|
| 2179 | \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2180 | \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
|
|---|
| 2181 | \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2182 | \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|---|
| 2183 |
|
|---|
| 2184 | % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
|
|---|
| 2185 | \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
|
|---|
| 2186 | \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
|
|---|
| 2187 |
|
|---|
| 2188 | % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
|
|---|
| 2189 | \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
|
|---|
| 2190 |
|
|---|
| 2191 | % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
|
|---|
| 2192 | % can fit this many characters:
|
|---|
| 2193 | % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
|
|---|
| 2194 | % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
|
|---|
| 2195 | % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
|
|---|
| 2196 | % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
|
|---|
| 2197 | % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
|
|---|
| 2198 | %
|
|---|
| 2199 | % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
|
|---|
| 2200 | % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
|
|---|
| 2201 | % --karl, 24jan03.
|
|---|
| 2202 |
|
|---|
| 2203 | % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
|
|---|
| 2204 | %
|
|---|
| 2205 | \definetextfontsizexi
|
|---|
| 2206 |
|
|---|
| 2207 |
|
|---|
| 2208 | \message{markup,}
|
|---|
| 2209 |
|
|---|
| 2210 | % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
|
|---|
| 2211 | % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
|
|---|
| 2212 | % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
|
|---|
| 2213 | % this property, we can check that font parameter.
|
|---|
| 2214 | %
|
|---|
| 2215 | \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
|
|---|
| 2216 |
|
|---|
| 2217 | % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
|
|---|
| 2218 | % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
|
|---|
| 2219 | % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
|
|---|
| 2220 | % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
|
|---|
| 2221 | % currently in effect.
|
|---|
| 2222 | \newif\ifmarkupvar
|
|---|
| 2223 | \newif\ifmarkupsamp
|
|---|
| 2224 | \newif\ifmarkupkey
|
|---|
| 2225 | %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
|
|---|
| 2226 | %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
|
|---|
| 2227 | \newif\ifmarkupcode
|
|---|
| 2228 | \newif\ifmarkupkbd
|
|---|
| 2229 | %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
|
|---|
| 2230 | %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
|
|---|
| 2231 | \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
|
|---|
| 2232 | \newif\ifmarkupexample
|
|---|
| 2233 | \newif\ifmarkupverb
|
|---|
| 2234 | \newif\ifmarkupverbatim
|
|---|
| 2235 |
|
|---|
| 2236 | \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
|
|---|
| 2237 |
|
|---|
| 2238 | \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
|
|---|
| 2239 | \csname markup#1true\endcsname
|
|---|
| 2240 | \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
|
|---|
| 2241 | \markupstylesetup
|
|---|
| 2242 | }
|
|---|
| 2243 |
|
|---|
| 2244 | \let\markupstylesetup\empty
|
|---|
| 2245 |
|
|---|
| 2246 | \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
|
|---|
| 2247 | \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
|
|---|
| 2248 | \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
|
|---|
| 2249 | \def#1%
|
|---|
| 2250 | }
|
|---|
| 2251 |
|
|---|
| 2252 | % Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
|
|---|
| 2253 | \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
|
|---|
| 2254 | \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
|
|---|
| 2255 | \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
|
|---|
| 2256 | }
|
|---|
| 2257 |
|
|---|
| 2258 | \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
|
|---|
| 2259 | \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
|
|---|
| 2260 | \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
|
|---|
| 2261 | }
|
|---|
| 2262 |
|
|---|
| 2263 | {
|
|---|
| 2264 | \catcode`\'=\active
|
|---|
| 2265 | \catcode`\`=\active
|
|---|
| 2266 |
|
|---|
| 2267 | \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
|
|---|
| 2268 | \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
|
|---|
| 2269 |
|
|---|
| 2270 | \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
|
|---|
| 2271 | \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
|
|---|
| 2272 |
|
|---|
| 2273 | \gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft}
|
|---|
| 2274 | }
|
|---|
| 2275 |
|
|---|
| 2276 | \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
|---|
| 2277 | \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
|
|---|
| 2278 | %
|
|---|
| 2279 | \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
|---|
| 2280 | \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
|
|---|
| 2281 | %
|
|---|
| 2282 | \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
|---|
| 2283 | \let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
|
|---|
| 2284 | %
|
|---|
| 2285 | \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
|---|
| 2286 | \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
|
|---|
| 2287 | %
|
|---|
| 2288 | \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
|---|
| 2289 | \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
|
|---|
| 2290 |
|
|---|
| 2291 | \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
|
|---|
| 2292 |
|
|---|
| 2293 | % Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right
|
|---|
| 2294 | % quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote
|
|---|
| 2295 | % from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it
|
|---|
| 2296 | % the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least
|
|---|
| 2297 | % evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the
|
|---|
| 2298 | % regular 0x27.
|
|---|
| 2299 | %
|
|---|
| 2300 | \def\codequoteright{%
|
|---|
| 2301 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
|
|---|
| 2302 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
|
|---|
| 2303 | '%
|
|---|
| 2304 | \else \char'15 \fi
|
|---|
| 2305 | \else \char'15 \fi
|
|---|
| 2306 | }
|
|---|
| 2307 | %
|
|---|
| 2308 | % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
|
|---|
| 2309 | % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
|
|---|
| 2310 | % the code environments to do likewise.
|
|---|
| 2311 | %
|
|---|
| 2312 | \def\codequoteleft{%
|
|---|
| 2313 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
|
|---|
| 2314 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
|
|---|
| 2315 | % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
|
|---|
| 2316 | % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
|
|---|
| 2317 | \relax`%
|
|---|
| 2318 | \else \char'22 \fi
|
|---|
| 2319 | \else \char'22 \fi
|
|---|
| 2320 | }
|
|---|
| 2321 |
|
|---|
| 2322 | % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
|
|---|
| 2323 | \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
|
|---|
| 2324 |
|
|---|
| 2325 | % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
|
|---|
| 2326 | \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
|
|---|
| 2327 |
|
|---|
| 2328 | % Font commands.
|
|---|
| 2329 |
|
|---|
| 2330 | % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
|
|---|
| 2331 | % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
|
|---|
| 2332 | % and 2) do not add an italic correction.
|
|---|
| 2333 | \def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 2334 | \ifusingtt
|
|---|
| 2335 | {\ttsl #2\let\next=\relax}%
|
|---|
| 2336 | {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
|
|---|
| 2337 | \next
|
|---|
| 2338 | }
|
|---|
| 2339 | \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
|
|---|
| 2340 | \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
|
|---|
| 2341 |
|
|---|
| 2342 | % Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
|
|---|
| 2343 | % character) is such as not to need one.
|
|---|
| 2344 | \def\smartitaliccorrection{%
|
|---|
| 2345 | \ifx\next,%
|
|---|
| 2346 | \else\ifx\next-%
|
|---|
| 2347 | \else\ifx\next.%
|
|---|
| 2348 | \else\ptexslash
|
|---|
| 2349 | \fi\fi\fi}
|
|---|
| 2350 |
|
|---|
| 2351 | % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl, and no ic.
|
|---|
| 2352 | % @var is set to this for defun arguments.
|
|---|
| 2353 | \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
|
|---|
| 2354 |
|
|---|
| 2355 | % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
|
|---|
| 2356 | % ttsl for book titles, do we?
|
|---|
| 2357 | \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
|
|---|
| 2358 |
|
|---|
| 2359 | \let\i=\smartitalic
|
|---|
| 2360 | \let\slanted=\smartslanted
|
|---|
| 2361 | \def\var#1{\smartslanted{#1}}
|
|---|
| 2362 | \let\dfn=\smartslanted
|
|---|
| 2363 | \let\emph=\smartitalic
|
|---|
| 2364 |
|
|---|
| 2365 | % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
|
|---|
| 2366 | \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
|
|---|
| 2367 | \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
|
|---|
| 2368 | \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
|
|---|
| 2369 |
|
|---|
| 2370 | % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
|
|---|
| 2371 | \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
|
|---|
| 2372 | \let\strong=\b
|
|---|
| 2373 |
|
|---|
| 2374 | % @sansserif, explicit sans.
|
|---|
| 2375 | \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
|
|---|
| 2376 |
|
|---|
| 2377 | % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
|
|---|
| 2378 | % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
|
|---|
| 2379 | % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
|
|---|
| 2380 | %
|
|---|
| 2381 | \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
|
|---|
| 2382 | \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
|
|---|
| 2383 |
|
|---|
| 2384 | % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
|
|---|
| 2385 | % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
|
|---|
| 2386 | % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
|
|---|
| 2387 | %
|
|---|
| 2388 | \catcode`@=11
|
|---|
| 2389 | \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
|
|---|
| 2390 | \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
|
|---|
| 2391 | \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
|
|---|
| 2392 | \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
|
|---|
| 2393 | }
|
|---|
| 2394 | \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
|
|---|
| 2395 | \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
|
|---|
| 2396 | \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
|
|---|
| 2397 | \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
|
|---|
| 2398 | }
|
|---|
| 2399 | \catcode`@=\other
|
|---|
| 2400 | \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
|
|---|
| 2401 |
|
|---|
| 2402 | % @t, explicit typewriter.
|
|---|
| 2403 | \def\t#1{%
|
|---|
| 2404 | {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
|---|
| 2405 | \null
|
|---|
| 2406 | }
|
|---|
| 2407 |
|
|---|
| 2408 | % @samp.
|
|---|
| 2409 | \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
|
|---|
| 2410 |
|
|---|
| 2411 | % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
|
|---|
| 2412 | %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|---|
| 2413 | %\font\keysy=cmsy9
|
|---|
| 2414 | %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
|
|---|
| 2415 | % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
|
|---|
| 2416 | % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
|
|---|
| 2417 | % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
|
|---|
| 2418 | % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
|
|---|
| 2419 | % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
|
|---|
| 2420 |
|
|---|
| 2421 | % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
|
|---|
| 2422 | % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
|
|---|
| 2423 | % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
|
|---|
| 2424 | %
|
|---|
| 2425 | \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
|
|---|
| 2426 | \nohyphenation
|
|---|
| 2427 | \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
|
|---|
| 2428 | #1}\null}
|
|---|
| 2429 |
|
|---|
| 2430 | % ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command.
|
|---|
| 2431 | \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
|
|---|
| 2432 |
|
|---|
| 2433 | % @file, @option are the same as @samp.
|
|---|
| 2434 | \let\file=\samp
|
|---|
| 2435 | \let\option=\samp
|
|---|
| 2436 |
|
|---|
| 2437 | % @code is a modification of @t,
|
|---|
| 2438 | % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
|
|---|
| 2439 | \def\tclose#1{%
|
|---|
| 2440 | {%
|
|---|
| 2441 | % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
|
|---|
| 2442 | \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
|
|---|
| 2443 | %
|
|---|
| 2444 | % Switch to typewriter.
|
|---|
| 2445 | \tt
|
|---|
| 2446 | %
|
|---|
| 2447 | % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
|
|---|
| 2448 | \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
|
|---|
| 2449 | %
|
|---|
| 2450 | % Turn off hyphenation.
|
|---|
| 2451 | \nohyphenation
|
|---|
| 2452 | %
|
|---|
| 2453 | \rawbackslash
|
|---|
| 2454 | \plainfrenchspacing
|
|---|
| 2455 | #1%
|
|---|
| 2456 | }%
|
|---|
| 2457 | \null
|
|---|
| 2458 | }
|
|---|
| 2459 |
|
|---|
| 2460 | % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
|
|---|
| 2461 | % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
|
|---|
| 2462 | % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
|
|---|
| 2463 |
|
|---|
| 2464 | % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
|
|---|
| 2465 | % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
|
|---|
| 2466 | % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
|
|---|
| 2467 | % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
|
|---|
| 2468 | % -- rms.
|
|---|
| 2469 | {
|
|---|
| 2470 | \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
|
|---|
| 2471 | \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
|
|---|
| 2472 | \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
|
|---|
| 2473 | %
|
|---|
| 2474 | \global\def\code{\begingroup
|
|---|
| 2475 | \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
|
|---|
| 2476 | % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
|
|---|
| 2477 | \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
|
|---|
| 2478 | \ifallowcodebreaks
|
|---|
| 2479 | \let-\codedash
|
|---|
| 2480 | \let_\codeunder
|
|---|
| 2481 | \else
|
|---|
| 2482 | \let-\realdash
|
|---|
| 2483 | \let_\realunder
|
|---|
| 2484 | \fi
|
|---|
| 2485 | \codex
|
|---|
| 2486 | }
|
|---|
| 2487 | }
|
|---|
| 2488 |
|
|---|
| 2489 | \def\realdash{-}
|
|---|
| 2490 | \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
|
|---|
| 2491 | \def\codeunder{%
|
|---|
| 2492 | % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
|
|---|
| 2493 | % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
|
|---|
| 2494 | % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
|
|---|
| 2495 | % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
|
|---|
| 2496 | \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
|
|---|
| 2497 | \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
|
|---|
| 2498 | \else\normalunderscore \fi
|
|---|
| 2499 | \discretionary{}{}{}}%
|
|---|
| 2500 | {\_}%
|
|---|
| 2501 | }
|
|---|
| 2502 | \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
|
|---|
| 2503 |
|
|---|
| 2504 | % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
|
|---|
| 2505 | % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in
|
|---|
| 2506 | % some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
|
|---|
| 2507 | % general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
|
|---|
| 2508 | %
|
|---|
| 2509 | \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
|
|---|
| 2510 |
|
|---|
| 2511 | \def\keywordtrue{true}
|
|---|
| 2512 | \def\keywordfalse{false}
|
|---|
| 2513 |
|
|---|
| 2514 | \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
|
|---|
| 2515 | \def\txiarg{#1}%
|
|---|
| 2516 | \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
|
|---|
| 2517 | \allowcodebreakstrue
|
|---|
| 2518 | \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
|
|---|
| 2519 | \allowcodebreaksfalse
|
|---|
| 2520 | \else
|
|---|
| 2521 | \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|---|
| 2522 | \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
|
|---|
| 2523 | \fi\fi
|
|---|
| 2524 | }
|
|---|
| 2525 |
|
|---|
| 2526 | % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
|
|---|
| 2527 | % then @kbd has no effect.
|
|---|
| 2528 | \def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}}
|
|---|
| 2529 |
|
|---|
| 2530 | % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
|
|---|
| 2531 | % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
|
|---|
| 2532 | % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
|
|---|
| 2533 | \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
|
|---|
| 2534 | \def\txiarg{#1}%
|
|---|
| 2535 | \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
|
|---|
| 2536 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
|
|---|
| 2537 | \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
|
|---|
| 2538 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
|---|
| 2539 | \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
|
|---|
| 2540 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
|---|
| 2541 | \else
|
|---|
| 2542 | \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|---|
| 2543 | \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
|
|---|
| 2544 | \fi\fi\fi
|
|---|
| 2545 | }
|
|---|
| 2546 | \def\worddistinct{distinct}
|
|---|
| 2547 | \def\wordexample{example}
|
|---|
| 2548 | \def\wordcode{code}
|
|---|
| 2549 |
|
|---|
| 2550 | % Default is `distinct'.
|
|---|
| 2551 | \kbdinputstyle distinct
|
|---|
| 2552 |
|
|---|
| 2553 | \def\xkey{\key}
|
|---|
| 2554 | \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
|
|---|
| 2555 | \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
|
|---|
| 2556 | \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
|
|---|
| 2557 | \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi}
|
|---|
| 2558 |
|
|---|
| 2559 | % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
|
|---|
| 2560 | \let\indicateurl=\code
|
|---|
| 2561 | \let\env=\code
|
|---|
| 2562 | \let\command=\code
|
|---|
| 2563 |
|
|---|
| 2564 | % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
|
|---|
| 2565 | \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
|
|---|
| 2566 |
|
|---|
| 2567 | % @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
|
|---|
| 2568 | \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
|
|---|
| 2569 | \def\click{\arrow}
|
|---|
| 2570 |
|
|---|
| 2571 | % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
|
|---|
| 2572 | % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
|
|---|
| 2573 | % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
|
|---|
| 2574 | % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
|
|---|
| 2575 | % a hypertex \special here.
|
|---|
| 2576 | %
|
|---|
| 2577 | \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
|
|---|
| 2578 | \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
|
|---|
| 2579 | \unsepspaces
|
|---|
| 2580 | \pdfurl{#1}%
|
|---|
| 2581 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
|---|
| 2582 | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
|---|
| 2583 | \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
|
|---|
| 2584 | \else
|
|---|
| 2585 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|---|
| 2586 | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
|---|
| 2587 | \ifpdf
|
|---|
| 2588 | \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
|
|---|
| 2589 | \else
|
|---|
| 2590 | \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
|
|---|
| 2591 | \fi
|
|---|
| 2592 | \else
|
|---|
| 2593 | \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
|
|---|
| 2594 | \fi
|
|---|
| 2595 | \fi
|
|---|
| 2596 | \endlink
|
|---|
| 2597 | \endgroup}
|
|---|
| 2598 |
|
|---|
| 2599 | % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
|
|---|
| 2600 | %
|
|---|
| 2601 | \let\url=\uref
|
|---|
| 2602 |
|
|---|
| 2603 | % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
|
|---|
| 2604 | % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
|
|---|
| 2605 | %
|
|---|
| 2606 | %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
|
|---|
| 2607 | \ifpdf
|
|---|
| 2608 | \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
|
|---|
| 2609 | \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
|
|---|
| 2610 | \unsepspaces
|
|---|
| 2611 | \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
|
|---|
| 2612 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|---|
| 2613 | \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
|
|---|
| 2614 | \endlink
|
|---|
| 2615 | \endgroup}
|
|---|
| 2616 | \else
|
|---|
| 2617 | \let\email=\uref
|
|---|
| 2618 | \fi
|
|---|
| 2619 |
|
|---|
| 2620 | % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
|
|---|
| 2621 | % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
|
|---|
| 2622 | %
|
|---|
| 2623 | \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
|
|---|
| 2624 |
|
|---|
| 2625 | % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
|
|---|
| 2626 | % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
|
|---|
| 2627 | % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
|
|---|
| 2628 | %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
|
|---|
| 2629 |
|
|---|
| 2630 | % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
|
|---|
| 2631 | % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
|
|---|
| 2632 | % all-uppercase.
|
|---|
| 2633 | %
|
|---|
| 2634 | \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
|
|---|
| 2635 | \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
|---|
| 2636 | {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
|
|---|
| 2637 | \def\temp{#2}%
|
|---|
| 2638 | \ifx\temp\empty \else
|
|---|
| 2639 | \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
|---|
| 2640 | \fi
|
|---|
| 2641 | }
|
|---|
| 2642 |
|
|---|
| 2643 | % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
|
|---|
| 2644 | % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
|
|---|
| 2645 | %
|
|---|
| 2646 | \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
|
|---|
| 2647 | \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
|---|
| 2648 | {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
|---|
| 2649 | \def\temp{#2}%
|
|---|
| 2650 | \ifx\temp\empty \else
|
|---|
| 2651 | \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
|---|
| 2652 | \fi
|
|---|
| 2653 | }
|
|---|
| 2654 |
|
|---|
| 2655 | % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
|
|---|
| 2656 | %
|
|---|
| 2657 | \def\asis#1{#1}
|
|---|
| 2658 |
|
|---|
| 2659 | % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
|
|---|
| 2660 | %
|
|---|
| 2661 | % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
|
|---|
| 2662 | % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
|
|---|
| 2663 | % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
|
|---|
| 2664 | % which is what @var uses.
|
|---|
| 2665 | {
|
|---|
| 2666 | \catcode`\_ = \active
|
|---|
| 2667 | \gdef\mathunderscore{%
|
|---|
| 2668 | \catcode`\_=\active
|
|---|
| 2669 | \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
|
|---|
| 2670 | }
|
|---|
| 2671 | }
|
|---|
| 2672 | % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
|
|---|
| 2673 | % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
|
|---|
| 2674 | % this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
|
|---|
| 2675 | % otherwise define @\.
|
|---|
| 2676 | %
|
|---|
| 2677 | % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
|
|---|
| 2678 | \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
|
|---|
| 2679 | %
|
|---|
| 2680 | \def\math{%
|
|---|
| 2681 | \tex
|
|---|
| 2682 | \mathunderscore
|
|---|
| 2683 | \let\\ = \mathbackslash
|
|---|
| 2684 | \mathactive
|
|---|
| 2685 | % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
|
|---|
| 2686 | \let\"=\ddot
|
|---|
| 2687 | \let\'=\acute
|
|---|
| 2688 | \let\==\bar
|
|---|
| 2689 | \let\^=\hat
|
|---|
| 2690 | \let\`=\grave
|
|---|
| 2691 | \let\u=\breve
|
|---|
| 2692 | \let\v=\check
|
|---|
| 2693 | \let\~=\tilde
|
|---|
| 2694 | \let\dotaccent=\dot
|
|---|
| 2695 | $\finishmath
|
|---|
| 2696 | }
|
|---|
| 2697 | \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
|
|---|
| 2698 |
|
|---|
| 2699 | % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
|
|---|
| 2700 | % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
|
|---|
| 2701 | % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
|
|---|
| 2702 | %
|
|---|
| 2703 | {
|
|---|
| 2704 | \catcode`^ = \active
|
|---|
| 2705 | \catcode`< = \active
|
|---|
| 2706 | \catcode`> = \active
|
|---|
| 2707 | \catcode`+ = \active
|
|---|
| 2708 | \catcode`' = \active
|
|---|
| 2709 | \gdef\mathactive{%
|
|---|
| 2710 | \let^ = \ptexhat
|
|---|
| 2711 | \let< = \ptexless
|
|---|
| 2712 | \let> = \ptexgtr
|
|---|
| 2713 | \let+ = \ptexplus
|
|---|
| 2714 | \let' = \ptexquoteright
|
|---|
| 2715 | }
|
|---|
| 2716 | }
|
|---|
| 2717 |
|
|---|
| 2718 |
|
|---|
| 2719 | \message{glyphs,}
|
|---|
| 2720 | % and logos.
|
|---|
| 2721 |
|
|---|
| 2722 | % @@ prints an @.
|
|---|
| 2723 | \def\@{\char64 }
|
|---|
| 2724 |
|
|---|
| 2725 | % Used to generate quoted braces. Unless we're in typewriter, use
|
|---|
| 2726 | % \ecfont because the CM text fonts do not have braces, and we don't
|
|---|
| 2727 | % want to switch into math.
|
|---|
| 2728 | \def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}}
|
|---|
| 2729 | \def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}}
|
|---|
| 2730 | \let\{=\mylbrace
|
|---|
| 2731 | \let\}=\myrbrace
|
|---|
| 2732 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 2733 | % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
|
|---|
| 2734 | % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
|
|---|
| 2735 | \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
|
|---|
| 2736 | \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
|
|---|
| 2737 | \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
|
|---|
| 2738 | !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
|
|---|
| 2739 | !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
|
|---|
| 2740 | !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
|
|---|
| 2741 | !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
|
|---|
| 2742 | !endgroup
|
|---|
| 2743 |
|
|---|
| 2744 | % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
|
|---|
| 2745 | \let\comma = ,
|
|---|
| 2746 |
|
|---|
| 2747 | % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
|
|---|
| 2748 | % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
|
|---|
| 2749 | \let\, = \ptexc
|
|---|
| 2750 | \let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
|
|---|
| 2751 | \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
|
|---|
| 2752 | \let\tieaccent = \ptext
|
|---|
| 2753 | \let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
|
|---|
| 2754 | \let\udotaccent = \d
|
|---|
| 2755 |
|
|---|
| 2756 | % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
|
|---|
| 2757 | % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
|
|---|
| 2758 | \def\questiondown{?`}
|
|---|
| 2759 | \def\exclamdown{!`}
|
|---|
| 2760 | \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
|
|---|
| 2761 | \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
|
|---|
| 2762 |
|
|---|
| 2763 | % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
|
|---|
| 2764 | \def\imacro{i}
|
|---|
| 2765 | \def\jmacro{j}
|
|---|
| 2766 | \def\dotless#1{%
|
|---|
| 2767 | \def\temp{#1}%
|
|---|
| 2768 | \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
|
|---|
| 2769 | \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
|
|---|
| 2770 | \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
|
|---|
| 2771 | \fi\fi
|
|---|
| 2772 | }
|
|---|
| 2773 |
|
|---|
| 2774 | % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
|
|---|
| 2775 | % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
|
|---|
| 2776 | %
|
|---|
| 2777 | \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
|
|---|
| 2778 |
|
|---|
| 2779 | % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
|
|---|
| 2780 | % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
|
|---|
| 2781 | % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
|
|---|
| 2782 | % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
|
|---|
| 2783 | % \scriptscriptstyle).
|
|---|
| 2784 | %
|
|---|
| 2785 | \def\LaTeX{%
|
|---|
| 2786 | L\kern-.36em
|
|---|
| 2787 | {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
|
|---|
| 2788 | \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
|
|---|
| 2789 | \kern-.15em
|
|---|
| 2790 | \TeX
|
|---|
| 2791 | }
|
|---|
| 2792 |
|
|---|
| 2793 | % Some math mode symbols.
|
|---|
| 2794 | \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
|
|---|
| 2795 | \def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
|
|---|
| 2796 | \def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
|
|---|
| 2797 | \def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
|
|---|
| 2798 |
|
|---|
| 2799 | % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
|
|---|
| 2800 | % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
|
|---|
| 2801 | % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
|
|---|
| 2802 | % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
|
|---|
| 2803 | % whichever is larger.
|
|---|
| 2804 | %
|
|---|
| 2805 | \def\dots{%
|
|---|
| 2806 | \leavevmode
|
|---|
| 2807 | \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
|
|---|
| 2808 | \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
|
|---|
| 2809 | \dimen0 = \wd0
|
|---|
| 2810 | \else
|
|---|
| 2811 | \dimen0 = 1.5em
|
|---|
| 2812 | \fi
|
|---|
| 2813 | \hbox to \dimen0{%
|
|---|
| 2814 | \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
|
|---|
| 2815 | .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
|
|---|
| 2816 | .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
|
|---|
| 2817 | .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
|
|---|
| 2818 | }%
|
|---|
| 2819 | }
|
|---|
| 2820 |
|
|---|
| 2821 | % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
|
|---|
| 2822 | %
|
|---|
| 2823 | \def\enddots{%
|
|---|
| 2824 | \dots
|
|---|
| 2825 | \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
|
|---|
| 2826 | }
|
|---|
| 2827 |
|
|---|
| 2828 | % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
|
|---|
| 2829 | %
|
|---|
| 2830 | % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
|
|---|
| 2831 | % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
|
|---|
| 2832 | %
|
|---|
| 2833 | \def\point{$\star$}
|
|---|
| 2834 | \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
|---|
| 2835 | \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
|---|
| 2836 | \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
|
|---|
| 2837 | \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
|
|---|
| 2838 | \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
|
|---|
| 2839 |
|
|---|
| 2840 | % The @error{} command.
|
|---|
| 2841 | % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
|
|---|
| 2842 | %
|
|---|
| 2843 | \newbox\errorbox
|
|---|
| 2844 | %
|
|---|
| 2845 | {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
|
|---|
| 2846 | \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
|
|---|
| 2847 | % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
|
|---|
| 2848 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt}
|
|---|
| 2849 | %
|
|---|
| 2850 | \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
|
|---|
| 2851 | \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
|
|---|
| 2852 | \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
|
|---|
| 2853 | \vbox{%
|
|---|
| 2854 | \hrule height\dimen2
|
|---|
| 2855 | \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
|
|---|
| 2856 | \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
|
|---|
| 2857 | \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
|
|---|
| 2858 | \hrule height\dimen2}
|
|---|
| 2859 | \hfil}
|
|---|
| 2860 | %
|
|---|
| 2861 | \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
|
|---|
| 2862 |
|
|---|
| 2863 | % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
|
|---|
| 2864 | %
|
|---|
| 2865 | \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
|
|---|
| 2866 |
|
|---|
| 2867 | % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
|
|---|
| 2868 | % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
|
|---|
| 2869 | % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
|
|---|
| 2870 | % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
|
|---|
| 2871 | % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
|
|---|
| 2872 | %
|
|---|
| 2873 | % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
|
|---|
| 2874 | % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
|
|---|
| 2875 | % font height.
|
|---|
| 2876 | %
|
|---|
| 2877 | % feymr - regular
|
|---|
| 2878 | % feymo - slanted
|
|---|
| 2879 | % feybr - bold
|
|---|
| 2880 | % feybo - bold slanted
|
|---|
| 2881 | %
|
|---|
| 2882 | % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
|
|---|
| 2883 | % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
|
|---|
| 2884 | % Hmm.
|
|---|
| 2885 | %
|
|---|
| 2886 | % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
|
|---|
| 2887 | % Hope not.
|
|---|
| 2888 | %
|
|---|
| 2889 | %
|
|---|
| 2890 | \def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
|
|---|
| 2891 | \def\eurofont{%
|
|---|
| 2892 | % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
|
|---|
| 2893 | % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
|
|---|
| 2894 | % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
|
|---|
| 2895 | % font installed.
|
|---|
| 2896 | %
|
|---|
| 2897 | % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
|
|---|
| 2898 | % that to the current nominal size.
|
|---|
| 2899 | %
|
|---|
| 2900 | % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
|
|---|
| 2901 | % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
|
|---|
| 2902 | %
|
|---|
| 2903 | \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 2904 | %
|
|---|
| 2905 | \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
|---|
| 2906 | % bold:
|
|---|
| 2907 | \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
|
|---|
| 2908 | \else
|
|---|
| 2909 | % regular:
|
|---|
| 2910 | \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
|
|---|
| 2911 | \fi
|
|---|
| 2912 | \thiseurofont
|
|---|
| 2913 | }
|
|---|
| 2914 |
|
|---|
| 2915 | % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
|
|---|
| 2916 | % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
|
|---|
| 2917 | % the redefinition.
|
|---|
| 2918 | %
|
|---|
| 2919 | % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
|
|---|
| 2920 | \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
|
|---|
| 2921 | \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
|
|---|
| 2922 | \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
|
|---|
| 2923 | \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
|
|---|
| 2924 | %
|
|---|
| 2925 | \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
|
|---|
| 2926 | \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
|
|---|
| 2927 | \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
|
|---|
| 2928 | \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
|
|---|
| 2929 | \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
|
|---|
| 2930 | \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
|
|---|
| 2931 | \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
|
|---|
| 2932 | \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
|
|---|
| 2933 | %
|
|---|
| 2934 | % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
|
|---|
| 2935 | % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
|
|---|
| 2936 | % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
|
|---|
| 2937 | % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
|
|---|
| 2938 | %
|
|---|
| 2939 | % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
|
|---|
| 2940 | % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
|
|---|
| 2941 | % the same EC font.
|
|---|
| 2942 | \def\ogonek#1{{%
|
|---|
| 2943 | \def\temp{#1}%
|
|---|
| 2944 | \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
|
|---|
| 2945 | \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
|
|---|
| 2946 | \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
|
|---|
| 2947 | \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
|
|---|
| 2948 | \else
|
|---|
| 2949 | \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
|
|---|
| 2950 | \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
|
|---|
| 2951 | \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
|
|---|
| 2952 | \fi
|
|---|
| 2953 | \fi\fi\fi\fi
|
|---|
| 2954 | }%
|
|---|
| 2955 | }
|
|---|
| 2956 | \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
|
|---|
| 2957 | \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
|
|---|
| 2958 | \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
|
|---|
| 2959 | \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
|
|---|
| 2960 | %
|
|---|
| 2961 | % Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
|
|---|
| 2962 | \def\ecfont{%
|
|---|
| 2963 | % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
|
|---|
| 2964 | % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
|
|---|
| 2965 | % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
|
|---|
| 2966 | % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
|
|---|
| 2967 | \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 2968 | \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 2969 | \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
|---|
| 2970 | % bold:
|
|---|
| 2971 | \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
|---|
| 2972 | \else
|
|---|
| 2973 | % regular:
|
|---|
| 2974 | \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
|---|
| 2975 | \fi
|
|---|
| 2976 | \thisecfont
|
|---|
| 2977 | }
|
|---|
| 2978 |
|
|---|
| 2979 | % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
|
|---|
| 2980 | % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
|
|---|
| 2981 | % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
|
|---|
| 2982 | %
|
|---|
| 2983 | \def\registeredsymbol{%
|
|---|
| 2984 | $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
|
|---|
| 2985 | \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
|
|---|
| 2986 | }$%
|
|---|
| 2987 | }
|
|---|
| 2988 |
|
|---|
| 2989 | % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
|
|---|
| 2990 | %
|
|---|
| 2991 | \def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
|
|---|
| 2992 |
|
|---|
| 2993 | % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
|
|---|
| 2994 | % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
|
|---|
| 2995 | % so we'll define it if necessary.
|
|---|
| 2996 | %
|
|---|
| 2997 | \ifx\Orb\undefined
|
|---|
| 2998 | \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
|
|---|
| 2999 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3000 |
|
|---|
| 3001 | % Quotes.
|
|---|
| 3002 | \chardef\quotedblleft="5C
|
|---|
| 3003 | \chardef\quotedblright=`\"
|
|---|
| 3004 | \chardef\quoteleft=`\`
|
|---|
| 3005 | \chardef\quoteright=`\'
|
|---|
| 3006 |
|
|---|
| 3007 |
|
|---|
| 3008 | \message{page headings,}
|
|---|
| 3009 |
|
|---|
| 3010 | \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
|
|---|
| 3011 | \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
|
|---|
| 3012 |
|
|---|
| 3013 | % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
|
|---|
| 3014 | \newif\ifseenauthor
|
|---|
| 3015 | \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
|
|---|
| 3016 |
|
|---|
| 3017 | % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
|
|---|
| 3018 | % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
|
|---|
| 3019 | %
|
|---|
| 3020 | \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
|---|
| 3021 | \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
|---|
| 3022 | \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
|---|
| 3023 | \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
|---|
| 3024 |
|
|---|
| 3025 | \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
|
|---|
| 3026 | \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
|
|---|
| 3027 |
|
|---|
| 3028 | \envdef\titlepage{%
|
|---|
| 3029 | % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
|
|---|
| 3030 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 3031 | \parindent=0pt \textfonts
|
|---|
| 3032 | % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
|
|---|
| 3033 | \vglue\titlepagetopglue
|
|---|
| 3034 | % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
|
|---|
| 3035 | \finishedtitlepagetrue
|
|---|
| 3036 | %
|
|---|
| 3037 | % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
|
|---|
| 3038 | % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
|
|---|
| 3039 | \let\oldpage = \page
|
|---|
| 3040 | \def\page{%
|
|---|
| 3041 | \iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
|---|
| 3042 | \finishtitlepage
|
|---|
| 3043 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3044 | \let\page = \oldpage
|
|---|
| 3045 | \page
|
|---|
| 3046 | \null
|
|---|
| 3047 | }%
|
|---|
| 3048 | }
|
|---|
| 3049 |
|
|---|
| 3050 | \def\Etitlepage{%
|
|---|
| 3051 | \iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
|---|
| 3052 | \finishtitlepage
|
|---|
| 3053 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3054 | % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
|
|---|
| 3055 | % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
|
|---|
| 3056 | % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
|
|---|
| 3057 | % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
|
|---|
| 3058 | \oldpage
|
|---|
| 3059 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 3060 | %
|
|---|
| 3061 | % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
|
|---|
| 3062 | % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
|
|---|
| 3063 | \HEADINGSon
|
|---|
| 3064 | %
|
|---|
| 3065 | % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
|
|---|
| 3066 | \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
|---|
| 3067 | \shortcontents
|
|---|
| 3068 | \contents
|
|---|
| 3069 | \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
|---|
| 3070 | \global\let\contents = \relax
|
|---|
| 3071 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3072 | %
|
|---|
| 3073 | \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
|---|
| 3074 | \contents
|
|---|
| 3075 | \global\let\contents = \relax
|
|---|
| 3076 | \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
|---|
| 3077 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3078 | }
|
|---|
| 3079 |
|
|---|
| 3080 | \def\finishtitlepage{%
|
|---|
| 3081 | \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
|
|---|
| 3082 | \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
|
|---|
| 3083 | \finishedtitlepagetrue
|
|---|
| 3084 | }
|
|---|
| 3085 |
|
|---|
| 3086 | %%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
|
|---|
| 3087 |
|
|---|
| 3088 | \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
|
|---|
| 3089 | \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
|
|---|
| 3090 |
|
|---|
| 3091 | \parseargdef\title{%
|
|---|
| 3092 | \checkenv\titlepage
|
|---|
| 3093 | \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}
|
|---|
| 3094 | % print a rule at the page bottom also.
|
|---|
| 3095 | \finishedtitlepagefalse
|
|---|
| 3096 | \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
|
|---|
| 3097 | }
|
|---|
| 3098 |
|
|---|
| 3099 | \parseargdef\subtitle{%
|
|---|
| 3100 | \checkenv\titlepage
|
|---|
| 3101 | {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
|
|---|
| 3102 | }
|
|---|
| 3103 |
|
|---|
| 3104 | % @author should come last, but may come many times.
|
|---|
| 3105 | % It can also be used inside @quotation.
|
|---|
| 3106 | %
|
|---|
| 3107 | \parseargdef\author{%
|
|---|
| 3108 | \def\temp{\quotation}%
|
|---|
| 3109 | \ifx\thisenv\temp
|
|---|
| 3110 | \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
|
|---|
| 3111 | \else
|
|---|
| 3112 | \checkenv\titlepage
|
|---|
| 3113 | \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
|
|---|
| 3114 | {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
|
|---|
| 3115 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3116 | }
|
|---|
| 3117 |
|
|---|
| 3118 |
|
|---|
| 3119 | %%% Set up page headings and footings.
|
|---|
| 3120 |
|
|---|
| 3121 | \let\thispage=\folio
|
|---|
| 3122 |
|
|---|
| 3123 | \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
|
|---|
| 3124 | \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
|
|---|
| 3125 | \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
|
|---|
| 3126 | \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
|
|---|
| 3127 |
|
|---|
| 3128 | % Now make TeX use those variables
|
|---|
| 3129 | \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
|
|---|
| 3130 | \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
|
|---|
| 3131 | \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
|
|---|
| 3132 | \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
|
|---|
| 3133 | \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
|
|---|
| 3134 |
|
|---|
| 3135 | % Commands to set those variables.
|
|---|
| 3136 | % For example, this is what @headings on does
|
|---|
| 3137 | % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
|
|---|
| 3138 | % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
|
|---|
| 3139 | % @evenfooting @thisfile||
|
|---|
| 3140 | % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
|
|---|
| 3141 |
|
|---|
| 3142 |
|
|---|
| 3143 | \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
|
|---|
| 3144 | \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
|---|
| 3145 | \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
|---|
| 3146 | \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|---|
| 3147 |
|
|---|
| 3148 | \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
|
|---|
| 3149 | \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
|---|
| 3150 | \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
|---|
| 3151 | \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|---|
| 3152 |
|
|---|
| 3153 | \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
|
|---|
| 3154 |
|
|---|
| 3155 | \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
|
|---|
| 3156 | \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
|---|
| 3157 | \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
|---|
| 3158 | \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|---|
| 3159 |
|
|---|
| 3160 | \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
|
|---|
| 3161 | \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
|---|
| 3162 | \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
|---|
| 3163 | \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
|---|
| 3164 | %
|
|---|
| 3165 | % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
|
|---|
| 3166 | % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
|
|---|
| 3167 | \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
|
|---|
| 3168 | \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
|
|---|
| 3169 | }
|
|---|
| 3170 |
|
|---|
| 3171 | \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
|
|---|
| 3172 |
|
|---|
| 3173 | % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
|
|---|
| 3174 | % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
|
|---|
| 3175 | %
|
|---|
| 3176 | % The same set of arguments for:
|
|---|
| 3177 | %
|
|---|
| 3178 | % @oddheadingmarks
|
|---|
| 3179 | % @evenfootingmarks
|
|---|
| 3180 | % @oddfootingmarks
|
|---|
| 3181 | % @everyheadingmarks
|
|---|
| 3182 | % @everyfootingmarks
|
|---|
| 3183 |
|
|---|
| 3184 | \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
|
|---|
| 3185 | \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
|
|---|
| 3186 | \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
|
|---|
| 3187 | \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
|
|---|
| 3188 | \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
|
|---|
| 3189 | \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
|
|---|
| 3190 | \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
|
|---|
| 3191 | \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
|
|---|
| 3192 | % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
|
|---|
| 3193 | \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
|
|---|
| 3194 | \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
|
|---|
| 3195 | \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
|
|---|
| 3196 | }
|
|---|
| 3197 |
|
|---|
| 3198 | \everyheadingmarks bottom
|
|---|
| 3199 | \everyfootingmarks bottom
|
|---|
| 3200 |
|
|---|
| 3201 | % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
|
|---|
| 3202 | % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
|
|---|
| 3203 | % @headings off turns them off.
|
|---|
| 3204 | % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
|
|---|
| 3205 | % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
|---|
| 3206 | % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
|---|
| 3207 | % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
|
|---|
| 3208 | % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
|
|---|
| 3209 | % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
|
|---|
| 3210 |
|
|---|
| 3211 | \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
|
|---|
| 3212 |
|
|---|
| 3213 | \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
|
|---|
| 3214 | \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
|
|---|
| 3215 | \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
|
|---|
| 3216 | }
|
|---|
| 3217 |
|
|---|
| 3218 | \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
|
|---|
| 3219 | \HEADINGSoff % it's the default
|
|---|
| 3220 |
|
|---|
| 3221 | % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
|
|---|
| 3222 | % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
|
|---|
| 3223 | % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
|
|---|
| 3224 | % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
|
|---|
| 3225 | % edge of all pages.
|
|---|
| 3226 | \def\HEADINGSdouble{%
|
|---|
| 3227 | \global\pageno=1
|
|---|
| 3228 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|---|
| 3229 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|---|
| 3230 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
|---|
| 3231 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|---|
| 3232 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|---|
| 3233 | }
|
|---|
| 3234 | \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|---|
| 3235 |
|
|---|
| 3236 | % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
|
|---|
| 3237 | % page number on top right.
|
|---|
| 3238 | \def\HEADINGSsingle{%
|
|---|
| 3239 | \global\pageno=1
|
|---|
| 3240 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|---|
| 3241 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|---|
| 3242 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|---|
| 3243 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|---|
| 3244 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|---|
| 3245 | }
|
|---|
| 3246 | \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
|
|---|
| 3247 |
|
|---|
| 3248 | \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
|
|---|
| 3249 | \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
|
|---|
| 3250 | \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
|
|---|
| 3251 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|---|
| 3252 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|---|
| 3253 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
|---|
| 3254 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|---|
| 3255 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|---|
| 3256 | }
|
|---|
| 3257 |
|
|---|
| 3258 | \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
|
|---|
| 3259 | \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
|
|---|
| 3260 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|---|
| 3261 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|---|
| 3262 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|---|
| 3263 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|---|
| 3264 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|---|
| 3265 | }
|
|---|
| 3266 |
|
|---|
| 3267 | % Subroutines used in generating headings
|
|---|
| 3268 | % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
|
|---|
| 3269 | % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
|
|---|
| 3270 | % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
|
|---|
| 3271 | \ifx\today\undefined
|
|---|
| 3272 | \def\today{%
|
|---|
| 3273 | \number\day\space
|
|---|
| 3274 | \ifcase\month
|
|---|
| 3275 | \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
|
|---|
| 3276 | \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
|
|---|
| 3277 | \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
|
|---|
| 3278 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3279 | \space\number\year}
|
|---|
| 3280 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3281 |
|
|---|
| 3282 | % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
|
|---|
| 3283 | % It generates no output of its own.
|
|---|
| 3284 | \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
|
|---|
| 3285 | \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
|
|---|
| 3286 |
|
|---|
| 3287 |
|
|---|
| 3288 | \message{tables,}
|
|---|
| 3289 | % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
|
|---|
| 3290 |
|
|---|
| 3291 | % default indentation of table text
|
|---|
| 3292 | \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
|
|---|
| 3293 | % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
|
|---|
| 3294 | \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
|
|---|
| 3295 | % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
|
|---|
| 3296 | \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
|
|---|
| 3297 |
|
|---|
| 3298 | % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
|
|---|
| 3299 | \newdimen\itemmax
|
|---|
| 3300 |
|
|---|
| 3301 | % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
|
|---|
| 3302 | % these defs.
|
|---|
| 3303 | % They also define \itemindex
|
|---|
| 3304 | % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
|
|---|
| 3305 |
|
|---|
| 3306 | \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
|
|---|
| 3307 |
|
|---|
| 3308 | \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
|
|---|
| 3309 |
|
|---|
| 3310 | \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
|---|
| 3311 | \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
|---|
| 3312 |
|
|---|
| 3313 | \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
|
|---|
| 3314 | \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
|---|
| 3315 | \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
|
|---|
| 3316 | \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
|
|---|
| 3317 | \itemindex{#1}%
|
|---|
| 3318 | \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
|
|---|
| 3319 | %
|
|---|
| 3320 | % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
|
|---|
| 3321 | % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
|
|---|
| 3322 | % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
|
|---|
| 3323 | % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
|
|---|
| 3324 | % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
|
|---|
| 3325 | \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
|
|---|
| 3326 | %
|
|---|
| 3327 | % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
|
|---|
| 3328 | % but leave it ragged-right.
|
|---|
| 3329 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 3330 | \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
|
|---|
| 3331 | \advance\hsize by\tableindent
|
|---|
| 3332 | \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
|
|---|
| 3333 | \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
|
|---|
| 3334 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 3335 | %
|
|---|
| 3336 | % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
|
|---|
| 3337 | % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
|
|---|
| 3338 | \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
|
|---|
| 3339 | %
|
|---|
| 3340 | % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
|
|---|
| 3341 | % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
|
|---|
| 3342 | % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
|
|---|
| 3343 | % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
|
|---|
| 3344 | % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
|
|---|
| 3345 | % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
|
|---|
| 3346 | %
|
|---|
| 3347 | \penalty 10001
|
|---|
| 3348 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 3349 | \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
|
|---|
| 3350 | \else
|
|---|
| 3351 | % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
|
|---|
| 3352 | % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
|
|---|
| 3353 | \noindent
|
|---|
| 3354 | % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
|
|---|
| 3355 | % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
|
|---|
| 3356 | % eventually be printed.
|
|---|
| 3357 | \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
|
|---|
| 3358 | \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
|
|---|
| 3359 | \unhbox0
|
|---|
| 3360 | \nobreak\kern\dimen0
|
|---|
| 3361 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 3362 | \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
|
|---|
| 3363 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3364 | }
|
|---|
| 3365 |
|
|---|
| 3366 | \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
|
|---|
| 3367 | \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
|
|---|
| 3368 |
|
|---|
| 3369 | % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
|
|---|
| 3370 | \envdef\table{%
|
|---|
| 3371 | \let\itemindex\gobble
|
|---|
| 3372 | \tablecheck{table}%
|
|---|
| 3373 | }
|
|---|
| 3374 | \envdef\ftable{%
|
|---|
| 3375 | \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
|
|---|
| 3376 | \tablecheck{ftable}%
|
|---|
| 3377 | }
|
|---|
| 3378 | \envdef\vtable{%
|
|---|
| 3379 | \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
|
|---|
| 3380 | \tablecheck{vtable}%
|
|---|
| 3381 | }
|
|---|
| 3382 | \def\tablecheck#1{%
|
|---|
| 3383 | \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
|
|---|
| 3384 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 3385 | \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
|
|---|
| 3386 | that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
|---|
| 3387 | \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
|
|---|
| 3388 | \else
|
|---|
| 3389 | \let\next\tablex
|
|---|
| 3390 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3391 | \next
|
|---|
| 3392 | }
|
|---|
| 3393 | \def\tablex#1{%
|
|---|
| 3394 | \def\itemindicate{#1}%
|
|---|
| 3395 | \parsearg\tabley
|
|---|
| 3396 | }
|
|---|
| 3397 | \def\tabley#1{%
|
|---|
| 3398 | {%
|
|---|
| 3399 | \makevalueexpandable
|
|---|
| 3400 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
|
|---|
| 3401 | \expandafter
|
|---|
| 3402 | }\temp \endtablez
|
|---|
| 3403 | }
|
|---|
| 3404 | \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
|
|---|
| 3405 | \aboveenvbreak
|
|---|
| 3406 | \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
|
|---|
| 3407 | \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
|
|---|
| 3408 | \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
|
|---|
| 3409 | \itemmax=\tableindent
|
|---|
| 3410 | \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
|---|
| 3411 | \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
|
|---|
| 3412 | \exdentamount=\tableindent
|
|---|
| 3413 | \parindent = 0pt
|
|---|
| 3414 | \parskip = \smallskipamount
|
|---|
| 3415 | \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
|---|
| 3416 | \let\item = \internalBitem
|
|---|
| 3417 | \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
|
|---|
| 3418 | }
|
|---|
| 3419 | \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
|
|---|
| 3420 | \let\Eftable\Etable
|
|---|
| 3421 | \let\Evtable\Etable
|
|---|
| 3422 | \let\Eitemize\Etable
|
|---|
| 3423 | \let\Eenumerate\Etable
|
|---|
| 3424 |
|
|---|
| 3425 | % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
|
|---|
| 3426 |
|
|---|
| 3427 | \newcount \itemno
|
|---|
| 3428 |
|
|---|
| 3429 | \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
|
|---|
| 3430 |
|
|---|
| 3431 | \def\doitemize#1{%
|
|---|
| 3432 | \aboveenvbreak
|
|---|
| 3433 | \itemmax=\itemindent
|
|---|
| 3434 | \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
|---|
| 3435 | \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
|
|---|
| 3436 | \exdentamount=\itemindent
|
|---|
| 3437 | \parindent=0pt
|
|---|
| 3438 | \parskip=\smallskipamount
|
|---|
| 3439 | \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
|---|
| 3440 | %
|
|---|
| 3441 | % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
|
|---|
| 3442 | % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
|
|---|
| 3443 | % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
|
|---|
| 3444 | % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
|
|---|
| 3445 | % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
|
|---|
| 3446 | \def\itemcontents{#1}%
|
|---|
| 3447 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
|
|---|
| 3448 | %
|
|---|
| 3449 | % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
|
|---|
| 3450 | \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
|
|---|
| 3451 | %
|
|---|
| 3452 | \let\item=\itemizeitem
|
|---|
| 3453 | }
|
|---|
| 3454 |
|
|---|
| 3455 | % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
|
|---|
| 3456 | %
|
|---|
| 3457 | \def\itemizeitem{%
|
|---|
| 3458 | \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
|
|---|
| 3459 | {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
|
|---|
| 3460 | {%
|
|---|
| 3461 | % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
|
|---|
| 3462 | % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
|
|---|
| 3463 | % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
|
|---|
| 3464 | % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
|
|---|
| 3465 | % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
|
|---|
| 3466 | % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
|
|---|
| 3467 | % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
|
|---|
| 3468 | % that's the theory.
|
|---|
| 3469 | \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
|
|---|
| 3470 | \noindent
|
|---|
| 3471 | \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
|
|---|
| 3472 | %
|
|---|
| 3473 | \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
|
|---|
| 3474 | \flushcr
|
|---|
| 3475 | }
|
|---|
| 3476 |
|
|---|
| 3477 | % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
|
|---|
| 3478 | % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
|
|---|
| 3479 | %
|
|---|
| 3480 | \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
|
|---|
| 3481 |
|
|---|
| 3482 | % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
|
|---|
| 3483 | % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
|
|---|
| 3484 | % argument is the same as `1'.
|
|---|
| 3485 | %
|
|---|
| 3486 | \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
|
|---|
| 3487 | \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
|
|---|
| 3488 | % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
|
|---|
| 3489 | \def\thearg{#1}%
|
|---|
| 3490 | \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
|
|---|
| 3491 | %
|
|---|
| 3492 | % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
|
|---|
| 3493 | % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
|
|---|
| 3494 | % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
|
|---|
| 3495 | % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
|
|---|
| 3496 | % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
|
|---|
| 3497 | \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
|
|---|
| 3498 | \ifx\rest\empty
|
|---|
| 3499 | % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
|
|---|
| 3500 | % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
|
|---|
| 3501 | % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
|
|---|
| 3502 | % not equal to itself.
|
|---|
| 3503 | % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
|
|---|
| 3504 | %
|
|---|
| 3505 | % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
|
|---|
| 3506 | % continuing to look for a <number>.
|
|---|
| 3507 | %
|
|---|
| 3508 | \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
|
|---|
| 3509 | \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
|
|---|
| 3510 | \else
|
|---|
| 3511 | % It's a letter.
|
|---|
| 3512 | \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
|
|---|
| 3513 | \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
|
|---|
| 3514 | \else
|
|---|
| 3515 | \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
|
|---|
| 3516 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3517 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3518 | \else
|
|---|
| 3519 | % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
|
|---|
| 3520 | \numericenumerate
|
|---|
| 3521 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3522 | }
|
|---|
| 3523 |
|
|---|
| 3524 | % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
|
|---|
| 3525 | % given in \thearg.
|
|---|
| 3526 | %
|
|---|
| 3527 | \def\numericenumerate{%
|
|---|
| 3528 | \itemno = \thearg
|
|---|
| 3529 | \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
|
|---|
| 3530 | }
|
|---|
| 3531 |
|
|---|
| 3532 | % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
|---|
| 3533 | \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
|
|---|
| 3534 | \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
|---|
| 3535 | \startenumeration{%
|
|---|
| 3536 | % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
|---|
| 3537 | \ifnum\itemno=0
|
|---|
| 3538 | \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
|---|
| 3539 | alphabet}%
|
|---|
| 3540 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3541 | \char\lccode\itemno
|
|---|
| 3542 | }%
|
|---|
| 3543 | }
|
|---|
| 3544 |
|
|---|
| 3545 | % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
|---|
| 3546 | \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
|
|---|
| 3547 | \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
|---|
| 3548 | \startenumeration{%
|
|---|
| 3549 | % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
|---|
| 3550 | \ifnum\itemno=0
|
|---|
| 3551 | \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
|---|
| 3552 | alphabet}
|
|---|
| 3553 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3554 | \char\uccode\itemno
|
|---|
| 3555 | }%
|
|---|
| 3556 | }
|
|---|
| 3557 |
|
|---|
| 3558 | % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
|
|---|
| 3559 | % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
|
|---|
| 3560 | % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
|
|---|
| 3561 | %
|
|---|
| 3562 | \def\startenumeration#1{%
|
|---|
| 3563 | \advance\itemno by -1
|
|---|
| 3564 | \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
|
|---|
| 3565 | }
|
|---|
| 3566 |
|
|---|
| 3567 | % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
|
|---|
| 3568 | % to @enumerate.
|
|---|
| 3569 | %
|
|---|
| 3570 | \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
|
|---|
| 3571 | \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
|
|---|
| 3572 | \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
|---|
| 3573 | \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
|---|
| 3574 |
|
|---|
| 3575 |
|
|---|
| 3576 | % @multitable macros
|
|---|
| 3577 | % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
|
|---|
| 3578 | %
|
|---|
| 3579 | % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
|
|---|
| 3580 | % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
|
|---|
| 3581 | % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
|
|---|
| 3582 | % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
|
|---|
| 3583 |
|
|---|
| 3584 | % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
|
|---|
| 3585 |
|
|---|
| 3586 | % To make preamble:
|
|---|
| 3587 | %
|
|---|
| 3588 | % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
|
|---|
| 3589 | % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
|
|---|
| 3590 | % @item ...
|
|---|
| 3591 | %
|
|---|
| 3592 | % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
|
|---|
| 3593 | % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
|
|---|
| 3594 | % columns as desired.
|
|---|
| 3595 |
|
|---|
| 3596 |
|
|---|
| 3597 | % Or use a template:
|
|---|
| 3598 | % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
|---|
| 3599 | % @item ...
|
|---|
| 3600 | % using the widest term desired in each column.
|
|---|
| 3601 |
|
|---|
| 3602 | % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
|
|---|
| 3603 | % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
|
|---|
| 3604 | % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
|
|---|
| 3605 | % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
|
|---|
| 3606 |
|
|---|
| 3607 | % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
|
|---|
| 3608 | % if they are.
|
|---|
| 3609 |
|
|---|
| 3610 | % Sample multitable:
|
|---|
| 3611 |
|
|---|
| 3612 | % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
|---|
| 3613 | % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
|
|---|
| 3614 | % @item
|
|---|
| 3615 | % first col stuff
|
|---|
| 3616 | % @tab
|
|---|
| 3617 | % second col stuff
|
|---|
| 3618 | % @tab
|
|---|
| 3619 | % third col
|
|---|
| 3620 | % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
|
|---|
| 3621 | % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
|
|---|
| 3622 | %
|
|---|
| 3623 | % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
|
|---|
| 3624 | % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
|
|---|
| 3625 | % @end multitable
|
|---|
| 3626 |
|
|---|
| 3627 | % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
|
|---|
| 3628 | % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
|
|---|
| 3629 | % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
|
|---|
| 3630 | % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
|
|---|
| 3631 | % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
|
|---|
| 3632 | % to baseline.
|
|---|
| 3633 | % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
|
|---|
| 3634 | %
|
|---|
| 3635 | \newskip\multitableparskip
|
|---|
| 3636 | \newskip\multitableparindent
|
|---|
| 3637 | \newdimen\multitablecolspace
|
|---|
| 3638 | \newskip\multitablelinespace
|
|---|
| 3639 | \multitableparskip=0pt
|
|---|
| 3640 | \multitableparindent=6pt
|
|---|
| 3641 | \multitablecolspace=12pt
|
|---|
| 3642 | \multitablelinespace=0pt
|
|---|
| 3643 |
|
|---|
| 3644 | % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
|
|---|
| 3645 | %
|
|---|
| 3646 | \let\endsetuptable\relax
|
|---|
| 3647 | \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
|
|---|
| 3648 | \let\columnfractions\relax
|
|---|
| 3649 | \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
|
|---|
| 3650 | \newif\ifsetpercent
|
|---|
| 3651 |
|
|---|
| 3652 | % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
|
|---|
| 3653 | % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
|
|---|
| 3654 | %
|
|---|
| 3655 | \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
|
|---|
| 3656 | \global\advance\colcount by 1
|
|---|
| 3657 | \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
|
|---|
| 3658 | \setuptable
|
|---|
| 3659 | }
|
|---|
| 3660 |
|
|---|
| 3661 | \newcount\colcount
|
|---|
| 3662 | \def\setuptable#1{%
|
|---|
| 3663 | \def\firstarg{#1}%
|
|---|
| 3664 | \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
|
|---|
| 3665 | \let\go = \relax
|
|---|
| 3666 | \else
|
|---|
| 3667 | \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
|
|---|
| 3668 | \global\setpercenttrue
|
|---|
| 3669 | \else
|
|---|
| 3670 | \ifsetpercent
|
|---|
| 3671 | \let\go\pickupwholefraction
|
|---|
| 3672 | \else
|
|---|
| 3673 | \global\advance\colcount by 1
|
|---|
| 3674 | \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
|
|---|
| 3675 | % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
|
|---|
| 3676 | \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
|
|---|
| 3677 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3678 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3679 | \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
|
|---|
| 3680 | % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
|
|---|
| 3681 | % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
|
|---|
| 3682 | \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
|
|---|
| 3683 | \else
|
|---|
| 3684 | \let\go = \setuptable
|
|---|
| 3685 | \fi%
|
|---|
| 3686 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3687 | \go
|
|---|
| 3688 | }
|
|---|
| 3689 |
|
|---|
| 3690 | % multitable-only commands.
|
|---|
| 3691 | %
|
|---|
| 3692 | % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
|
|---|
| 3693 | % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
|
|---|
| 3694 | % of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
|
|---|
| 3695 | % undo it ourselves.
|
|---|
| 3696 | \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
|
|---|
| 3697 | \def\headitem{%
|
|---|
| 3698 | \checkenv\multitable
|
|---|
| 3699 | \crcr
|
|---|
| 3700 | \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
|
|---|
| 3701 | \the\everytab % for the first item
|
|---|
| 3702 | }%
|
|---|
| 3703 | %
|
|---|
| 3704 | % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
|
|---|
| 3705 | % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
|
|---|
| 3706 | % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
|
|---|
| 3707 | % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
|
|---|
| 3708 | \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
|
|---|
| 3709 |
|
|---|
| 3710 | % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
|
|---|
| 3711 | %
|
|---|
| 3712 | \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
|
|---|
| 3713 | %
|
|---|
| 3714 | \envdef\multitable{%
|
|---|
| 3715 | \vskip\parskip
|
|---|
| 3716 | \startsavinginserts
|
|---|
| 3717 | %
|
|---|
| 3718 | % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
|
|---|
| 3719 | % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
|
|---|
| 3720 | % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
|
|---|
| 3721 | % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
|
|---|
| 3722 | \def\item{\crcr}%
|
|---|
| 3723 | %
|
|---|
| 3724 | \tolerance=9500
|
|---|
| 3725 | \hbadness=9500
|
|---|
| 3726 | \setmultitablespacing
|
|---|
| 3727 | \parskip=\multitableparskip
|
|---|
| 3728 | \parindent=\multitableparindent
|
|---|
| 3729 | \overfullrule=0pt
|
|---|
| 3730 | \global\colcount=0
|
|---|
| 3731 | %
|
|---|
| 3732 | \everycr = {%
|
|---|
| 3733 | \noalign{%
|
|---|
| 3734 | \global\everytab={}%
|
|---|
| 3735 | \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
|
|---|
| 3736 | % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
|
|---|
| 3737 | \checkinserts
|
|---|
| 3738 | % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
|
|---|
| 3739 | %\filbreak
|
|---|
| 3740 | % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
|
|---|
| 3741 | % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
|
|---|
| 3742 | % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
|
|---|
| 3743 | }%
|
|---|
| 3744 | }%
|
|---|
| 3745 | %
|
|---|
| 3746 | \parsearg\domultitable
|
|---|
| 3747 | }
|
|---|
| 3748 | \def\domultitable#1{%
|
|---|
| 3749 | % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
|
|---|
| 3750 | \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
|
|---|
| 3751 | %
|
|---|
| 3752 | % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
|
|---|
| 3753 | % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
|
|---|
| 3754 | % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
|
|---|
| 3755 | % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
|
|---|
| 3756 | \halign\bgroup &%
|
|---|
| 3757 | \global\advance\colcount by 1
|
|---|
| 3758 | \multistrut
|
|---|
| 3759 | \vtop{%
|
|---|
| 3760 | % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
|
|---|
| 3761 | \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
|
|---|
| 3762 | %
|
|---|
| 3763 | % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
|
|---|
| 3764 | % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
|
|---|
| 3765 | % the first one.
|
|---|
| 3766 | %
|
|---|
| 3767 | % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
|
|---|
| 3768 | % to the width of each template entry.
|
|---|
| 3769 | %
|
|---|
| 3770 | % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
|
|---|
| 3771 | % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
|
|---|
| 3772 | % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
|
|---|
| 3773 | % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
|
|---|
| 3774 | %
|
|---|
| 3775 | % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
|
|---|
| 3776 | \rightskip=0pt
|
|---|
| 3777 | \ifnum\colcount=1
|
|---|
| 3778 | % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
|
|---|
| 3779 | \advance\hsize by\leftskip
|
|---|
| 3780 | \else
|
|---|
| 3781 | \ifsetpercent \else
|
|---|
| 3782 | % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
|
|---|
| 3783 | % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
|
|---|
| 3784 | \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
|
|---|
| 3785 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3786 | % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
|
|---|
| 3787 | \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
|
|---|
| 3788 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3789 | % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
|
|---|
| 3790 | % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
|
|---|
| 3791 | % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
|
|---|
| 3792 | % For example:
|
|---|
| 3793 | % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
|
|---|
| 3794 | % @item @code{#}
|
|---|
| 3795 | % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
|
|---|
| 3796 | % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
|
|---|
| 3797 | % marking characters.
|
|---|
| 3798 | \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
|
|---|
| 3799 | }\cr
|
|---|
| 3800 | }
|
|---|
| 3801 | \def\Emultitable{%
|
|---|
| 3802 | \crcr
|
|---|
| 3803 | \egroup % end the \halign
|
|---|
| 3804 | \global\setpercentfalse
|
|---|
| 3805 | }
|
|---|
| 3806 |
|
|---|
| 3807 | \def\setmultitablespacing{%
|
|---|
| 3808 | \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
|
|---|
| 3809 | %
|
|---|
| 3810 | % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
|
|---|
| 3811 | % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
|
|---|
| 3812 | % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
|
|---|
| 3813 | % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
|
|---|
| 3814 | \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
|---|
| 3815 | \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
|
|---|
| 3816 | \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
|
|---|
| 3817 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3818 | %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
|
|---|
| 3819 | %% table. If not, do nothing.
|
|---|
| 3820 | %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
|
|---|
| 3821 | \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
|
|---|
| 3822 | \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
|---|
| 3823 | \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
|---|
| 3824 | %% than skip between lines in the table.
|
|---|
| 3825 | \fi%
|
|---|
| 3826 | \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
|
|---|
| 3827 | \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
|---|
| 3828 | \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
|---|
| 3829 | %% than skip between lines in the table.
|
|---|
| 3830 | \fi}
|
|---|
| 3831 |
|
|---|
| 3832 |
|
|---|
| 3833 | \message{conditionals,}
|
|---|
| 3834 |
|
|---|
| 3835 | % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
|
|---|
| 3836 | % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
|
|---|
| 3837 | % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
|
|---|
| 3838 | % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
|
|---|
| 3839 | % attempt to close an environment group.
|
|---|
| 3840 | %
|
|---|
| 3841 | \def\makecond#1{%
|
|---|
| 3842 | \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
|
|---|
| 3843 | \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
|
|---|
| 3844 | }
|
|---|
| 3845 | \makecond{iftex}
|
|---|
| 3846 | \makecond{ifnotdocbook}
|
|---|
| 3847 | \makecond{ifnothtml}
|
|---|
| 3848 | \makecond{ifnotinfo}
|
|---|
| 3849 | \makecond{ifnotplaintext}
|
|---|
| 3850 | \makecond{ifnotxml}
|
|---|
| 3851 |
|
|---|
| 3852 | % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
|
|---|
| 3853 | %
|
|---|
| 3854 | \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
|
|---|
| 3855 | \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
|
|---|
| 3856 | \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
|
|---|
| 3857 | \def\html{\doignore{html}}
|
|---|
| 3858 | \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
|
|---|
| 3859 | \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
|
|---|
| 3860 | \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
|
|---|
| 3861 | \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
|
|---|
| 3862 | \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
|
|---|
| 3863 | \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
|
|---|
| 3864 | \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
|
|---|
| 3865 | \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
|
|---|
| 3866 | \def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
|
|---|
| 3867 |
|
|---|
| 3868 | % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
|
|---|
| 3869 | %
|
|---|
| 3870 | % A count to remember the depth of nesting.
|
|---|
| 3871 | \newcount\doignorecount
|
|---|
| 3872 |
|
|---|
| 3873 | \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
|
|---|
| 3874 | % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
|
|---|
| 3875 | \obeylines
|
|---|
| 3876 | \catcode`\@ = \other
|
|---|
| 3877 | \catcode`\{ = \other
|
|---|
| 3878 | \catcode`\} = \other
|
|---|
| 3879 | %
|
|---|
| 3880 | % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
|
|---|
| 3881 | \spaceisspace
|
|---|
| 3882 | %
|
|---|
| 3883 | % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
|
|---|
| 3884 | \doignorecount = 0
|
|---|
| 3885 | %
|
|---|
| 3886 | % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
|
|---|
| 3887 | \dodoignore{#1}%
|
|---|
| 3888 | }
|
|---|
| 3889 |
|
|---|
| 3890 | { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
|
|---|
| 3891 | \obeylines %
|
|---|
| 3892 | %
|
|---|
| 3893 | \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
|
|---|
| 3894 | % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
|
|---|
| 3895 | %
|
|---|
| 3896 | % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
|
|---|
| 3897 | \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
|
|---|
| 3898 | \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
|
|---|
| 3899 | %
|
|---|
| 3900 | % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
|
|---|
| 3901 | % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
|
|---|
| 3902 | % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
|
|---|
| 3903 | \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
|
|---|
| 3904 | %
|
|---|
| 3905 | % And now expand that command.
|
|---|
| 3906 | \doignoretext ^^M%
|
|---|
| 3907 | }%
|
|---|
| 3908 | }
|
|---|
| 3909 |
|
|---|
| 3910 | \def\doignoreyyy#1{%
|
|---|
| 3911 | \def\temp{#1}%
|
|---|
| 3912 | \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
|
|---|
| 3913 | \let\next\doignoretextzzz
|
|---|
| 3914 | \else % Found a nested condition, ...
|
|---|
| 3915 | \advance\doignorecount by 1
|
|---|
| 3916 | \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
|
|---|
| 3917 | % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
|
|---|
| 3918 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3919 | \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
|
|---|
| 3920 | }
|
|---|
| 3921 |
|
|---|
| 3922 | % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
|
|---|
| 3923 | %
|
|---|
| 3924 | \def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 3925 | \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
|
|---|
| 3926 | \let\next\enddoignore
|
|---|
| 3927 | \else % Still inside a nested condition.
|
|---|
| 3928 | \advance\doignorecount by -1
|
|---|
| 3929 | \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
|
|---|
| 3930 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3931 | \next
|
|---|
| 3932 | }
|
|---|
| 3933 |
|
|---|
| 3934 | % Finish off ignored text.
|
|---|
| 3935 | { \obeylines%
|
|---|
| 3936 | % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
|
|---|
| 3937 | % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
|
|---|
| 3938 | % would result in a blank line in the output.
|
|---|
| 3939 | \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
|
|---|
| 3940 | }
|
|---|
| 3941 |
|
|---|
| 3942 |
|
|---|
| 3943 | % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
|
|---|
| 3944 | % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
|
|---|
| 3945 | %
|
|---|
| 3946 | % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
|
|---|
| 3947 | % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
|
|---|
| 3948 | % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
|
|---|
| 3949 | % didn't need it.
|
|---|
| 3950 | % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
|
|---|
| 3951 | %
|
|---|
| 3952 | \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
|
|---|
| 3953 | \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
|
|---|
| 3954 | {%
|
|---|
| 3955 | \makevalueexpandable
|
|---|
| 3956 | \def\temp{#2}%
|
|---|
| 3957 | \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
|
|---|
| 3958 | \ifx\temp\empty
|
|---|
| 3959 | \next{}%
|
|---|
| 3960 | \else
|
|---|
| 3961 | \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
|
|---|
| 3962 | \fi
|
|---|
| 3963 | }%
|
|---|
| 3964 | }
|
|---|
| 3965 | % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
|
|---|
| 3966 | \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
|
|---|
| 3967 |
|
|---|
| 3968 | % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
|
|---|
| 3969 | %
|
|---|
| 3970 | \parseargdef\clear{%
|
|---|
| 3971 | {%
|
|---|
| 3972 | \makevalueexpandable
|
|---|
| 3973 | \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
|
|---|
| 3974 | }%
|
|---|
| 3975 | }
|
|---|
| 3976 |
|
|---|
| 3977 | % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
|
|---|
| 3978 | \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
|
|---|
| 3979 | \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
|
|---|
| 3980 | {
|
|---|
| 3981 | \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
|
|---|
| 3982 | %
|
|---|
| 3983 | \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
|
|---|
| 3984 | \let\value = \expandablevalue
|
|---|
| 3985 | % We don't want these characters active, ...
|
|---|
| 3986 | \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
|
|---|
| 3987 | % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
|
|---|
| 3988 | % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
|
|---|
| 3989 | % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
|
|---|
| 3990 | \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
|
|---|
| 3991 | }
|
|---|
| 3992 | }
|
|---|
| 3993 |
|
|---|
| 3994 | % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
|
|---|
| 3995 | % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
|
|---|
| 3996 | % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
|
|---|
| 3997 | % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
|
|---|
| 3998 | % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
|
|---|
| 3999 | % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
|
|---|
| 4000 | % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
|
|---|
| 4001 | %
|
|---|
| 4002 | \def\expandablevalue#1{%
|
|---|
| 4003 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
|---|
| 4004 | {[No value for ``#1'']}%
|
|---|
| 4005 | \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
|
|---|
| 4006 | \else
|
|---|
| 4007 | \csname SET#1\endcsname
|
|---|
| 4008 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4009 | }
|
|---|
| 4010 |
|
|---|
| 4011 | % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
|
|---|
| 4012 | % with @set.
|
|---|
| 4013 | %
|
|---|
| 4014 | % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
|
|---|
| 4015 | %
|
|---|
| 4016 | \makecond{ifset}
|
|---|
| 4017 | \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
|
|---|
| 4018 | \def\doifset#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 4019 | {%
|
|---|
| 4020 | \makevalueexpandable
|
|---|
| 4021 | \let\next=\empty
|
|---|
| 4022 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
|
|---|
| 4023 | #1% If not set, redefine \next.
|
|---|
| 4024 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4025 | \expandafter
|
|---|
| 4026 | }\next
|
|---|
| 4027 | }
|
|---|
| 4028 | \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
|
|---|
| 4029 |
|
|---|
| 4030 | % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
|
|---|
| 4031 | % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
|
|---|
| 4032 | %
|
|---|
| 4033 | % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
|
|---|
| 4034 | % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
|
|---|
| 4035 | % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
|
|---|
| 4036 | %
|
|---|
| 4037 | \makecond{ifclear}
|
|---|
| 4038 | \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
|
|---|
| 4039 | \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
|
|---|
| 4040 |
|
|---|
| 4041 | % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
|
|---|
| 4042 | % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
|
|---|
| 4043 | \let\dircategory=\comment
|
|---|
| 4044 |
|
|---|
| 4045 | % @defininfoenclose.
|
|---|
| 4046 | \let\definfoenclose=\comment
|
|---|
| 4047 |
|
|---|
| 4048 |
|
|---|
| 4049 | \message{indexing,}
|
|---|
| 4050 | % Index generation facilities
|
|---|
| 4051 |
|
|---|
| 4052 | % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
|
|---|
| 4053 | % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
|
|---|
| 4054 | \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
|
|---|
| 4055 |
|
|---|
| 4056 | % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
|
|---|
| 4057 | % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
|
|---|
| 4058 | % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
|
|---|
| 4059 | % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
|
|---|
| 4060 | % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
|
|---|
| 4061 | % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
|
|---|
| 4062 | % for the sake of vms.
|
|---|
| 4063 | %
|
|---|
| 4064 | \def\newindex#1{%
|
|---|
| 4065 | \iflinks
|
|---|
| 4066 | \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
|---|
| 4067 | \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
|
|---|
| 4068 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4069 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
|
|---|
| 4070 | \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
|
|---|
| 4071 | }
|
|---|
| 4072 |
|
|---|
| 4073 | % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
|
|---|
| 4074 | %
|
|---|
| 4075 | \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
|
|---|
| 4076 |
|
|---|
| 4077 | % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
|
|---|
| 4078 | %
|
|---|
| 4079 | \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
|
|---|
| 4080 | %
|
|---|
| 4081 | \def\newcodeindex#1{%
|
|---|
| 4082 | \iflinks
|
|---|
| 4083 | \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
|---|
| 4084 | \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
|
|---|
| 4085 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4086 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
|
|---|
| 4087 | \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
|
|---|
| 4088 | }
|
|---|
| 4089 |
|
|---|
| 4090 |
|
|---|
| 4091 | % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
|
|---|
| 4092 | % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
|
|---|
| 4093 | %
|
|---|
| 4094 | % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
|
|---|
| 4095 | % inside @code.
|
|---|
| 4096 | %
|
|---|
| 4097 | \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
|
|---|
| 4098 | \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
|
|---|
| 4099 |
|
|---|
| 4100 | % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
|
|---|
| 4101 | % #3 the target index (bar).
|
|---|
| 4102 | \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
|
|---|
| 4103 | % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
|
|---|
| 4104 | % closing the target index.
|
|---|
| 4105 | \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
|
|---|
| 4106 | % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
|
|---|
| 4107 | % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
|
|---|
| 4108 | \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
|
|---|
| 4109 | \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
|
|---|
| 4110 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4111 | % redefine \fooindfile:
|
|---|
| 4112 | \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
|
|---|
| 4113 | \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
|
|---|
| 4114 | % redefine \fooindex:
|
|---|
| 4115 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
|
|---|
| 4116 | }
|
|---|
| 4117 |
|
|---|
| 4118 | % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
|
|---|
| 4119 | % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
|
|---|
| 4120 | % and it is "foo", the name of the index.
|
|---|
| 4121 |
|
|---|
| 4122 | % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
|
|---|
| 4123 | % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
|
|---|
| 4124 |
|
|---|
| 4125 | % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
|
|---|
| 4126 | % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
|
|---|
| 4127 |
|
|---|
| 4128 | \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
|
|---|
| 4129 | \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
|---|
| 4130 |
|
|---|
| 4131 | % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
|
|---|
| 4132 | \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
|
|---|
| 4133 | \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
|
|---|
| 4134 |
|
|---|
| 4135 | % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
|
|---|
| 4136 | % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
|
|---|
| 4137 | % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
|
|---|
| 4138 | %
|
|---|
| 4139 | \def\indexdummies{%
|
|---|
| 4140 | \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
|
|---|
| 4141 | \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
|
|---|
| 4142 | \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
|
|---|
| 4143 | %
|
|---|
| 4144 | % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy)
|
|---|
| 4145 | % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text. Also, more
|
|---|
| 4146 | % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
|
|---|
| 4147 | % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
|
|---|
| 4148 | % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. Perhaps we
|
|---|
| 4149 | % should define @lbrace and @rbrace commands a la @comma.
|
|---|
| 4150 | \def\{{{\tt\char123}}%
|
|---|
| 4151 | \def\}{{\tt\char125}}%
|
|---|
| 4152 | %
|
|---|
| 4153 | % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
|
|---|
| 4154 | % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
|
|---|
| 4155 | % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
|
|---|
| 4156 | % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
|
|---|
| 4157 | % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
|
|---|
| 4158 | % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
|
|---|
| 4159 | % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
|
|---|
| 4160 | % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
|
|---|
| 4161 | % is still getting written without apparent harm.
|
|---|
| 4162 | %
|
|---|
| 4163 | % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
|
|---|
| 4164 | % help-texinfo, 22may06):
|
|---|
| 4165 | % @macro funindex {WORD}
|
|---|
| 4166 | % @findex xyz
|
|---|
| 4167 | % @end macro
|
|---|
| 4168 | % ...
|
|---|
| 4169 | % @funindex commtest
|
|---|
| 4170 | %
|
|---|
| 4171 | % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
|
|---|
| 4172 | %
|
|---|
| 4173 | % Sample whatsit resulting:
|
|---|
| 4174 | % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
|
|---|
| 4175 | %
|
|---|
| 4176 | % So:
|
|---|
| 4177 | \let\endinput = \empty
|
|---|
| 4178 | %
|
|---|
| 4179 | % Do the redefinitions.
|
|---|
| 4180 | \commondummies
|
|---|
| 4181 | }
|
|---|
| 4182 |
|
|---|
| 4183 | % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
|
|---|
| 4184 | % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
|
|---|
| 4185 | % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
|
|---|
| 4186 | % this will be simpler.
|
|---|
| 4187 | %
|
|---|
| 4188 | \def\atdummies{%
|
|---|
| 4189 | \def\@{@@}%
|
|---|
| 4190 | \def\ {@ }%
|
|---|
| 4191 | \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
|
|---|
| 4192 | \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
|
|---|
| 4193 | %
|
|---|
| 4194 | % Do the redefinitions.
|
|---|
| 4195 | \commondummies
|
|---|
| 4196 | \otherbackslash
|
|---|
| 4197 | }
|
|---|
| 4198 |
|
|---|
| 4199 | % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
|
|---|
| 4200 | %
|
|---|
| 4201 | \def\commondummies{%
|
|---|
| 4202 | %
|
|---|
| 4203 | % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
|
|---|
| 4204 | % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words,
|
|---|
| 4205 | % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
|
|---|
| 4206 | % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
|
|---|
| 4207 | % from whatever follows.
|
|---|
| 4208 | %
|
|---|
| 4209 | % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
|
|---|
| 4210 | % space.
|
|---|
| 4211 | %
|
|---|
| 4212 | % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
|
|---|
| 4213 | % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
|
|---|
| 4214 | % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
|
|---|
| 4215 | %
|
|---|
| 4216 | \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
|
|---|
| 4217 | \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
|
|---|
| 4218 | \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
|
|---|
| 4219 | %
|
|---|
| 4220 | \commondummiesnofonts
|
|---|
| 4221 | %
|
|---|
| 4222 | \definedummyletter\_%
|
|---|
| 4223 | %
|
|---|
| 4224 | % Non-English letters.
|
|---|
| 4225 | \definedummyword\AA
|
|---|
| 4226 | \definedummyword\AE
|
|---|
| 4227 | \definedummyword\DH
|
|---|
| 4228 | \definedummyword\L
|
|---|
| 4229 | \definedummyword\O
|
|---|
| 4230 | \definedummyword\OE
|
|---|
| 4231 | \definedummyword\TH
|
|---|
| 4232 | \definedummyword\aa
|
|---|
| 4233 | \definedummyword\ae
|
|---|
| 4234 | \definedummyword\dh
|
|---|
| 4235 | \definedummyword\exclamdown
|
|---|
| 4236 | \definedummyword\l
|
|---|
| 4237 | \definedummyword\o
|
|---|
| 4238 | \definedummyword\oe
|
|---|
| 4239 | \definedummyword\ordf
|
|---|
| 4240 | \definedummyword\ordm
|
|---|
| 4241 | \definedummyword\questiondown
|
|---|
| 4242 | \definedummyword\ss
|
|---|
| 4243 | \definedummyword\th
|
|---|
| 4244 | %
|
|---|
| 4245 | % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
|
|---|
| 4246 | \definedummyword\bf
|
|---|
| 4247 | \definedummyword\gtr
|
|---|
| 4248 | \definedummyword\hat
|
|---|
| 4249 | \definedummyword\less
|
|---|
| 4250 | \definedummyword\sf
|
|---|
| 4251 | \definedummyword\sl
|
|---|
| 4252 | \definedummyword\tclose
|
|---|
| 4253 | \definedummyword\tt
|
|---|
| 4254 | %
|
|---|
| 4255 | \definedummyword\LaTeX
|
|---|
| 4256 | \definedummyword\TeX
|
|---|
| 4257 | %
|
|---|
| 4258 | % Assorted special characters.
|
|---|
| 4259 | \definedummyword\bullet
|
|---|
| 4260 | \definedummyword\comma
|
|---|
| 4261 | \definedummyword\copyright
|
|---|
| 4262 | \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
|
|---|
| 4263 | \definedummyword\dots
|
|---|
| 4264 | \definedummyword\enddots
|
|---|
| 4265 | \definedummyword\entrybreak
|
|---|
| 4266 | \definedummyword\equiv
|
|---|
| 4267 | \definedummyword\error
|
|---|
| 4268 | \definedummyword\euro
|
|---|
| 4269 | \definedummyword\guillemetleft
|
|---|
| 4270 | \definedummyword\guillemetright
|
|---|
| 4271 | \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
|
|---|
| 4272 | \definedummyword\guilsinglright
|
|---|
| 4273 | \definedummyword\expansion
|
|---|
| 4274 | \definedummyword\minus
|
|---|
| 4275 | \definedummyword\ogonek
|
|---|
| 4276 | \definedummyword\pounds
|
|---|
| 4277 | \definedummyword\point
|
|---|
| 4278 | \definedummyword\print
|
|---|
| 4279 | \definedummyword\quotedblbase
|
|---|
| 4280 | \definedummyword\quotedblleft
|
|---|
| 4281 | \definedummyword\quotedblright
|
|---|
| 4282 | \definedummyword\quoteleft
|
|---|
| 4283 | \definedummyword\quoteright
|
|---|
| 4284 | \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
|
|---|
| 4285 | \definedummyword\result
|
|---|
| 4286 | \definedummyword\textdegree
|
|---|
| 4287 | %
|
|---|
| 4288 | % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
|
|---|
| 4289 | \macrolist
|
|---|
| 4290 | %
|
|---|
| 4291 | \normalturnoffactive
|
|---|
| 4292 | %
|
|---|
| 4293 | % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
|
|---|
| 4294 | % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
|
|---|
| 4295 | \makevalueexpandable
|
|---|
| 4296 | }
|
|---|
| 4297 |
|
|---|
| 4298 | % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
|
|---|
| 4299 | %
|
|---|
| 4300 | \def\commondummiesnofonts{%
|
|---|
| 4301 | % Control letters and accents.
|
|---|
| 4302 | \definedummyletter\!%
|
|---|
| 4303 | \definedummyaccent\"%
|
|---|
| 4304 | \definedummyaccent\'%
|
|---|
| 4305 | \definedummyletter\*%
|
|---|
| 4306 | \definedummyaccent\,%
|
|---|
| 4307 | \definedummyletter\.%
|
|---|
| 4308 | \definedummyletter\/%
|
|---|
| 4309 | \definedummyletter\:%
|
|---|
| 4310 | \definedummyaccent\=%
|
|---|
| 4311 | \definedummyletter\?%
|
|---|
| 4312 | \definedummyaccent\^%
|
|---|
| 4313 | \definedummyaccent\`%
|
|---|
| 4314 | \definedummyaccent\~%
|
|---|
| 4315 | \definedummyword\u
|
|---|
| 4316 | \definedummyword\v
|
|---|
| 4317 | \definedummyword\H
|
|---|
| 4318 | \definedummyword\dotaccent
|
|---|
| 4319 | \definedummyword\ogonek
|
|---|
| 4320 | \definedummyword\ringaccent
|
|---|
| 4321 | \definedummyword\tieaccent
|
|---|
| 4322 | \definedummyword\ubaraccent
|
|---|
| 4323 | \definedummyword\udotaccent
|
|---|
| 4324 | \definedummyword\dotless
|
|---|
| 4325 | %
|
|---|
| 4326 | % Texinfo font commands.
|
|---|
| 4327 | \definedummyword\b
|
|---|
| 4328 | \definedummyword\i
|
|---|
| 4329 | \definedummyword\r
|
|---|
| 4330 | \definedummyword\sc
|
|---|
| 4331 | \definedummyword\t
|
|---|
| 4332 | %
|
|---|
| 4333 | % Commands that take arguments.
|
|---|
| 4334 | \definedummyword\acronym
|
|---|
| 4335 | \definedummyword\cite
|
|---|
| 4336 | \definedummyword\code
|
|---|
| 4337 | \definedummyword\command
|
|---|
| 4338 | \definedummyword\dfn
|
|---|
| 4339 | \definedummyword\email
|
|---|
| 4340 | \definedummyword\emph
|
|---|
| 4341 | \definedummyword\env
|
|---|
| 4342 | \definedummyword\file
|
|---|
| 4343 | \definedummyword\kbd
|
|---|
| 4344 | \definedummyword\key
|
|---|
| 4345 | \definedummyword\math
|
|---|
| 4346 | \definedummyword\option
|
|---|
| 4347 | \definedummyword\pxref
|
|---|
| 4348 | \definedummyword\ref
|
|---|
| 4349 | \definedummyword\samp
|
|---|
| 4350 | \definedummyword\strong
|
|---|
| 4351 | \definedummyword\tie
|
|---|
| 4352 | \definedummyword\uref
|
|---|
| 4353 | \definedummyword\url
|
|---|
| 4354 | \definedummyword\var
|
|---|
| 4355 | \definedummyword\verb
|
|---|
| 4356 | \definedummyword\w
|
|---|
| 4357 | \definedummyword\xref
|
|---|
| 4358 | }
|
|---|
| 4359 |
|
|---|
| 4360 | % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
|
|---|
| 4361 | % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
|
|---|
| 4362 | % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
|
|---|
| 4363 | % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
|
|---|
| 4364 | %
|
|---|
| 4365 | \def\indexnofonts{%
|
|---|
| 4366 | % Accent commands should become @asis.
|
|---|
| 4367 | \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
|
|---|
| 4368 | % We can just ignore other control letters.
|
|---|
| 4369 | \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
|
|---|
| 4370 | % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
|
|---|
| 4371 | \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
|
|---|
| 4372 | %
|
|---|
| 4373 | \commondummiesnofonts
|
|---|
| 4374 | %
|
|---|
| 4375 | % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
|
|---|
| 4376 | % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
|
|---|
| 4377 | % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
|
|---|
| 4378 | %\let\tt=\asis
|
|---|
| 4379 | %
|
|---|
| 4380 | \def\ { }%
|
|---|
| 4381 | \def\@{@}%
|
|---|
| 4382 | % how to handle braces?
|
|---|
| 4383 | \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
|
|---|
| 4384 | %
|
|---|
| 4385 | % Non-English letters.
|
|---|
| 4386 | \def\AA{AA}%
|
|---|
| 4387 | \def\AE{AE}%
|
|---|
| 4388 | \def\DH{DZZ}%
|
|---|
| 4389 | \def\L{L}%
|
|---|
| 4390 | \def\OE{OE}%
|
|---|
| 4391 | \def\O{O}%
|
|---|
| 4392 | \def\TH{ZZZ}%
|
|---|
| 4393 | \def\aa{aa}%
|
|---|
| 4394 | \def\ae{ae}%
|
|---|
| 4395 | \def\dh{dzz}%
|
|---|
| 4396 | \def\exclamdown{!}%
|
|---|
| 4397 | \def\l{l}%
|
|---|
| 4398 | \def\oe{oe}%
|
|---|
| 4399 | \def\ordf{a}%
|
|---|
| 4400 | \def\ordm{o}%
|
|---|
| 4401 | \def\o{o}%
|
|---|
| 4402 | \def\questiondown{?}%
|
|---|
| 4403 | \def\ss{ss}%
|
|---|
| 4404 | \def\th{zzz}%
|
|---|
| 4405 | %
|
|---|
| 4406 | \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
|
|---|
| 4407 | \def\TeX{TeX}%
|
|---|
| 4408 | %
|
|---|
| 4409 | % Assorted special characters.
|
|---|
| 4410 | % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
|
|---|
| 4411 | \def\bullet{bullet}%
|
|---|
| 4412 | \def\comma{,}%
|
|---|
| 4413 | \def\copyright{copyright}%
|
|---|
| 4414 | \def\dots{...}%
|
|---|
| 4415 | \def\enddots{...}%
|
|---|
| 4416 | \def\equiv{==}%
|
|---|
| 4417 | \def\error{error}%
|
|---|
| 4418 | \def\euro{euro}%
|
|---|
| 4419 | \def\expansion{==>}%
|
|---|
| 4420 | \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
|
|---|
| 4421 | \def\guillemetright{>>}%
|
|---|
| 4422 | \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
|
|---|
| 4423 | \def\guilsinglright{>}%
|
|---|
| 4424 | \def\minus{-}%
|
|---|
| 4425 | \def\point{.}%
|
|---|
| 4426 | \def\pounds{pounds}%
|
|---|
| 4427 | \def\print{-|}%
|
|---|
| 4428 | \def\quotedblbase{"}%
|
|---|
| 4429 | \def\quotedblleft{"}%
|
|---|
| 4430 | \def\quotedblright{"}%
|
|---|
| 4431 | \def\quoteleft{`}%
|
|---|
| 4432 | \def\quoteright{'}%
|
|---|
| 4433 | \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
|
|---|
| 4434 | \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
|
|---|
| 4435 | \def\result{=>}%
|
|---|
| 4436 | \def\textdegree{o}%
|
|---|
| 4437 | %
|
|---|
| 4438 | % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
|
|---|
| 4439 | % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
|
|---|
| 4440 | % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
|
|---|
| 4441 | % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
|
|---|
| 4442 | % that starts with \.
|
|---|
| 4443 | %
|
|---|
| 4444 | % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
|
|---|
| 4445 | % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
|
|---|
| 4446 | % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
|
|---|
| 4447 | %
|
|---|
| 4448 | \macrolist
|
|---|
| 4449 | }
|
|---|
| 4450 |
|
|---|
| 4451 | \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
|
|---|
| 4452 | \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
|
|---|
| 4453 |
|
|---|
| 4454 | % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
|
|---|
| 4455 | % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
|
|---|
| 4456 | \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
|
|---|
| 4457 |
|
|---|
| 4458 | % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
|
|---|
| 4459 | % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
|
|---|
| 4460 | % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
|
|---|
| 4461 | % is with most defuns, which call us directly).
|
|---|
| 4462 | %
|
|---|
| 4463 | \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
|
|---|
| 4464 | \iflinks
|
|---|
| 4465 | {%
|
|---|
| 4466 | % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
|
|---|
| 4467 | \toks0 = {#2}%
|
|---|
| 4468 | % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
|
|---|
| 4469 | \def\thirdarg{#3}%
|
|---|
| 4470 | \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
|
|---|
| 4471 | \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
|
|---|
| 4472 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4473 | %
|
|---|
| 4474 | \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 4475 | %
|
|---|
| 4476 | \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
|
|---|
| 4477 | }%
|
|---|
| 4478 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4479 | }
|
|---|
| 4480 |
|
|---|
| 4481 | % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
|
|---|
| 4482 | %
|
|---|
| 4483 | \def\dosubindwrite{%
|
|---|
| 4484 | % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
|
|---|
| 4485 | \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
|
|---|
| 4486 | \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
|
|---|
| 4487 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4488 | %
|
|---|
| 4489 | % Remember, we are within a group.
|
|---|
| 4490 | \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
|
|---|
| 4491 | \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
|
|---|
| 4492 | % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
|
|---|
| 4493 | %
|
|---|
| 4494 | % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
|
|---|
| 4495 | % get the string to sort by.
|
|---|
| 4496 | {\indexnofonts
|
|---|
| 4497 | \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
|
|---|
| 4498 | \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
|
|---|
| 4499 | }%
|
|---|
| 4500 | %
|
|---|
| 4501 | % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
|
|---|
| 4502 | % the original text, including any font commands. We write
|
|---|
| 4503 | % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
|
|---|
| 4504 | % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
|
|---|
| 4505 | % sorted result.
|
|---|
| 4506 | \edef\temp{%
|
|---|
| 4507 | \write\writeto{%
|
|---|
| 4508 | \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
|
|---|
| 4509 | }%
|
|---|
| 4510 | \temp
|
|---|
| 4511 | }
|
|---|
| 4512 |
|
|---|
| 4513 | % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
|
|---|
| 4514 | %
|
|---|
| 4515 | % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
|
|---|
| 4516 | % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
|
|---|
| 4517 | % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
|
|---|
| 4518 | % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
|
|---|
| 4519 | % sequences like this:
|
|---|
| 4520 | % @end defun
|
|---|
| 4521 | % @tindex whatever
|
|---|
| 4522 | % @defun ...
|
|---|
| 4523 | % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
|
|---|
| 4524 | % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
|
|---|
| 4525 | % the previous defun.
|
|---|
| 4526 | %
|
|---|
| 4527 | % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
|
|---|
| 4528 | % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
|
|---|
| 4529 | %
|
|---|
| 4530 | % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
|
|---|
| 4531 | %
|
|---|
| 4532 | % But wait, there is a catch there:
|
|---|
| 4533 | % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
|
|---|
| 4534 | % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
|
|---|
| 4535 | % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
|
|---|
| 4536 | % representation of the skip.
|
|---|
| 4537 | %
|
|---|
| 4538 | % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
|
|---|
| 4539 | % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
|
|---|
| 4540 | %
|
|---|
| 4541 | \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
|
|---|
| 4542 | %
|
|---|
| 4543 | \newskip\whatsitskip
|
|---|
| 4544 | \newcount\whatsitpenalty
|
|---|
| 4545 | %
|
|---|
| 4546 | % ..., ready, GO:
|
|---|
| 4547 | %
|
|---|
| 4548 | \def\safewhatsit#1{%
|
|---|
| 4549 | \ifhmode
|
|---|
| 4550 | #1%
|
|---|
| 4551 | \else
|
|---|
| 4552 | % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
|
|---|
| 4553 | \whatsitskip = \lastskip
|
|---|
| 4554 | \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
|
|---|
| 4555 | \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
|
|---|
| 4556 | %
|
|---|
| 4557 | % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
|
|---|
| 4558 | % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
|
|---|
| 4559 | % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
|
|---|
| 4560 | % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
|
|---|
| 4561 | % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
|
|---|
| 4562 | \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
|---|
| 4563 | \else
|
|---|
| 4564 | \vskip-\whatsitskip
|
|---|
| 4565 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4566 | %
|
|---|
| 4567 | #1%
|
|---|
| 4568 | %
|
|---|
| 4569 | \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
|---|
| 4570 | % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
|
|---|
| 4571 | % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
|
|---|
| 4572 | % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
|
|---|
| 4573 | % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
|
|---|
| 4574 | % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
|
|---|
| 4575 | %
|
|---|
| 4576 | % @deffn deffn-whatever
|
|---|
| 4577 | % @vindex index-whatever
|
|---|
| 4578 | % Description.
|
|---|
| 4579 | % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
|
|---|
| 4580 | % and the "Description." paragraph.
|
|---|
| 4581 | \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
|
|---|
| 4582 | \else
|
|---|
| 4583 | % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
|
|---|
| 4584 | % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
|
|---|
| 4585 | % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
|
|---|
| 4586 | \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
|
|---|
| 4587 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4588 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4589 | }
|
|---|
| 4590 |
|
|---|
| 4591 | % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
|
|---|
| 4592 | % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
|
|---|
| 4593 | % or
|
|---|
| 4594 | % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
|
|---|
| 4595 | % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
|
|---|
| 4596 | % containing these kinds of lines:
|
|---|
| 4597 | % \initial {c}
|
|---|
| 4598 | % before the first topic whose initial is c
|
|---|
| 4599 | % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
|
|---|
| 4600 | % for a topic that is used without subtopics
|
|---|
| 4601 | % \primary {topic}
|
|---|
| 4602 | % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
|
|---|
| 4603 | % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
|
|---|
| 4604 | % for each subtopic.
|
|---|
| 4605 |
|
|---|
| 4606 | % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
|
|---|
| 4607 | % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
|
|---|
| 4608 |
|
|---|
| 4609 | \def\findex {\fnindex}
|
|---|
| 4610 | \def\kindex {\kyindex}
|
|---|
| 4611 | \def\cindex {\cpindex}
|
|---|
| 4612 | \def\vindex {\vrindex}
|
|---|
| 4613 | \def\tindex {\tpindex}
|
|---|
| 4614 | \def\pindex {\pgindex}
|
|---|
| 4615 |
|
|---|
| 4616 | \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
|
|---|
| 4617 | {\obeylines %
|
|---|
| 4618 | \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
|
|---|
| 4619 | \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
|
|---|
| 4620 |
|
|---|
| 4621 | % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
|
|---|
| 4622 |
|
|---|
| 4623 | % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
|
|---|
| 4624 | % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
|
|---|
| 4625 | %
|
|---|
| 4626 | \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
|
|---|
| 4627 | \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
|
|---|
| 4628 | %
|
|---|
| 4629 | \smallfonts \rm
|
|---|
| 4630 | \tolerance = 9500
|
|---|
| 4631 | \plainfrenchspacing
|
|---|
| 4632 | \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
|
|---|
| 4633 | %
|
|---|
| 4634 | % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
|
|---|
| 4635 | % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
|
|---|
| 4636 | % \initial {@}
|
|---|
| 4637 | % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
|
|---|
| 4638 | % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
|
|---|
| 4639 | \catcode`\@ = 11
|
|---|
| 4640 | \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
|
|---|
| 4641 | \ifeof 1
|
|---|
| 4642 | % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
|
|---|
| 4643 | % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
|
|---|
| 4644 | % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
|
|---|
| 4645 | % there is some text.
|
|---|
| 4646 | \putwordIndexNonexistent
|
|---|
| 4647 | \else
|
|---|
| 4648 | %
|
|---|
| 4649 | % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
|
|---|
| 4650 | % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
|
|---|
| 4651 | % it can discover if there is anything in it.
|
|---|
| 4652 | \read 1 to \temp
|
|---|
| 4653 | \ifeof 1
|
|---|
| 4654 | \putwordIndexIsEmpty
|
|---|
| 4655 | \else
|
|---|
| 4656 | % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
|
|---|
| 4657 | % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
|
|---|
| 4658 | % to make right now.
|
|---|
| 4659 | \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
|
|---|
| 4660 | \catcode`\\ = 0
|
|---|
| 4661 | \escapechar = `\\
|
|---|
| 4662 | \begindoublecolumns
|
|---|
| 4663 | \input \jobname.#1s
|
|---|
| 4664 | \enddoublecolumns
|
|---|
| 4665 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4666 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4667 | \closein 1
|
|---|
| 4668 | \endgroup}
|
|---|
| 4669 |
|
|---|
| 4670 | % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
|
|---|
| 4671 | % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
|
|---|
| 4672 |
|
|---|
| 4673 | \def\initial#1{{%
|
|---|
| 4674 | % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
|
|---|
| 4675 | \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
|
|---|
| 4676 | %
|
|---|
| 4677 | % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
|
|---|
| 4678 | \removelastskip
|
|---|
| 4679 | %
|
|---|
| 4680 | % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
|
|---|
| 4681 | \nobreak
|
|---|
| 4682 | \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
|
|---|
| 4683 | \penalty 0
|
|---|
| 4684 | \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
|
|---|
| 4685 | %
|
|---|
| 4686 | % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
|
|---|
| 4687 | % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
|
|---|
| 4688 | % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
|
|---|
| 4689 | % we need before each entry, but it's better.
|
|---|
| 4690 | %
|
|---|
| 4691 | % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
|
|---|
| 4692 | \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
|
|---|
| 4693 | \leftline{\secbf #1}%
|
|---|
| 4694 | % Do our best not to break after the initial.
|
|---|
| 4695 | \nobreak
|
|---|
| 4696 | \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
|
|---|
| 4697 | }}
|
|---|
| 4698 |
|
|---|
| 4699 | % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
|
|---|
| 4700 | % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
|
|---|
| 4701 | % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
|
|---|
| 4702 | %
|
|---|
| 4703 | % A straightforward implementation would start like this:
|
|---|
| 4704 | % \def\entry#1#2{...
|
|---|
| 4705 | % But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
|
|---|
| 4706 | % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
|
|---|
| 4707 | % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
|
|---|
| 4708 | % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
|
|---|
| 4709 | % --kasal, 21nov03
|
|---|
| 4710 | \def\entry{%
|
|---|
| 4711 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 4712 | %
|
|---|
| 4713 | % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
|
|---|
| 4714 | % affect previous text.
|
|---|
| 4715 | \par
|
|---|
| 4716 | %
|
|---|
| 4717 | % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
|
|---|
| 4718 | \parfillskip = 0in
|
|---|
| 4719 | %
|
|---|
| 4720 | % No extra space above this paragraph.
|
|---|
| 4721 | \parskip = 0in
|
|---|
| 4722 | %
|
|---|
| 4723 | % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
|
|---|
| 4724 | \finalhyphendemerits = 0
|
|---|
| 4725 | %
|
|---|
| 4726 | % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
|
|---|
| 4727 | % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
|
|---|
| 4728 | % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
|
|---|
| 4729 | % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
|
|---|
| 4730 | % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
|
|---|
| 4731 | %
|
|---|
| 4732 | % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
|
|---|
| 4733 | % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
|
|---|
| 4734 | \hangindent = 2em
|
|---|
| 4735 | %
|
|---|
| 4736 | % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
|
|---|
| 4737 | % with blank space.
|
|---|
| 4738 | \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
|
|---|
| 4739 | %
|
|---|
| 4740 | % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
|
|---|
| 4741 | % columns.
|
|---|
| 4742 | \vskip 0pt plus1pt
|
|---|
| 4743 | %
|
|---|
| 4744 | % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
|
|---|
| 4745 | % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section
|
|---|
| 4746 | % titles, for instance.
|
|---|
| 4747 | \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
|
|---|
| 4748 | \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}%
|
|---|
| 4749 | %
|
|---|
| 4750 | % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
|
|---|
| 4751 | \afterassignment\doentry
|
|---|
| 4752 | \let\temp =
|
|---|
| 4753 | }
|
|---|
| 4754 | \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
|
|---|
| 4755 | \def\doentry{%
|
|---|
| 4756 | \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
|
|---|
| 4757 | \noindent
|
|---|
| 4758 | \aftergroup\finishentry
|
|---|
| 4759 | % And now comes the text of the entry.
|
|---|
| 4760 | }
|
|---|
| 4761 | \def\finishentry#1{%
|
|---|
| 4762 | % #1 is the page number.
|
|---|
| 4763 | %
|
|---|
| 4764 | % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
|
|---|
| 4765 | % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
|
|---|
| 4766 | % cursed by a Unix daemon.
|
|---|
| 4767 | \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
|
|---|
| 4768 | \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
|
|---|
| 4769 | \ %
|
|---|
| 4770 | \else
|
|---|
| 4771 | %
|
|---|
| 4772 | % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
|
|---|
| 4773 | % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
|
|---|
| 4774 | % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
|
|---|
| 4775 | \hfil\penalty50
|
|---|
| 4776 | \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
|
|---|
| 4777 | %
|
|---|
| 4778 | % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
|
|---|
| 4779 | % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
|
|---|
| 4780 | % \hbox ensues.
|
|---|
| 4781 | \ifpdf
|
|---|
| 4782 | \pdfgettoks#1.%
|
|---|
| 4783 | \ \the\toksA
|
|---|
| 4784 | \else
|
|---|
| 4785 | \ #1%
|
|---|
| 4786 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4787 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4788 | \par
|
|---|
| 4789 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 4790 | }
|
|---|
| 4791 |
|
|---|
| 4792 | % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
|
|---|
| 4793 | \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
|
|---|
| 4794 | \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
|
|---|
| 4795 |
|
|---|
| 4796 | \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
|
|---|
| 4797 |
|
|---|
| 4798 | \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
|
|---|
| 4799 | \def\secondary#1#2{{%
|
|---|
| 4800 | \parfillskip=0in
|
|---|
| 4801 | \parskip=0in
|
|---|
| 4802 | \hangindent=1in
|
|---|
| 4803 | \hangafter=1
|
|---|
| 4804 | \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
|
|---|
| 4805 | \ifpdf
|
|---|
| 4806 | \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
|
|---|
| 4807 | \else
|
|---|
| 4808 | #2
|
|---|
| 4809 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4810 | \par
|
|---|
| 4811 | }}
|
|---|
| 4812 |
|
|---|
| 4813 | % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
|
|---|
| 4814 | % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
|
|---|
| 4815 | % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
|
|---|
| 4816 | \catcode`\@=11
|
|---|
| 4817 |
|
|---|
| 4818 | \newbox\partialpage
|
|---|
| 4819 | \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
|
|---|
| 4820 |
|
|---|
| 4821 | \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
|
|---|
| 4822 | % Grab any single-column material above us.
|
|---|
| 4823 | \output = {%
|
|---|
| 4824 | %
|
|---|
| 4825 | % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
|
|---|
| 4826 | % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
|
|---|
| 4827 | % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
|
|---|
| 4828 | % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
|
|---|
| 4829 | % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
|
|---|
| 4830 | % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
|
|---|
| 4831 | % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
|
|---|
| 4832 | \ifvoid\partialpage \else
|
|---|
| 4833 | \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
|
|---|
| 4834 | \fi
|
|---|
| 4835 | %
|
|---|
| 4836 | \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
|
|---|
| 4837 | % Unvbox the main output page.
|
|---|
| 4838 | \unvbox\PAGE
|
|---|
| 4839 | \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
|
|---|
| 4840 | }%
|
|---|
| 4841 | }%
|
|---|
| 4842 | \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
|
|---|
| 4843 | %
|
|---|
| 4844 | % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
|
|---|
| 4845 | \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
|
|---|
| 4846 | %
|
|---|
| 4847 | % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
|
|---|
| 4848 | % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
|
|---|
| 4849 | % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
|
|---|
| 4850 | % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
|
|---|
| 4851 | % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
|
|---|
| 4852 | %
|
|---|
| 4853 | % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
|
|---|
| 4854 | % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
|
|---|
| 4855 | % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
|
|---|
| 4856 | % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
|
|---|
| 4857 | % as it did when we hard-coded it.
|
|---|
| 4858 | %
|
|---|
| 4859 | % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
|
|---|
| 4860 | % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
|
|---|
| 4861 | % been clobbered.
|
|---|
| 4862 | %
|
|---|
| 4863 | \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
|
|---|
| 4864 | \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
|
|---|
| 4865 | \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
|
|---|
| 4866 | \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
|---|
| 4867 | %
|
|---|
| 4868 | % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
|
|---|
| 4869 | % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
|
|---|
| 4870 | \vsize = 2\vsize
|
|---|
| 4871 | }
|
|---|
| 4872 |
|
|---|
| 4873 | % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
|
|---|
| 4874 | % the last.
|
|---|
| 4875 | %
|
|---|
| 4876 | \def\doublecolumnout{%
|
|---|
| 4877 | \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
|
|---|
| 4878 | % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
|
|---|
| 4879 | % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
|
|---|
| 4880 | % previous page.
|
|---|
| 4881 | \dimen@ = \vsize
|
|---|
| 4882 | \divide\dimen@ by 2
|
|---|
| 4883 | \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
|
|---|
| 4884 | %
|
|---|
| 4885 | % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
|
|---|
| 4886 | \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
|
|---|
| 4887 | \onepageout\pagesofar
|
|---|
| 4888 | \unvbox255
|
|---|
| 4889 | \penalty\outputpenalty
|
|---|
| 4890 | }
|
|---|
| 4891 | %
|
|---|
| 4892 | % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
|
|---|
| 4893 | % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
|
|---|
| 4894 | \def\pagesofar{%
|
|---|
| 4895 | \unvbox\partialpage
|
|---|
| 4896 | %
|
|---|
| 4897 | \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
|---|
| 4898 | \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
|
|---|
| 4899 | \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
|
|---|
| 4900 | }
|
|---|
| 4901 | %
|
|---|
| 4902 | % All done with double columns.
|
|---|
| 4903 | \def\enddoublecolumns{%
|
|---|
| 4904 | % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
|
|---|
| 4905 | % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
|
|---|
| 4906 | % following situation:
|
|---|
| 4907 | %
|
|---|
| 4908 | % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
|
|---|
| 4909 | % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
|
|---|
| 4910 | % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
|
|---|
| 4911 | % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
|
|---|
| 4912 | % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
|
|---|
| 4913 | % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
|
|---|
| 4914 | % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
|
|---|
| 4915 | % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
|
|---|
| 4916 | % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
|
|---|
| 4917 | % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
|
|---|
| 4918 | % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
|
|---|
| 4919 | % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
|
|---|
| 4920 | % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
|
|---|
| 4921 | % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
|
|---|
| 4922 | % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
|
|---|
| 4923 | % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
|
|---|
| 4924 | % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
|
|---|
| 4925 | % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
|
|---|
| 4926 | % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
|
|---|
| 4927 | %
|
|---|
| 4928 | % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
|
|---|
| 4929 | % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
|
|---|
| 4930 | \penalty0
|
|---|
| 4931 | %
|
|---|
| 4932 | \output = {%
|
|---|
| 4933 | % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
|
|---|
| 4934 | % current page, no automatic page break.
|
|---|
| 4935 | \balancecolumns
|
|---|
| 4936 | %
|
|---|
| 4937 | % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
|
|---|
| 4938 | % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
|
|---|
| 4939 | % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
|
|---|
| 4940 | % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
|
|---|
| 4941 | % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
|
|---|
| 4942 | % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
|
|---|
| 4943 | % the output somewhat more palatable.)
|
|---|
| 4944 | \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
|
|---|
| 4945 | }%
|
|---|
| 4946 | \eject
|
|---|
| 4947 | \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
|
|---|
| 4948 | %
|
|---|
| 4949 | % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
|
|---|
| 4950 | % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
|
|---|
| 4951 | % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
|
|---|
| 4952 | % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
|
|---|
| 4953 | \pagegoal = \vsize
|
|---|
| 4954 | }
|
|---|
| 4955 | %
|
|---|
| 4956 | % Called at the end of the double column material.
|
|---|
| 4957 | \def\balancecolumns{%
|
|---|
| 4958 | \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
|
|---|
| 4959 | \dimen@ = \ht0
|
|---|
| 4960 | \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
|
|---|
| 4961 | \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
|
|---|
| 4962 | \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
|
|---|
| 4963 | %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
|
|---|
| 4964 | \splittopskip = \topskip
|
|---|
| 4965 | % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
|
|---|
| 4966 | {%
|
|---|
| 4967 | \vbadness = 10000
|
|---|
| 4968 | \loop
|
|---|
| 4969 | \global\setbox3 = \copy0
|
|---|
| 4970 | \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
|
|---|
| 4971 | \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
|
|---|
| 4972 | \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
|
|---|
| 4973 | \repeat
|
|---|
| 4974 | }%
|
|---|
| 4975 | %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
|
|---|
| 4976 | \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
|
|---|
| 4977 | \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
|
|---|
| 4978 | %
|
|---|
| 4979 | \pagesofar
|
|---|
| 4980 | }
|
|---|
| 4981 | \catcode`\@ = \other
|
|---|
| 4982 |
|
|---|
| 4983 |
|
|---|
| 4984 | \message{sectioning,}
|
|---|
| 4985 | % Chapters, sections, etc.
|
|---|
| 4986 |
|
|---|
| 4987 | % Let's start with @part.
|
|---|
| 4988 | \outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
|
|---|
| 4989 | \def\partzzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 4990 | \chapoddpage
|
|---|
| 4991 | \null
|
|---|
| 4992 | \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit
|
|---|
| 4993 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 4994 | \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text
|
|---|
| 4995 | \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with
|
|---|
| 4996 | \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
|
|---|
| 4997 | \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page
|
|---|
| 4998 | \chapoddpage
|
|---|
| 4999 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 5000 | }
|
|---|
| 5001 |
|
|---|
| 5002 | % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered
|
|---|
| 5003 | % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
|
|---|
| 5004 | % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
|
|---|
| 5005 | % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
|
|---|
| 5006 | % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
|
|---|
| 5007 | \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
|
|---|
| 5008 | \newcount\chapno
|
|---|
| 5009 | \newcount\secno \secno=0
|
|---|
| 5010 | \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
|
|---|
| 5011 | \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
|
|---|
| 5012 |
|
|---|
| 5013 | % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
|
|---|
| 5014 | \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
|
|---|
| 5015 | %
|
|---|
| 5016 | % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
|
|---|
| 5017 | % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
|
|---|
| 5018 | % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
|
|---|
| 5019 | % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
|
|---|
| 5020 | %
|
|---|
| 5021 | \def\appendixletter{%
|
|---|
| 5022 | \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
|
|---|
| 5023 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
|
|---|
| 5024 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
|
|---|
| 5025 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
|
|---|
| 5026 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
|
|---|
| 5027 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
|
|---|
| 5028 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
|
|---|
| 5029 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
|
|---|
| 5030 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
|
|---|
| 5031 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
|
|---|
| 5032 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
|
|---|
| 5033 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
|
|---|
| 5034 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
|
|---|
| 5035 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
|
|---|
| 5036 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
|
|---|
| 5037 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
|
|---|
| 5038 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
|
|---|
| 5039 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
|
|---|
| 5040 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
|
|---|
| 5041 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
|
|---|
| 5042 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
|
|---|
| 5043 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
|
|---|
| 5044 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
|
|---|
| 5045 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
|
|---|
| 5046 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
|
|---|
| 5047 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
|
|---|
| 5048 | % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
|
|---|
| 5049 | % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
|
|---|
| 5050 | % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
|
|---|
| 5051 | % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
|
|---|
| 5052 | \else\char\the\appendixno
|
|---|
| 5053 | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
|---|
| 5054 | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
|---|
| 5055 |
|
|---|
| 5056 | % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
|
|---|
| 5057 | % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
|
|---|
| 5058 | % these. @section does likewise.
|
|---|
| 5059 | \def\thischapter{}
|
|---|
| 5060 | \def\thischapternum{}
|
|---|
| 5061 | \def\thischaptername{}
|
|---|
| 5062 | \def\thissection{}
|
|---|
| 5063 | \def\thissectionnum{}
|
|---|
| 5064 | \def\thissectionname{}
|
|---|
| 5065 |
|
|---|
| 5066 | \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
|
|---|
| 5067 | \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
|
|---|
| 5068 |
|
|---|
| 5069 | % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
|
|---|
| 5070 | \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
|
|---|
| 5071 | \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
|
|---|
| 5072 |
|
|---|
| 5073 | % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
|
|---|
| 5074 | \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
|
|---|
| 5075 | \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
|
|---|
| 5076 |
|
|---|
| 5077 | % we only have subsub.
|
|---|
| 5078 | \chardef\maxseclevel = 3
|
|---|
| 5079 | %
|
|---|
| 5080 | % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
|
|---|
| 5081 | % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
|
|---|
| 5082 | \chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
|
|---|
| 5083 | %
|
|---|
| 5084 | % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
|
|---|
| 5085 | % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
|
|---|
| 5086 | \def\chapheadtype{N}
|
|---|
| 5087 |
|
|---|
| 5088 | % Choose a heading macro
|
|---|
| 5089 | % #1 is heading type
|
|---|
| 5090 | % #2 is heading level
|
|---|
| 5091 | % #3 is text for heading
|
|---|
| 5092 | \def\genhead#1#2#3{%
|
|---|
| 5093 | % Compute the abs. sec. level:
|
|---|
| 5094 | \absseclevel=#2
|
|---|
| 5095 | \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
|
|---|
| 5096 | % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
|
|---|
| 5097 | \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
|
|---|
| 5098 | \absseclevel = 0
|
|---|
| 5099 | \else
|
|---|
| 5100 | \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
|
|---|
| 5101 | \absseclevel = 3
|
|---|
| 5102 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5103 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5104 | % The heading type:
|
|---|
| 5105 | \def\headtype{#1}%
|
|---|
| 5106 | \if \headtype U%
|
|---|
| 5107 | \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
|
|---|
| 5108 | \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
|
|---|
| 5109 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5110 | \else
|
|---|
| 5111 | % Check for appendix sections:
|
|---|
| 5112 | \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
|
|---|
| 5113 | \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
|
|---|
| 5114 | \else
|
|---|
| 5115 | \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
|
|---|
| 5116 | \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
|
|---|
| 5117 | \fi\fi
|
|---|
| 5118 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5119 | % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
|
|---|
| 5120 | \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
|
|---|
| 5121 | \def\headtype{U}%
|
|---|
| 5122 | \else
|
|---|
| 5123 | \chardef\unnlevel = 3
|
|---|
| 5124 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5125 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5126 | % Now print the heading:
|
|---|
| 5127 | \if \headtype U%
|
|---|
| 5128 | \ifcase\absseclevel
|
|---|
| 5129 | \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5130 | \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5131 | \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5132 | \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5133 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5134 | \else
|
|---|
| 5135 | \if \headtype A%
|
|---|
| 5136 | \ifcase\absseclevel
|
|---|
| 5137 | \appendixzzz{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5138 | \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5139 | \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5140 | \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5141 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5142 | \else
|
|---|
| 5143 | \ifcase\absseclevel
|
|---|
| 5144 | \chapterzzz{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5145 | \or \seczzz{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5146 | \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5147 | \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5148 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5149 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5150 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5151 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent
|
|---|
| 5152 | }
|
|---|
| 5153 |
|
|---|
| 5154 | % an interface:
|
|---|
| 5155 | \def\numhead{\genhead N}
|
|---|
| 5156 | \def\apphead{\genhead A}
|
|---|
| 5157 | \def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
|
|---|
| 5158 |
|
|---|
| 5159 | % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
|
|---|
| 5160 | % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
|
|---|
| 5161 | %
|
|---|
| 5162 | % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
|
|---|
| 5163 | % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
|
|---|
| 5164 | \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
|
|---|
| 5165 | %
|
|---|
| 5166 | \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
|
|---|
| 5167 | \def\chapterzzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5168 | % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
|
|---|
| 5169 | % as an @include file.
|
|---|
| 5170 | \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
|---|
| 5171 | \global\advance\chapno by 1
|
|---|
| 5172 | %
|
|---|
| 5173 | % Used for \float.
|
|---|
| 5174 | \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
|
|---|
| 5175 | \resetallfloatnos
|
|---|
| 5176 | %
|
|---|
| 5177 | % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
|
|---|
| 5178 | \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
|
|---|
| 5179 | \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
|
|---|
| 5180 | %
|
|---|
| 5181 | % Write the actual heading.
|
|---|
| 5182 | \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
|
|---|
| 5183 | %
|
|---|
| 5184 | % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
|
|---|
| 5185 | \global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
|---|
| 5186 | \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
|---|
| 5187 | \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
|---|
| 5188 | }
|
|---|
| 5189 |
|
|---|
| 5190 | \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
|
|---|
| 5191 | %
|
|---|
| 5192 | \def\appendixzzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5193 | \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
|---|
| 5194 | \global\advance\appendixno by 1
|
|---|
| 5195 | \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
|
|---|
| 5196 | \resetallfloatnos
|
|---|
| 5197 | %
|
|---|
| 5198 | % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
|
|---|
| 5199 | \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
|
|---|
| 5200 | \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
|
|---|
| 5201 | %
|
|---|
| 5202 | \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
|
|---|
| 5203 | %
|
|---|
| 5204 | \global\let\section = \appendixsec
|
|---|
| 5205 | \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
|
|---|
| 5206 | \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
|
|---|
| 5207 | }
|
|---|
| 5208 |
|
|---|
| 5209 | \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
|
|---|
| 5210 | \def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5211 | \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
|---|
| 5212 | \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
|
|---|
| 5213 | %
|
|---|
| 5214 | % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
|
|---|
| 5215 | \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
|
|---|
| 5216 | \resetallfloatnos
|
|---|
| 5217 | %
|
|---|
| 5218 | % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
|
|---|
| 5219 | % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
|
|---|
| 5220 | % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
|
|---|
| 5221 | % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
|
|---|
| 5222 | % to be executed, not expanded).
|
|---|
| 5223 | %
|
|---|
| 5224 | % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
|
|---|
| 5225 | % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
|
|---|
| 5226 | % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
|
|---|
| 5227 | % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
|
|---|
| 5228 | % the toc entries.)
|
|---|
| 5229 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|---|
| 5230 | \message{(\the\toks0)}%
|
|---|
| 5231 | %
|
|---|
| 5232 | \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
|
|---|
| 5233 | %
|
|---|
| 5234 | \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
|
|---|
| 5235 | \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
|
|---|
| 5236 | \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
|
|---|
| 5237 | }
|
|---|
| 5238 |
|
|---|
| 5239 | % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
|
|---|
| 5240 | \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
|
|---|
| 5241 | % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
|
|---|
| 5242 | % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
|
|---|
| 5243 | % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
|
|---|
| 5244 | \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
|
|---|
| 5245 | \unnmhead0{#1}%
|
|---|
| 5246 | \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
|---|
| 5247 | }
|
|---|
| 5248 |
|
|---|
| 5249 | % @top is like @unnumbered.
|
|---|
| 5250 | \let\top\unnumbered
|
|---|
| 5251 |
|
|---|
| 5252 | % Sections.
|
|---|
| 5253 | \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
|
|---|
| 5254 | \def\seczzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5255 | \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
|---|
| 5256 | \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
|
|---|
| 5257 | }
|
|---|
| 5258 |
|
|---|
| 5259 | \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
|
|---|
| 5260 | \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5261 | \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
|---|
| 5262 | \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
|
|---|
| 5263 | }
|
|---|
| 5264 | \let\appendixsec\appendixsection
|
|---|
| 5265 |
|
|---|
| 5266 | \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
|
|---|
| 5267 | \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5268 | \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
|---|
| 5269 | \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
|
|---|
| 5270 | }
|
|---|
| 5271 |
|
|---|
| 5272 | % Subsections.
|
|---|
| 5273 | \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
|
|---|
| 5274 | \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5275 | \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
|---|
| 5276 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
|---|
| 5277 | }
|
|---|
| 5278 |
|
|---|
| 5279 | \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
|
|---|
| 5280 | \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5281 | \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
|---|
| 5282 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
|
|---|
| 5283 | {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
|---|
| 5284 | }
|
|---|
| 5285 |
|
|---|
| 5286 | \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
|
|---|
| 5287 | \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5288 | \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
|---|
| 5289 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
|
|---|
| 5290 | {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
|---|
| 5291 | }
|
|---|
| 5292 |
|
|---|
| 5293 | % Subsubsections.
|
|---|
| 5294 | \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
|
|---|
| 5295 | \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5296 | \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
|---|
| 5297 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
|
|---|
| 5298 | {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
|---|
| 5299 | }
|
|---|
| 5300 |
|
|---|
| 5301 | \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
|
|---|
| 5302 | \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5303 | \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
|---|
| 5304 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
|
|---|
| 5305 | {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
|---|
| 5306 | }
|
|---|
| 5307 |
|
|---|
| 5308 | \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
|
|---|
| 5309 | \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5310 | \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
|---|
| 5311 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
|
|---|
| 5312 | {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
|---|
| 5313 | }
|
|---|
| 5314 |
|
|---|
| 5315 | % These macros control what the section commands do, according
|
|---|
| 5316 | % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
|
|---|
| 5317 | % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
|
|---|
| 5318 | \let\section = \numberedsec
|
|---|
| 5319 | \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
|---|
| 5320 | \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
|---|
| 5321 |
|
|---|
| 5322 | % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
|
|---|
| 5323 |
|
|---|
| 5324 | % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
|
|---|
| 5325 | % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
|
|---|
| 5326 | % overlong headings to fold.
|
|---|
| 5327 | % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
|
|---|
| 5328 | % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
|
|---|
| 5329 | % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
|
|---|
| 5330 | % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
|
|---|
| 5331 |
|
|---|
| 5332 | \def\majorheading{%
|
|---|
| 5333 | {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
|
|---|
| 5334 | \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
|
|---|
| 5335 | }
|
|---|
| 5336 |
|
|---|
| 5337 | \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
|
|---|
| 5338 | \def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
|
|---|
| 5339 | {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|---|
| 5340 | \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
|
|---|
| 5341 | \rmisbold #1\hfill}}%
|
|---|
| 5342 | \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
|
|---|
| 5343 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent
|
|---|
| 5344 | }
|
|---|
| 5345 |
|
|---|
| 5346 | % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
|
|---|
| 5347 | \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
|---|
| 5348 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
|---|
| 5349 | \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
|---|
| 5350 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
|---|
| 5351 | \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
|---|
| 5352 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
|---|
| 5353 |
|
|---|
| 5354 | % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
|
|---|
| 5355 | % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
|
|---|
| 5356 | % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
|
|---|
| 5357 |
|
|---|
| 5358 | %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
|
|---|
| 5359 | \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
|
|---|
| 5360 |
|
|---|
| 5361 | %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
|
|---|
| 5362 | % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
|
|---|
| 5363 |
|
|---|
| 5364 | \newskip\chapheadingskip
|
|---|
| 5365 |
|
|---|
| 5366 | \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
|
|---|
| 5367 | \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
|---|
| 5368 | % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
|
|---|
| 5369 | % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
|
|---|
| 5370 | % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
|
|---|
| 5371 | \def\chapoddpage{%
|
|---|
| 5372 | \chappager
|
|---|
| 5373 | \ifodd\pageno \else
|
|---|
| 5374 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 5375 | \headingsoff
|
|---|
| 5376 | \null
|
|---|
| 5377 | \chappager
|
|---|
| 5378 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 5379 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5380 | }
|
|---|
| 5381 |
|
|---|
| 5382 | \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
|
|---|
| 5383 |
|
|---|
| 5384 | \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
|
|---|
| 5385 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|---|
| 5386 | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
|
|---|
| 5387 | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
|
|---|
| 5388 |
|
|---|
| 5389 | \def\CHAPPAGon{%
|
|---|
| 5390 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|---|
| 5391 | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
|
|---|
| 5392 | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
|
|---|
| 5393 | \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
|
|---|
| 5394 |
|
|---|
| 5395 | \def\CHAPPAGodd{%
|
|---|
| 5396 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|---|
| 5397 | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
|
|---|
| 5398 | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
|
|---|
| 5399 | \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
|
|---|
| 5400 |
|
|---|
| 5401 | \CHAPPAGon
|
|---|
| 5402 |
|
|---|
| 5403 | % Chapter opening.
|
|---|
| 5404 | %
|
|---|
| 5405 | % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
|
|---|
| 5406 | % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
|
|---|
| 5407 | %
|
|---|
| 5408 | % To test against our argument.
|
|---|
| 5409 | \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
|
|---|
| 5410 | \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
|
|---|
| 5411 | \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
|
|---|
| 5412 | %
|
|---|
| 5413 | \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
|
|---|
| 5414 | % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
|
|---|
| 5415 | \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
|
|---|
| 5416 | \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
|
|---|
| 5417 | \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
|
|---|
| 5418 | \gdef\thissection{}}%
|
|---|
| 5419 | %
|
|---|
| 5420 | \def\temptype{#2}%
|
|---|
| 5421 | \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
|---|
| 5422 | \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
|
|---|
| 5423 | \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
|
|---|
| 5424 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
|---|
| 5425 | \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
|
|---|
| 5426 | \gdef\thischapter{}}%
|
|---|
| 5427 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
|---|
| 5428 | \toks0={#1}%
|
|---|
| 5429 | \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
|
|---|
| 5430 | \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
|
|---|
| 5431 | \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
|
|---|
| 5432 | % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
|
|---|
| 5433 | % commands in some of the translations.
|
|---|
| 5434 | \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
|
|---|
| 5435 | \noexpand\thischapternum:
|
|---|
| 5436 | \noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
|---|
| 5437 | }%
|
|---|
| 5438 | \else
|
|---|
| 5439 | \toks0={#1}%
|
|---|
| 5440 | \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
|
|---|
| 5441 | \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
|
|---|
| 5442 | \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
|
|---|
| 5443 | % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
|
|---|
| 5444 | % commands in some of the translations.
|
|---|
| 5445 | \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
|
|---|
| 5446 | \noexpand\thischapternum:
|
|---|
| 5447 | \noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
|---|
| 5448 | }%
|
|---|
| 5449 | \fi\fi\fi
|
|---|
| 5450 | %
|
|---|
| 5451 | % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
|
|---|
| 5452 | % the preceding space.
|
|---|
| 5453 | \safewhatsit\domark
|
|---|
| 5454 | %
|
|---|
| 5455 | % Insert the chapter heading break.
|
|---|
| 5456 | \pchapsepmacro
|
|---|
| 5457 | %
|
|---|
| 5458 | % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
|
|---|
| 5459 | % between here and the heading.
|
|---|
| 5460 | \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
|
|---|
| 5461 | \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
|
|---|
| 5462 | \domark
|
|---|
| 5463 | %
|
|---|
| 5464 | {%
|
|---|
| 5465 | \chapfonts \rmisbold
|
|---|
| 5466 | %
|
|---|
| 5467 | % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
|
|---|
| 5468 | % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
|
|---|
| 5469 | % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
|
|---|
| 5470 | \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
|
|---|
| 5471 | %
|
|---|
| 5472 | % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
|
|---|
| 5473 | % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
|
|---|
| 5474 | \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
|---|
| 5475 | \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
|---|
| 5476 | \def\toctype{unnchap}%
|
|---|
| 5477 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
|---|
| 5478 | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
|
|---|
| 5479 | \def\toctype{omit}%
|
|---|
| 5480 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
|---|
| 5481 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
|
|---|
| 5482 | \def\toctype{app}%
|
|---|
| 5483 | \else
|
|---|
| 5484 | \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
|
|---|
| 5485 | \def\toctype{numchap}%
|
|---|
| 5486 | \fi\fi\fi
|
|---|
| 5487 | %
|
|---|
| 5488 | % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
|
|---|
| 5489 | % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
|
|---|
| 5490 | % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
|
|---|
| 5491 | \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5492 | %
|
|---|
| 5493 | % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
|
|---|
| 5494 | % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
|
|---|
| 5495 | % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
|
|---|
| 5496 | % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
|
|---|
| 5497 | % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
|
|---|
| 5498 | \donoderef{#2}%
|
|---|
| 5499 | %
|
|---|
| 5500 | % Typeset the actual heading.
|
|---|
| 5501 | \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
|
|---|
| 5502 | \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
|
|---|
| 5503 | \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
|
|---|
| 5504 | \unhbox0 #1\par}%
|
|---|
| 5505 | }%
|
|---|
| 5506 | \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
|
|---|
| 5507 | \nobreak
|
|---|
| 5508 | }
|
|---|
| 5509 |
|
|---|
| 5510 | % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
|
|---|
| 5511 | \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
|---|
| 5512 | \def\centerparameters{%
|
|---|
| 5513 | \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
|
|---|
| 5514 | \leftskip = \rightskip
|
|---|
| 5515 | \parfillskip = 0pt
|
|---|
| 5516 | }
|
|---|
| 5517 |
|
|---|
| 5518 |
|
|---|
| 5519 | % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
|
|---|
| 5520 | % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
|
|---|
| 5521 | %
|
|---|
| 5522 | \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
|
|---|
| 5523 | %
|
|---|
| 5524 | \def\unnchfopen #1{%
|
|---|
| 5525 | \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|---|
| 5526 | \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
|
|---|
| 5527 | \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
|---|
| 5528 | }
|
|---|
| 5529 | \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
|
|---|
| 5530 | \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
|
|---|
| 5531 | \par\penalty 5000 %
|
|---|
| 5532 | }
|
|---|
| 5533 | \def\centerchfopen #1{%
|
|---|
| 5534 | \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|---|
| 5535 | \parindent=0pt
|
|---|
| 5536 | \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
|---|
| 5537 | }
|
|---|
| 5538 | \def\CHAPFopen{%
|
|---|
| 5539 | \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
|
|---|
| 5540 | \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
|
|---|
| 5541 |
|
|---|
| 5542 |
|
|---|
| 5543 | % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
|
|---|
| 5544 | % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
|
|---|
| 5545 | %
|
|---|
| 5546 | \newskip\secheadingskip
|
|---|
| 5547 | \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
|
|---|
| 5548 |
|
|---|
| 5549 | % Subsection titles.
|
|---|
| 5550 | \newskip\subsecheadingskip
|
|---|
| 5551 | \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
|
|---|
| 5552 |
|
|---|
| 5553 | % Subsubsection titles.
|
|---|
| 5554 | \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
|
|---|
| 5555 | \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
|
|---|
| 5556 |
|
|---|
| 5557 |
|
|---|
| 5558 | % Print any size, any type, section title.
|
|---|
| 5559 | %
|
|---|
| 5560 | % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
|
|---|
| 5561 | % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
|
|---|
| 5562 | % section number.
|
|---|
| 5563 | %
|
|---|
| 5564 | \def\seckeyword{sec}
|
|---|
| 5565 | %
|
|---|
| 5566 | \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
|
|---|
| 5567 | {%
|
|---|
| 5568 | % Switch to the right set of fonts.
|
|---|
| 5569 | \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
|
|---|
| 5570 | %
|
|---|
| 5571 | \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
|
|---|
| 5572 | \def\temptype{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5573 | %
|
|---|
| 5574 | % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
|
|---|
| 5575 | \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
|
|---|
| 5576 | \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
|---|
| 5577 | \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
|
|---|
| 5578 | \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
|
|---|
| 5579 | \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
|
|---|
| 5580 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5581 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
|---|
| 5582 | % Don't redefine \thissection.
|
|---|
| 5583 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
|---|
| 5584 | \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
|
|---|
| 5585 | \toks0={#1}%
|
|---|
| 5586 | \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
|
|---|
| 5587 | \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
|
|---|
| 5588 | \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
|
|---|
| 5589 | % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
|
|---|
| 5590 | % commands in some of the translations.
|
|---|
| 5591 | \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
|
|---|
| 5592 | \noexpand\thissectionnum:
|
|---|
| 5593 | \noexpand\thissectionname}%
|
|---|
| 5594 | }%
|
|---|
| 5595 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5596 | \else
|
|---|
| 5597 | \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
|
|---|
| 5598 | \toks0={#1}%
|
|---|
| 5599 | \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
|
|---|
| 5600 | \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
|
|---|
| 5601 | \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
|
|---|
| 5602 | % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
|
|---|
| 5603 | % commands in some of the translations.
|
|---|
| 5604 | \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
|
|---|
| 5605 | \noexpand\thissectionnum:
|
|---|
| 5606 | \noexpand\thissectionname}%
|
|---|
| 5607 | }%
|
|---|
| 5608 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5609 | \fi\fi\fi
|
|---|
| 5610 | %
|
|---|
| 5611 | % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
|
|---|
| 5612 | % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
|
|---|
| 5613 | % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
|
|---|
| 5614 | \par
|
|---|
| 5615 | %
|
|---|
| 5616 | % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
|
|---|
| 5617 | % the preceding space.
|
|---|
| 5618 | \safewhatsit\domark
|
|---|
| 5619 | %
|
|---|
| 5620 | % Insert space above the heading.
|
|---|
| 5621 | \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
|
|---|
| 5622 | %
|
|---|
| 5623 | % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
|
|---|
| 5624 | % between here and the heading.
|
|---|
| 5625 | \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
|
|---|
| 5626 | \domark
|
|---|
| 5627 | %
|
|---|
| 5628 | % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
|
|---|
| 5629 | \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
|---|
| 5630 | \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
|---|
| 5631 | \def\toctype{unn}%
|
|---|
| 5632 | \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
|
|---|
| 5633 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
|---|
| 5634 | % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
|
|---|
| 5635 | % and don't redefine \lastsection.
|
|---|
| 5636 | \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
|---|
| 5637 | \def\toctype{omit}%
|
|---|
| 5638 | \let\sectionlevel=\empty
|
|---|
| 5639 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
|---|
| 5640 | \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
|
|---|
| 5641 | \def\toctype{app}%
|
|---|
| 5642 | \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
|
|---|
| 5643 | \else
|
|---|
| 5644 | \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
|
|---|
| 5645 | \def\toctype{num}%
|
|---|
| 5646 | \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
|
|---|
| 5647 | \fi\fi\fi
|
|---|
| 5648 | %
|
|---|
| 5649 | % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
|
|---|
| 5650 | \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
|
|---|
| 5651 | %
|
|---|
| 5652 | % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
|
|---|
| 5653 | % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
|
|---|
| 5654 | \donoderef{#3}%
|
|---|
| 5655 | %
|
|---|
| 5656 | % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
|
|---|
| 5657 | % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
|
|---|
| 5658 | % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
|
|---|
| 5659 | % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
|
|---|
| 5660 | % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
|
|---|
| 5661 | % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
|
|---|
| 5662 | \nobreak
|
|---|
| 5663 | %
|
|---|
| 5664 | % Output the actual section heading.
|
|---|
| 5665 | \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
|
|---|
| 5666 | \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
|
|---|
| 5667 | \unhbox0 #1}%
|
|---|
| 5668 | }%
|
|---|
| 5669 | % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
|
|---|
| 5670 | % Don't allow stretch, though.
|
|---|
| 5671 | \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
|
|---|
| 5672 | %
|
|---|
| 5673 | % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
|
|---|
| 5674 | % was followed by glue.
|
|---|
| 5675 | \nobreak
|
|---|
| 5676 | %
|
|---|
| 5677 | % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
|
|---|
| 5678 | % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
|
|---|
| 5679 | % discardable item.)
|
|---|
| 5680 | \vskip-\parskip
|
|---|
| 5681 | %
|
|---|
| 5682 | % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
|
|---|
| 5683 | % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
|
|---|
| 5684 | % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
|
|---|
| 5685 | %
|
|---|
| 5686 | % @section sec-whatever
|
|---|
| 5687 | % @deffn def-whatever
|
|---|
| 5688 | \penalty 10001
|
|---|
| 5689 | }
|
|---|
| 5690 |
|
|---|
| 5691 |
|
|---|
| 5692 | \message{toc,}
|
|---|
| 5693 | % Table of contents.
|
|---|
| 5694 | \newwrite\tocfile
|
|---|
| 5695 |
|
|---|
| 5696 | % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
|
|---|
| 5697 | % Called from @chapter, etc.
|
|---|
| 5698 | %
|
|---|
| 5699 | % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
|
|---|
| 5700 | % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
|
|---|
| 5701 | % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
|
|---|
| 5702 | % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
|
|---|
| 5703 | % destination to jump to.
|
|---|
| 5704 | %
|
|---|
| 5705 | % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
|
|---|
| 5706 | % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
|
|---|
| 5707 | % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
|
|---|
| 5708 | % table of contents chapter openings themselves.
|
|---|
| 5709 | %
|
|---|
| 5710 | \newif\iftocfileopened
|
|---|
| 5711 | \def\omitkeyword{omit}%
|
|---|
| 5712 | %
|
|---|
| 5713 | \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
|
|---|
| 5714 | \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
|
|---|
| 5715 | \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
|
|---|
| 5716 | \iftocfileopened\else
|
|---|
| 5717 | \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
|
|---|
| 5718 | \global\tocfileopenedtrue
|
|---|
| 5719 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5720 | %
|
|---|
| 5721 | \iflinks
|
|---|
| 5722 | {\atdummies
|
|---|
| 5723 | \edef\temp{%
|
|---|
| 5724 | \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|---|
| 5725 | \temp
|
|---|
| 5726 | }%
|
|---|
| 5727 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5728 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5729 | %
|
|---|
| 5730 | % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
|
|---|
| 5731 | % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
|
|---|
| 5732 | % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
|
|---|
| 5733 | % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
|
|---|
| 5734 | % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
|
|---|
| 5735 | % `1', and two named `2'.
|
|---|
| 5736 | \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
|
|---|
| 5737 | }
|
|---|
| 5738 |
|
|---|
| 5739 |
|
|---|
| 5740 | % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
|
|---|
| 5741 | % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
|
|---|
| 5742 | % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
|
|---|
| 5743 | %
|
|---|
| 5744 | \def\activecatcodes{%
|
|---|
| 5745 | \catcode`\"=\active
|
|---|
| 5746 | \catcode`\$=\active
|
|---|
| 5747 | \catcode`\<=\active
|
|---|
| 5748 | \catcode`\>=\active
|
|---|
| 5749 | \catcode`\\=\active
|
|---|
| 5750 | \catcode`\^=\active
|
|---|
| 5751 | \catcode`\_=\active
|
|---|
| 5752 | \catcode`\|=\active
|
|---|
| 5753 | \catcode`\~=\active
|
|---|
| 5754 | }
|
|---|
| 5755 |
|
|---|
| 5756 |
|
|---|
| 5757 | % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
|
|---|
| 5758 | \def\readtocfile{%
|
|---|
| 5759 | \setupdatafile
|
|---|
| 5760 | \activecatcodes
|
|---|
| 5761 | \input \tocreadfilename
|
|---|
| 5762 | }
|
|---|
| 5763 |
|
|---|
| 5764 | \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
|
|---|
| 5765 | \newcount\savepageno
|
|---|
| 5766 | \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
|
|---|
| 5767 |
|
|---|
| 5768 | % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
|
|---|
| 5769 | %
|
|---|
| 5770 | \def\startcontents#1{%
|
|---|
| 5771 | % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
|
|---|
| 5772 | % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
|
|---|
| 5773 | % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
|
|---|
| 5774 | % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
|
|---|
| 5775 | \contentsalignmacro
|
|---|
| 5776 | \immediate\closeout\tocfile
|
|---|
| 5777 | %
|
|---|
| 5778 | % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
|
|---|
| 5779 | % It is abundantly clear what they are.
|
|---|
| 5780 | \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
|
|---|
| 5781 | %
|
|---|
| 5782 | \savepageno = \pageno
|
|---|
| 5783 | \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
|
|---|
| 5784 | \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
|
|---|
| 5785 | \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
|
|---|
| 5786 | %
|
|---|
| 5787 | % Roman numerals for page numbers.
|
|---|
| 5788 | \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
|
|---|
| 5789 | }
|
|---|
| 5790 |
|
|---|
| 5791 | % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
|
|---|
| 5792 | % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
|
|---|
| 5793 | %
|
|---|
| 5794 | \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
|
|---|
| 5795 |
|
|---|
| 5796 | % Normal (long) toc.
|
|---|
| 5797 | %
|
|---|
| 5798 | \def\contents{%
|
|---|
| 5799 | \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
|
|---|
| 5800 | \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
|
|---|
| 5801 | \ifeof 1 \else
|
|---|
| 5802 | \readtocfile
|
|---|
| 5803 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5804 | \vfill \eject
|
|---|
| 5805 | \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
|---|
| 5806 | \ifeof 1 \else
|
|---|
| 5807 | \pdfmakeoutlines
|
|---|
| 5808 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5809 | \closein 1
|
|---|
| 5810 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 5811 | \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
|---|
| 5812 | \global\pageno = \savepageno
|
|---|
| 5813 | }
|
|---|
| 5814 |
|
|---|
| 5815 | % And just the chapters.
|
|---|
| 5816 | \def\summarycontents{%
|
|---|
| 5817 | \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
|
|---|
| 5818 | %
|
|---|
| 5819 | \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
|
|---|
| 5820 | \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
|
|---|
| 5821 | \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
|
|---|
| 5822 | \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
|
|---|
| 5823 | % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
|
|---|
| 5824 | \secfonts
|
|---|
| 5825 | \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
|
|---|
| 5826 | \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
|
|---|
| 5827 | \rm
|
|---|
| 5828 | \hyphenpenalty = 10000
|
|---|
| 5829 | \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
|
|---|
| 5830 | \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
|
|---|
| 5831 | \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|---|
| 5832 | \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|---|
| 5833 | \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|---|
| 5834 | \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|---|
| 5835 | \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|---|
| 5836 | \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|---|
| 5837 | \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|---|
| 5838 | \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|---|
| 5839 | \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
|
|---|
| 5840 | \ifeof 1 \else
|
|---|
| 5841 | \readtocfile
|
|---|
| 5842 | \fi
|
|---|
| 5843 | \closein 1
|
|---|
| 5844 | \vfill \eject
|
|---|
| 5845 | \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
|---|
| 5846 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 5847 | \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
|---|
| 5848 | \global\pageno = \savepageno
|
|---|
| 5849 | }
|
|---|
| 5850 | \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
|
|---|
| 5851 |
|
|---|
| 5852 | % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
|
|---|
| 5853 | % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
|
|---|
| 5854 | %
|
|---|
| 5855 | \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
|
|---|
| 5856 | % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
|
|---|
| 5857 | % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
|
|---|
| 5858 | % But use \hss just in case.
|
|---|
| 5859 | % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
|
|---|
| 5860 | % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
|
|---|
| 5861 | %
|
|---|
| 5862 | % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
|
|---|
| 5863 | % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
|
|---|
| 5864 | % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
|
|---|
| 5865 | % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
|
|---|
| 5866 | % there are before deciding ...
|
|---|
| 5867 | \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
|
|---|
| 5868 | }
|
|---|
| 5869 |
|
|---|
| 5870 | % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
|
|---|
| 5871 | % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
|
|---|
| 5872 | % The last argument is the page number.
|
|---|
| 5873 | % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
|
|---|
| 5874 |
|
|---|
| 5875 | % Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't
|
|---|
| 5876 | % exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
|
|---|
| 5877 | % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
|
|---|
| 5878 | \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
|
|---|
| 5879 | \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}}
|
|---|
| 5880 | %
|
|---|
| 5881 | % Parts, in the short toc.
|
|---|
| 5882 | \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
|
|---|
| 5883 | \penalty-300
|
|---|
| 5884 | \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
|
|---|
| 5885 | \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
|
|---|
| 5886 | }
|
|---|
| 5887 |
|
|---|
| 5888 | % Chapters, in the main contents.
|
|---|
| 5889 | \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
|---|
| 5890 | %
|
|---|
| 5891 | % Chapters, in the short toc.
|
|---|
| 5892 | % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
|
|---|
| 5893 | \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
|
|---|
| 5894 | \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
|
|---|
| 5895 | }
|
|---|
| 5896 |
|
|---|
| 5897 | % Appendices, in the main contents.
|
|---|
| 5898 | % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
|
|---|
| 5899 | %
|
|---|
| 5900 | \def\appendixbox#1{%
|
|---|
| 5901 | % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
|
|---|
| 5902 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
|
|---|
| 5903 | \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
|
|---|
| 5904 | %
|
|---|
| 5905 | \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
|---|
| 5906 |
|
|---|
| 5907 | % Unnumbered chapters.
|
|---|
| 5908 | \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
|
|---|
| 5909 | \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
|
|---|
| 5910 |
|
|---|
| 5911 | % Sections.
|
|---|
| 5912 | \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
|---|
| 5913 | \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
|
|---|
| 5914 | \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
|---|
| 5915 |
|
|---|
| 5916 | % Subsections.
|
|---|
| 5917 | \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
|---|
| 5918 | \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
|
|---|
| 5919 | \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
|---|
| 5920 |
|
|---|
| 5921 | % And subsubsections.
|
|---|
| 5922 | \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
|---|
| 5923 | \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
|
|---|
| 5924 | \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
|---|
| 5925 |
|
|---|
| 5926 | % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
|
|---|
| 5927 | % Same as \defaultparindent.
|
|---|
| 5928 | \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
|
|---|
| 5929 |
|
|---|
| 5930 | % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
|
|---|
| 5931 | % page number.
|
|---|
| 5932 | %
|
|---|
| 5933 | % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
|
|---|
| 5934 | % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
|
|---|
| 5935 | \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 5936 | \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
|
|---|
| 5937 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 5938 | \chapentryfonts
|
|---|
| 5939 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
|---|
| 5940 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 5941 | \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
|
|---|
| 5942 | }
|
|---|
| 5943 |
|
|---|
| 5944 | \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|---|
| 5945 | \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
|
|---|
| 5946 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
|---|
| 5947 | \endgroup}
|
|---|
| 5948 |
|
|---|
| 5949 | \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|---|
| 5950 | \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
|
|---|
| 5951 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
|---|
| 5952 | \endgroup}
|
|---|
| 5953 |
|
|---|
| 5954 | \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|---|
| 5955 | \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
|
|---|
| 5956 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
|---|
| 5957 | \endgroup}
|
|---|
| 5958 |
|
|---|
| 5959 | % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
|
|---|
| 5960 | \let\tocentry = \entry
|
|---|
| 5961 |
|
|---|
| 5962 | % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
|
|---|
| 5963 | \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
|
|---|
| 5964 |
|
|---|
| 5965 | \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
|---|
| 5966 | \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
|---|
| 5967 |
|
|---|
| 5968 | \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
|
|---|
| 5969 | \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
|---|
| 5970 | \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
|---|
| 5971 | \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
|---|
| 5972 |
|
|---|
| 5973 |
|
|---|
| 5974 | \message{environments,}
|
|---|
| 5975 | % @foo ... @end foo.
|
|---|
| 5976 |
|
|---|
| 5977 | % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
|
|---|
| 5978 | % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
|
|---|
| 5979 | % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
|
|---|
| 5980 |
|
|---|
| 5981 | \envdef\tex{%
|
|---|
| 5982 | \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
|
|---|
| 5983 | \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
|
|---|
| 5984 | \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
|
|---|
| 5985 | \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
|
|---|
| 5986 | \catcode `\%=14
|
|---|
| 5987 | \catcode `\+=\other
|
|---|
| 5988 | \catcode `\"=\other
|
|---|
| 5989 | \catcode `\|=\other
|
|---|
| 5990 | \catcode `\<=\other
|
|---|
| 5991 | \catcode `\>=\other
|
|---|
| 5992 | \catcode`\`=\other
|
|---|
| 5993 | \catcode`\'=\other
|
|---|
| 5994 | \escapechar=`\\
|
|---|
| 5995 | %
|
|---|
| 5996 | % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our
|
|---|
| 5997 | % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
|
|---|
| 5998 | \mathactive
|
|---|
| 5999 | %
|
|---|
| 6000 | \let\b=\ptexb
|
|---|
| 6001 | \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
|
|---|
| 6002 | \let\c=\ptexc
|
|---|
| 6003 | \let\,=\ptexcomma
|
|---|
| 6004 | \let\.=\ptexdot
|
|---|
| 6005 | \let\dots=\ptexdots
|
|---|
| 6006 | \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
|
|---|
| 6007 | \let\!=\ptexexclam
|
|---|
| 6008 | \let\i=\ptexi
|
|---|
| 6009 | \let\indent=\ptexindent
|
|---|
| 6010 | \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
|
|---|
| 6011 | \let\{=\ptexlbrace
|
|---|
| 6012 | \let\+=\tabalign
|
|---|
| 6013 | \let\}=\ptexrbrace
|
|---|
| 6014 | \let\/=\ptexslash
|
|---|
| 6015 | \let\*=\ptexstar
|
|---|
| 6016 | \let\t=\ptext
|
|---|
| 6017 | \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer
|
|---|
| 6018 | \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
|
|---|
| 6019 | %
|
|---|
| 6020 | \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
|
|---|
| 6021 | \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
|
|---|
| 6022 | \def\@{@}%
|
|---|
| 6023 | }
|
|---|
| 6024 | % There is no need to define \Etex.
|
|---|
| 6025 |
|
|---|
| 6026 | % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
|
|---|
| 6027 | % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
|
|---|
| 6028 | % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
|
|---|
| 6029 |
|
|---|
| 6030 | % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
|
|---|
| 6031 | \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
|
|---|
| 6032 |
|
|---|
| 6033 | % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
|
|---|
| 6034 | % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
|
|---|
| 6035 | % have any width.
|
|---|
| 6036 | \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
|
|---|
| 6037 |
|
|---|
| 6038 | % This space is always present above and below environments.
|
|---|
| 6039 | \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
|
|---|
| 6040 |
|
|---|
| 6041 | % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
|
|---|
| 6042 | % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
|
|---|
| 6043 | % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
|
|---|
| 6044 | % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
|
|---|
| 6045 | %
|
|---|
| 6046 | \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
|
|---|
| 6047 | % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
|
|---|
| 6048 | % \sectionheading, q.v.
|
|---|
| 6049 | \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
|
|---|
| 6050 | \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
|
|---|
| 6051 | \endgraf
|
|---|
| 6052 | \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
|
|---|
| 6053 | \removelastskip
|
|---|
| 6054 | % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
|
|---|
| 6055 | % or better ...
|
|---|
| 6056 | \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
|
|---|
| 6057 | \vskip\envskipamount
|
|---|
| 6058 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6059 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6060 | }}
|
|---|
| 6061 |
|
|---|
| 6062 | \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
|
|---|
| 6063 |
|
|---|
| 6064 | % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
|
|---|
| 6065 | % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
|
|---|
| 6066 | \let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
|---|
| 6067 |
|
|---|
| 6068 | % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
|
|---|
| 6069 | % environment contents.
|
|---|
| 6070 | \font\circle=lcircle10
|
|---|
| 6071 | \newdimen\circthick
|
|---|
| 6072 | \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
|
|---|
| 6073 | \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
|
|---|
| 6074 | \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
|
|---|
| 6075 | %
|
|---|
| 6076 | \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
|
|---|
| 6077 | \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
|
|---|
| 6078 | \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
|
|---|
| 6079 | \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
|
|---|
| 6080 | \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
|---|
| 6081 | \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
|
|---|
| 6082 | \hskip\rskip}}
|
|---|
| 6083 | \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
|---|
| 6084 | \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
|
|---|
| 6085 | \hskip\rskip}}
|
|---|
| 6086 | %
|
|---|
| 6087 | \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
|
|---|
| 6088 |
|
|---|
| 6089 | \envdef\cartouche{%
|
|---|
| 6090 | \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
|
|---|
| 6091 | \startsavinginserts
|
|---|
| 6092 | \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
|
|---|
| 6093 | \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
|
|---|
| 6094 | \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
|
|---|
| 6095 | \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
|
|---|
| 6096 | \cartouter=\hsize
|
|---|
| 6097 | \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
|
|---|
| 6098 | % side, and for 6pt waste from
|
|---|
| 6099 | % each corner char, and rule thickness
|
|---|
| 6100 | \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
|
|---|
| 6101 | % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
|
|---|
| 6102 | \let\nonarrowing = t%
|
|---|
| 6103 | \vbox\bgroup
|
|---|
| 6104 | \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
|
|---|
| 6105 | \carttop
|
|---|
| 6106 | \hbox\bgroup
|
|---|
| 6107 | \hskip\lskip
|
|---|
| 6108 | \vrule\kern3pt
|
|---|
| 6109 | \vbox\bgroup
|
|---|
| 6110 | \kern3pt
|
|---|
| 6111 | \hsize=\cartinner
|
|---|
| 6112 | \baselineskip=\normbskip
|
|---|
| 6113 | \lineskip=\normlskip
|
|---|
| 6114 | \parskip=\normpskip
|
|---|
| 6115 | \vskip -\parskip
|
|---|
| 6116 | \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
|
|---|
| 6117 | }
|
|---|
| 6118 | \def\Ecartouche{%
|
|---|
| 6119 | \ifhmode\par\fi
|
|---|
| 6120 | \kern3pt
|
|---|
| 6121 | \egroup
|
|---|
| 6122 | \kern3pt\vrule
|
|---|
| 6123 | \hskip\rskip
|
|---|
| 6124 | \egroup
|
|---|
| 6125 | \cartbot
|
|---|
| 6126 | \egroup
|
|---|
| 6127 | \checkinserts
|
|---|
| 6128 | }
|
|---|
| 6129 |
|
|---|
| 6130 |
|
|---|
| 6131 | % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
|
|---|
| 6132 | % inside a group.
|
|---|
| 6133 | \newdimen\nonfillparindent
|
|---|
| 6134 | \def\nonfillstart{%
|
|---|
| 6135 | \aboveenvbreak
|
|---|
| 6136 | \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
|
|---|
| 6137 | \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
|
|---|
| 6138 | \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
|
|---|
| 6139 | \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
|
|---|
| 6140 | \parskip = 0pt
|
|---|
| 6141 | % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
|
|---|
| 6142 | % the normal \indent.
|
|---|
| 6143 | \nonfillparindent=\parindent
|
|---|
| 6144 | \parindent = 0pt
|
|---|
| 6145 | \let\indent\nonfillindent
|
|---|
| 6146 | %
|
|---|
| 6147 | \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
|
|---|
| 6148 | \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
|---|
| 6149 | \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
|---|
| 6150 | \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
|
|---|
| 6151 | \else
|
|---|
| 6152 | \let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
|---|
| 6153 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6154 | \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
|
|---|
| 6155 | }
|
|---|
| 6156 |
|
|---|
| 6157 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 6158 | \obeyspaces
|
|---|
| 6159 | % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
|
|---|
| 6160 | % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
|
|---|
| 6161 | % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
|
|---|
| 6162 | % @indent.
|
|---|
| 6163 | \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
|
|---|
| 6164 | \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
|
|---|
| 6165 | \ifx\temp %
|
|---|
| 6166 | \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
|
|---|
| 6167 | \else%
|
|---|
| 6168 | \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
|
|---|
| 6169 | \fi%
|
|---|
| 6170 | }%
|
|---|
| 6171 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 6172 | \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
|
|---|
| 6173 | \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
|
|---|
| 6174 |
|
|---|
| 6175 | % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
|
|---|
| 6176 | % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
|
|---|
| 6177 | % This affects the following displayed environments:
|
|---|
| 6178 | % @example, @display, @format, @lisp
|
|---|
| 6179 | %
|
|---|
| 6180 | \def\smallword{small}
|
|---|
| 6181 | \def\nosmallword{nosmall}
|
|---|
| 6182 | \let\SETdispenvsize\relax
|
|---|
| 6183 | \def\setnormaldispenv{%
|
|---|
| 6184 | \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
|
|---|
| 6185 | % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
|
|---|
| 6186 | % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
|
|---|
| 6187 | % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
|
|---|
| 6188 | % to change the fonts afterward.
|
|---|
| 6189 | \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
|
|---|
| 6190 | \smallexamplefonts \rm
|
|---|
| 6191 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6192 | }
|
|---|
| 6193 | \def\setsmalldispenv{%
|
|---|
| 6194 | \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
|
|---|
| 6195 | \else
|
|---|
| 6196 | \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
|
|---|
| 6197 | \smallexamplefonts \rm
|
|---|
| 6198 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6199 | }
|
|---|
| 6200 |
|
|---|
| 6201 | % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
|
|---|
| 6202 | % Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
|
|---|
| 6203 | \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 6204 | \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
|
|---|
| 6205 | \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
|
|---|
| 6206 | \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
|
|---|
| 6207 | \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
|
|---|
| 6208 | }
|
|---|
| 6209 |
|
|---|
| 6210 | % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
|
|---|
| 6211 | \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
|
|---|
| 6212 | \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
|
|---|
| 6213 | \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
|
|---|
| 6214 | }
|
|---|
| 6215 | %
|
|---|
| 6216 | % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
|
|---|
| 6217 | % @example: same as @lisp.
|
|---|
| 6218 | %
|
|---|
| 6219 | % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
|
|---|
| 6220 | % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
|
|---|
| 6221 | %
|
|---|
| 6222 | \maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
|
|---|
| 6223 | \nonfillstart
|
|---|
| 6224 | \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
|
|---|
| 6225 | \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
|
|---|
| 6226 | \gobble % eat return
|
|---|
| 6227 | }
|
|---|
| 6228 | % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
|
|---|
| 6229 | %
|
|---|
| 6230 | \makedispenvdef{display}{%
|
|---|
| 6231 | \nonfillstart
|
|---|
| 6232 | \gobble
|
|---|
| 6233 | }
|
|---|
| 6234 |
|
|---|
| 6235 | % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
|
|---|
| 6236 | %
|
|---|
| 6237 | \makedispenvdef{format}{%
|
|---|
| 6238 | \let\nonarrowing = t%
|
|---|
| 6239 | \nonfillstart
|
|---|
| 6240 | \gobble
|
|---|
| 6241 | }
|
|---|
| 6242 |
|
|---|
| 6243 | % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
|
|---|
| 6244 | \envdef\flushleft{%
|
|---|
| 6245 | \let\nonarrowing = t%
|
|---|
| 6246 | \nonfillstart
|
|---|
| 6247 | \gobble
|
|---|
| 6248 | }
|
|---|
| 6249 | \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
|
|---|
| 6250 |
|
|---|
| 6251 | % @flushright.
|
|---|
| 6252 | %
|
|---|
| 6253 | \envdef\flushright{%
|
|---|
| 6254 | \let\nonarrowing = t%
|
|---|
| 6255 | \nonfillstart
|
|---|
| 6256 | \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
|
|---|
| 6257 | \gobble
|
|---|
| 6258 | }
|
|---|
| 6259 | \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
|
|---|
| 6260 |
|
|---|
| 6261 |
|
|---|
| 6262 | % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
|
|---|
| 6263 | % justification. From plain.tex.
|
|---|
| 6264 | \envdef\raggedright{%
|
|---|
| 6265 | \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
|
|---|
| 6266 | }
|
|---|
| 6267 | \let\Eraggedright\par
|
|---|
| 6268 |
|
|---|
| 6269 | \envdef\raggedleft{%
|
|---|
| 6270 | \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
|
|---|
| 6271 | \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
|
|---|
| 6272 | \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
|
|---|
| 6273 | % badness reporting.
|
|---|
| 6274 | }
|
|---|
| 6275 | \let\Eraggedleft\par
|
|---|
| 6276 |
|
|---|
| 6277 | \envdef\raggedcenter{%
|
|---|
| 6278 | \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
|
|---|
| 6279 | \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
|
|---|
| 6280 | \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
|
|---|
| 6281 | % badness reporting.
|
|---|
| 6282 | }
|
|---|
| 6283 | \let\Eraggedcenter\par
|
|---|
| 6284 |
|
|---|
| 6285 |
|
|---|
| 6286 | % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
|
|---|
| 6287 | % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
|
|---|
| 6288 | % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
|
|---|
| 6289 | % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
|
|---|
| 6290 | %
|
|---|
| 6291 | \makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
|
|---|
| 6292 | %
|
|---|
| 6293 | \def\quotationstart{%
|
|---|
| 6294 | {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
|
|---|
| 6295 | \parindent=0pt
|
|---|
| 6296 | %
|
|---|
| 6297 | % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
|
|---|
| 6298 | \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
|---|
| 6299 | \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
|---|
| 6300 | \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
|
|---|
| 6301 | \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
|
|---|
| 6302 | \else
|
|---|
| 6303 | \let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
|---|
| 6304 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6305 | \parsearg\quotationlabel
|
|---|
| 6306 | }
|
|---|
| 6307 |
|
|---|
| 6308 | % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
|
|---|
| 6309 | % doing normal filling.
|
|---|
| 6310 | %
|
|---|
| 6311 | \def\Equotation{%
|
|---|
| 6312 | \par
|
|---|
| 6313 | \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
|
|---|
| 6314 | % indent a bit.
|
|---|
| 6315 | \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
|
|---|
| 6316 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6317 | {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
|
|---|
| 6318 | }
|
|---|
| 6319 | \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
|
|---|
| 6320 |
|
|---|
| 6321 | % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
|
|---|
| 6322 | \def\quotationlabel#1{%
|
|---|
| 6323 | \def\temp{#1}%
|
|---|
| 6324 | \ifx\temp\empty \else
|
|---|
| 6325 | {\bf #1: }%
|
|---|
| 6326 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6327 | }
|
|---|
| 6328 |
|
|---|
| 6329 |
|
|---|
| 6330 | % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
|
|---|
| 6331 | % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
|
|---|
| 6332 | % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
|
|---|
| 6333 | % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
|
|---|
| 6334 | %
|
|---|
| 6335 | % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
|
|---|
| 6336 | %
|
|---|
| 6337 | % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
|
|---|
| 6338 | % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
|
|---|
| 6339 | % verbatim line.
|
|---|
| 6340 | \def\dospecials{%
|
|---|
| 6341 | \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
|
|---|
| 6342 | \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
|
|---|
| 6343 | \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
|
|---|
| 6344 | % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
|
|---|
| 6345 | % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
|
|---|
| 6346 | % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
|
|---|
| 6347 | %\do\`\do\'%
|
|---|
| 6348 | }
|
|---|
| 6349 | %
|
|---|
| 6350 | % [Knuth] p. 380
|
|---|
| 6351 | \def\uncatcodespecials{%
|
|---|
| 6352 | \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
|
|---|
| 6353 | %
|
|---|
| 6354 | % Setup for the @verb command.
|
|---|
| 6355 | %
|
|---|
| 6356 | % Eight spaces for a tab
|
|---|
| 6357 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 6358 | \catcode`\^^I=\active
|
|---|
| 6359 | \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
|
|---|
| 6360 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 6361 | %
|
|---|
| 6362 | \def\setupverb{%
|
|---|
| 6363 | \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
|
|---|
| 6364 | \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
|
|---|
| 6365 | \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
|
|---|
| 6366 | \tabeightspaces
|
|---|
| 6367 | % Respect line breaks,
|
|---|
| 6368 | % print special symbols as themselves, and
|
|---|
| 6369 | % make each space count
|
|---|
| 6370 | % must do in this order:
|
|---|
| 6371 | \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
|
|---|
| 6372 | }
|
|---|
| 6373 |
|
|---|
| 6374 | % Setup for the @verbatim environment
|
|---|
| 6375 | %
|
|---|
| 6376 | % Real tab expansion
|
|---|
| 6377 | \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
|
|---|
| 6378 | %
|
|---|
| 6379 | \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
|
|---|
| 6380 | %
|
|---|
| 6381 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 6382 | \catcode`\^^I=\active
|
|---|
| 6383 | \gdef\tabexpand{%
|
|---|
| 6384 | \catcode`\^^I=\active
|
|---|
| 6385 | \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
|
|---|
| 6386 | \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
|
|---|
| 6387 | \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
|
|---|
| 6388 | \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
|
|---|
| 6389 | \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
|
|---|
| 6390 | \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
|
|---|
| 6391 | }%
|
|---|
| 6392 | }
|
|---|
| 6393 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 6394 |
|
|---|
| 6395 | % start the verbatim environment.
|
|---|
| 6396 | \def\setupverbatim{%
|
|---|
| 6397 | \let\nonarrowing = t%
|
|---|
| 6398 | \nonfillstart
|
|---|
| 6399 | % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
|
|---|
| 6400 | \tt
|
|---|
| 6401 | \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
|
|---|
| 6402 | \tabexpand
|
|---|
| 6403 | \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
|
|---|
| 6404 | % Respect line breaks,
|
|---|
| 6405 | % print special symbols as themselves, and
|
|---|
| 6406 | % make each space count
|
|---|
| 6407 | % must do in this order:
|
|---|
| 6408 | \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
|
|---|
| 6409 | \everypar{\starttabbox}%
|
|---|
| 6410 | }
|
|---|
| 6411 |
|
|---|
| 6412 | % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
|
|---|
| 6413 | % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
|
|---|
| 6414 | % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
|
|---|
| 6415 | %
|
|---|
| 6416 | % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
|
|---|
| 6417 | %
|
|---|
| 6418 | % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
|
|---|
| 6419 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 6420 | \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
|
|---|
| 6421 | \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
|
|---|
| 6422 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 6423 | %
|
|---|
| 6424 | \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
|
|---|
| 6425 | %
|
|---|
| 6426 | %
|
|---|
| 6427 | % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
|
|---|
| 6428 | % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
|
|---|
| 6429 | %
|
|---|
| 6430 | % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
|
|---|
| 6431 | %
|
|---|
| 6432 | % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
|
|---|
| 6433 | % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
|
|---|
| 6434 | % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
|
|---|
| 6435 | %
|
|---|
| 6436 | % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
|
|---|
| 6437 | %
|
|---|
| 6438 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 6439 | \catcode`\ =\active
|
|---|
| 6440 | \obeylines %
|
|---|
| 6441 | % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
|
|---|
| 6442 | % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
|
|---|
| 6443 | % line in the output.
|
|---|
| 6444 | \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
|
|---|
| 6445 | % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
|
|---|
| 6446 | % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
|
|---|
| 6447 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 6448 | %
|
|---|
| 6449 | \envdef\verbatim{%
|
|---|
| 6450 | \setupverbatim\doverbatim
|
|---|
| 6451 | }
|
|---|
| 6452 | \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
|
|---|
| 6453 |
|
|---|
| 6454 |
|
|---|
| 6455 | % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
|
|---|
| 6456 | %
|
|---|
| 6457 | \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
|
|---|
| 6458 | %
|
|---|
| 6459 | \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
|
|---|
| 6460 | {%
|
|---|
| 6461 | \makevalueexpandable
|
|---|
| 6462 | \setupverbatim
|
|---|
| 6463 | \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
|
|---|
| 6464 | \input #1
|
|---|
| 6465 | \afterenvbreak
|
|---|
| 6466 | }%
|
|---|
| 6467 | }
|
|---|
| 6468 |
|
|---|
| 6469 | % @copying ... @end copying.
|
|---|
| 6470 | % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
|
|---|
| 6471 | %
|
|---|
| 6472 | % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
|
|---|
| 6473 | % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
|
|---|
| 6474 | % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
|
|---|
| 6475 | % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
|
|---|
| 6476 | % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
|
|---|
| 6477 | % possible is very desirable.
|
|---|
| 6478 | %
|
|---|
| 6479 | \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
|
|---|
| 6480 | \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
|
|---|
| 6481 | %
|
|---|
| 6482 | \def\insertcopying{%
|
|---|
| 6483 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 6484 | \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
|
|---|
| 6485 | \scanexp\copyingtext
|
|---|
| 6486 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 6487 | }
|
|---|
| 6488 |
|
|---|
| 6489 |
|
|---|
| 6490 | \message{defuns,}
|
|---|
| 6491 | % @defun etc.
|
|---|
| 6492 |
|
|---|
| 6493 | \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
|
|---|
| 6494 | \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
|
|---|
| 6495 | \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
|
|---|
| 6496 | \newcount\defunpenalty
|
|---|
| 6497 |
|
|---|
| 6498 | % Start the processing of @deffn:
|
|---|
| 6499 | \def\startdefun{%
|
|---|
| 6500 | \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
|
|---|
| 6501 | \medbreak
|
|---|
| 6502 | \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
|
|---|
| 6503 | % following @def command, see below.
|
|---|
| 6504 | \else
|
|---|
| 6505 | % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
|
|---|
| 6506 | % which is there to keep the function description together with its
|
|---|
| 6507 | % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
|
|---|
| 6508 | % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
|
|---|
| 6509 | % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
|
|---|
| 6510 | % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
|
|---|
| 6511 | % a break between a section heading and a defun.
|
|---|
| 6512 | %
|
|---|
| 6513 | % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
|
|---|
| 6514 | % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
|
|---|
| 6515 | % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
|
|---|
| 6516 | % @def command.
|
|---|
| 6517 | \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
|
|---|
| 6518 | %
|
|---|
| 6519 | % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
|
|---|
| 6520 | % But do insert the glue.
|
|---|
| 6521 | \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
|
|---|
| 6522 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6523 | %
|
|---|
| 6524 | \parindent=0in
|
|---|
| 6525 | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
|---|
| 6526 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|---|
| 6527 | }
|
|---|
| 6528 |
|
|---|
| 6529 | \def\dodefunx#1{%
|
|---|
| 6530 | % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
|
|---|
| 6531 | \checkenv#1%
|
|---|
| 6532 | %
|
|---|
| 6533 | % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
|
|---|
| 6534 | % It's not a great place, though.
|
|---|
| 6535 | \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
|
|---|
| 6536 | %
|
|---|
| 6537 | % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
|
|---|
| 6538 | \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
|
|---|
| 6539 | }
|
|---|
| 6540 | \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
|
|---|
| 6541 |
|
|---|
| 6542 | % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
|
|---|
| 6543 | %
|
|---|
| 6544 | \def\printdefunline#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 6545 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 6546 | % call \deffnheader:
|
|---|
| 6547 | #1#2 \endheader
|
|---|
| 6548 | % common ending:
|
|---|
| 6549 | \interlinepenalty = 10000
|
|---|
| 6550 | \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
|
|---|
| 6551 | \endgraf
|
|---|
| 6552 | \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
|
|---|
| 6553 | \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
|
|---|
| 6554 | % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
|
|---|
| 6555 | % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
|
|---|
| 6556 | \checkparencounts
|
|---|
| 6557 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 6558 | }
|
|---|
| 6559 |
|
|---|
| 6560 | \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
|
|---|
| 6561 |
|
|---|
| 6562 | % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
|
|---|
| 6563 | % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
|
|---|
| 6564 | %
|
|---|
| 6565 | \def\makedefun#1{%
|
|---|
| 6566 | \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
|
|---|
| 6567 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
|
|---|
| 6568 | \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
|
|---|
| 6569 | \temp
|
|---|
| 6570 | }
|
|---|
| 6571 |
|
|---|
| 6572 | % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
|
|---|
| 6573 | %
|
|---|
| 6574 | % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
|
|---|
| 6575 | % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
|
|---|
| 6576 | %
|
|---|
| 6577 | \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
|
|---|
| 6578 | \envdef#1{%
|
|---|
| 6579 | \startdefun
|
|---|
| 6580 | \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
|
|---|
| 6581 | }%
|
|---|
| 6582 | \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
|
|---|
| 6583 | \def#3%
|
|---|
| 6584 | }
|
|---|
| 6585 |
|
|---|
| 6586 | %%% Untyped functions:
|
|---|
| 6587 |
|
|---|
| 6588 | % @deffn category name args
|
|---|
| 6589 | \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
|
|---|
| 6590 |
|
|---|
| 6591 | % @deffn category class name args
|
|---|
| 6592 | \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
|
|---|
| 6593 |
|
|---|
| 6594 | % \defopon {category on}class name args
|
|---|
| 6595 | \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
|---|
| 6596 |
|
|---|
| 6597 | % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
|
|---|
| 6598 | %
|
|---|
| 6599 | \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
|
|---|
| 6600 | % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
|
|---|
| 6601 | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
|
|---|
| 6602 | \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
|
|---|
| 6603 | }
|
|---|
| 6604 |
|
|---|
| 6605 | %%% Typed functions:
|
|---|
| 6606 |
|
|---|
| 6607 | % @deftypefn category type name args
|
|---|
| 6608 | \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
|
|---|
| 6609 |
|
|---|
| 6610 | % @deftypeop category class type name args
|
|---|
| 6611 | \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
|
|---|
| 6612 |
|
|---|
| 6613 | % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
|
|---|
| 6614 | \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
|---|
| 6615 |
|
|---|
| 6616 | % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
|
|---|
| 6617 | %
|
|---|
| 6618 | \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
|
|---|
| 6619 | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
|
|---|
| 6620 | \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
|
|---|
| 6621 | }
|
|---|
| 6622 |
|
|---|
| 6623 | %%% Typed variables:
|
|---|
| 6624 |
|
|---|
| 6625 | % @deftypevr category type var args
|
|---|
| 6626 | \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
|
|---|
| 6627 |
|
|---|
| 6628 | % @deftypecv category class type var args
|
|---|
| 6629 | \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
|
|---|
| 6630 |
|
|---|
| 6631 | % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
|
|---|
| 6632 | \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
|---|
| 6633 |
|
|---|
| 6634 | % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
|
|---|
| 6635 | %
|
|---|
| 6636 | \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
|
|---|
| 6637 | \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
|
|---|
| 6638 | \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
|
|---|
| 6639 | }
|
|---|
| 6640 |
|
|---|
| 6641 | %%% Untyped variables:
|
|---|
| 6642 |
|
|---|
| 6643 | % @defvr category var args
|
|---|
| 6644 | \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
|
|---|
| 6645 |
|
|---|
| 6646 | % @defcv category class var args
|
|---|
| 6647 | \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
|
|---|
| 6648 |
|
|---|
| 6649 | % \defcvof {category of}class var args
|
|---|
| 6650 | \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
|
|---|
| 6651 |
|
|---|
| 6652 | %%% Type:
|
|---|
| 6653 | % @deftp category name args
|
|---|
| 6654 | \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
|
|---|
| 6655 | \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
|
|---|
| 6656 | \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
|
|---|
| 6657 | }
|
|---|
| 6658 |
|
|---|
| 6659 | % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
|
|---|
| 6660 | \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
|
|---|
| 6661 | \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
|
|---|
| 6662 | \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
|
|---|
| 6663 | \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
|
|---|
| 6664 | \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
|
|---|
| 6665 | \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
|
|---|
| 6666 | \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
|
|---|
| 6667 | \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
|
|---|
| 6668 | \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
|
|---|
| 6669 | \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
|
|---|
| 6670 | \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
|
|---|
| 6671 |
|
|---|
| 6672 | % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
|
|---|
| 6673 | % #1 is the category, such as "Function".
|
|---|
| 6674 | % #2 is the return type, if any.
|
|---|
| 6675 | % #3 is the function name.
|
|---|
| 6676 | %
|
|---|
| 6677 | % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
|
|---|
| 6678 | %
|
|---|
| 6679 | \def\defname#1#2#3{%
|
|---|
| 6680 | % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
|
|---|
| 6681 | \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
|
|---|
| 6682 | %
|
|---|
| 6683 | % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
|
|---|
| 6684 | % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
|
|---|
| 6685 | % just below it.
|
|---|
| 6686 | \def\temp{#1}%
|
|---|
| 6687 | \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
|
|---|
| 6688 | %
|
|---|
| 6689 | % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
|
|---|
| 6690 | % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
|
|---|
| 6691 | % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
|
|---|
| 6692 | \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
|
|---|
| 6693 | % The continuations:
|
|---|
| 6694 | \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
|
|---|
| 6695 | % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
|
|---|
| 6696 | \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
|
|---|
| 6697 | %
|
|---|
| 6698 | % Put the type name to the right margin.
|
|---|
| 6699 | \noindent
|
|---|
| 6700 | \hbox to 0pt{%
|
|---|
| 6701 | \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
|
|---|
| 6702 | % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
|
|---|
| 6703 | \kern\leftskip
|
|---|
| 6704 | % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
|
|---|
| 6705 | }%
|
|---|
| 6706 | %
|
|---|
| 6707 | % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
|
|---|
| 6708 | \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
|
|---|
| 6709 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|---|
| 6710 | {%
|
|---|
| 6711 | % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
|
|---|
| 6712 | % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
|
|---|
| 6713 | % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
|
|---|
| 6714 | % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
|
|---|
| 6715 | % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
|
|---|
| 6716 | % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
|
|---|
| 6717 | % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
|
|---|
| 6718 | % one has made identifiers using them :).
|
|---|
| 6719 | \df \tt
|
|---|
| 6720 | \def\temp{#2}% return value type
|
|---|
| 6721 | \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
|
|---|
| 6722 | #3% output function name
|
|---|
| 6723 | }%
|
|---|
| 6724 | {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
|
|---|
| 6725 | %
|
|---|
| 6726 | \boldbrax
|
|---|
| 6727 | % arguments will be output next, if any.
|
|---|
| 6728 | }
|
|---|
| 6729 |
|
|---|
| 6730 | % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
|
|---|
| 6731 | % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
|
|---|
| 6732 | % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
|
|---|
| 6733 | % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
|---|
| 6734 | %
|
|---|
| 6735 | \def\defunargs#1{%
|
|---|
| 6736 | % use sl by default (not ttsl),
|
|---|
| 6737 | % tt for the names.
|
|---|
| 6738 | \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
|
|---|
| 6739 | %
|
|---|
| 6740 | % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
|
|---|
| 6741 | % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that.
|
|---|
| 6742 | \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
|
|---|
| 6743 | #1%
|
|---|
| 6744 | \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
|
|---|
| 6745 | }
|
|---|
| 6746 |
|
|---|
| 6747 | % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
|
|---|
| 6748 | %
|
|---|
| 6749 | \def\activeparens{%
|
|---|
| 6750 | \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
|
|---|
| 6751 | \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
|
|---|
| 6752 | \catcode`\&=\active
|
|---|
| 6753 | }
|
|---|
| 6754 |
|
|---|
| 6755 | % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
|
|---|
| 6756 | \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
|
|---|
| 6757 |
|
|---|
| 6758 | % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
|
|---|
| 6759 | % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
|
|---|
| 6760 | % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
|
|---|
| 6761 | {
|
|---|
| 6762 | \activeparens
|
|---|
| 6763 | \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
|
|---|
| 6764 | \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
|
|---|
| 6765 | \global\let& = \&
|
|---|
| 6766 |
|
|---|
| 6767 | \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
|
|---|
| 6768 | \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
|
|---|
| 6769 | }
|
|---|
| 6770 |
|
|---|
| 6771 | \newcount\parencount
|
|---|
| 6772 |
|
|---|
| 6773 | % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
|
|---|
| 6774 | \newif\ifampseen
|
|---|
| 6775 | \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
|
|---|
| 6776 |
|
|---|
| 6777 | \def\parenfont{%
|
|---|
| 6778 | \ifampseen
|
|---|
| 6779 | % At the first level, print parens in roman,
|
|---|
| 6780 | % otherwise use the default font.
|
|---|
| 6781 | \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
|
|---|
| 6782 | \else
|
|---|
| 6783 | % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
|
|---|
| 6784 | % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
|
|---|
| 6785 | \sf
|
|---|
| 6786 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6787 | }
|
|---|
| 6788 | \def\infirstlevel#1{%
|
|---|
| 6789 | \ifampseen
|
|---|
| 6790 | \ifnum\parencount=1
|
|---|
| 6791 | #1%
|
|---|
| 6792 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6793 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6794 | }
|
|---|
| 6795 | \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
|
|---|
| 6796 |
|
|---|
| 6797 | \def\opnr{%
|
|---|
| 6798 | \global\advance\parencount by 1
|
|---|
| 6799 | {\parenfont(}%
|
|---|
| 6800 | \infirstlevel \bfafterword
|
|---|
| 6801 | }
|
|---|
| 6802 | \def\clnr{%
|
|---|
| 6803 | {\parenfont)}%
|
|---|
| 6804 | \infirstlevel \sl
|
|---|
| 6805 | \global\advance\parencount by -1
|
|---|
| 6806 | }
|
|---|
| 6807 |
|
|---|
| 6808 | \newcount\brackcount
|
|---|
| 6809 | \def\lbrb{%
|
|---|
| 6810 | \global\advance\brackcount by 1
|
|---|
| 6811 | {\bf[}%
|
|---|
| 6812 | }
|
|---|
| 6813 | \def\rbrb{%
|
|---|
| 6814 | {\bf]}%
|
|---|
| 6815 | \global\advance\brackcount by -1
|
|---|
| 6816 | }
|
|---|
| 6817 |
|
|---|
| 6818 | \def\checkparencounts{%
|
|---|
| 6819 | \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
|
|---|
| 6820 | \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
|
|---|
| 6821 | }
|
|---|
| 6822 | % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
|
|---|
| 6823 | % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
|
|---|
| 6824 | \def\badparencount{%
|
|---|
| 6825 | \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
|
|---|
| 6826 | \global\parencount=0
|
|---|
| 6827 | }
|
|---|
| 6828 | \def\badbrackcount{%
|
|---|
| 6829 | \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
|
|---|
| 6830 | \global\brackcount=0
|
|---|
| 6831 | }
|
|---|
| 6832 |
|
|---|
| 6833 |
|
|---|
| 6834 | \message{macros,}
|
|---|
| 6835 | % @macro.
|
|---|
| 6836 |
|
|---|
| 6837 | % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
|
|---|
| 6838 | % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
|
|---|
| 6839 | \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
|
|---|
| 6840 | \newwrite\macscribble
|
|---|
| 6841 | \def\scantokens#1{%
|
|---|
| 6842 | \toks0={#1}%
|
|---|
| 6843 | \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
|
|---|
| 6844 | \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
|
|---|
| 6845 | \immediate\closeout\macscribble
|
|---|
| 6846 | \input \jobname.tmp
|
|---|
| 6847 | }
|
|---|
| 6848 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6849 |
|
|---|
| 6850 | \def\scanmacro#1{%
|
|---|
| 6851 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 6852 | \newlinechar`\^^M
|
|---|
| 6853 | \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
|
|---|
| 6854 | % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
|
|---|
| 6855 | % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
|
|---|
| 6856 | % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
|
|---|
| 6857 | % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
|
|---|
| 6858 | % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
|
|---|
| 6859 | \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
|
|---|
| 6860 | % ... and \example
|
|---|
| 6861 | \spaceisspace
|
|---|
| 6862 | %
|
|---|
| 6863 | % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
|
|---|
| 6864 | % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
|
|---|
| 6865 | % --kasal, 29nov03
|
|---|
| 6866 | \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
|
|---|
| 6867 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 6868 | }
|
|---|
| 6869 |
|
|---|
| 6870 | \def\scanexp#1{%
|
|---|
| 6871 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
|
|---|
| 6872 | \temp
|
|---|
| 6873 | }
|
|---|
| 6874 |
|
|---|
| 6875 | \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
|
|---|
| 6876 | \newtoks\macname % Macro name
|
|---|
| 6877 | \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
|
|---|
| 6878 |
|
|---|
| 6879 | % List of all defined macros in the form
|
|---|
| 6880 | % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
|
|---|
| 6881 | % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
|
|---|
| 6882 | % if there is a need.
|
|---|
| 6883 | \def\macrolist{}
|
|---|
| 6884 |
|
|---|
| 6885 | % Add the macro to \macrolist
|
|---|
| 6886 | \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
|
|---|
| 6887 | \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
|
|---|
| 6888 | \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
|
|---|
| 6889 | \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
|
|---|
| 6890 | }
|
|---|
| 6891 |
|
|---|
| 6892 | % Utility routines.
|
|---|
| 6893 | % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
|
|---|
| 6894 | % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
|
|---|
| 6895 | % (except of course we have to play expansion games).
|
|---|
| 6896 | %
|
|---|
| 6897 | \def\cslet#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 6898 | \expandafter\let
|
|---|
| 6899 | \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
|
|---|
| 6900 | \csname#2\endcsname
|
|---|
| 6901 | }
|
|---|
| 6902 |
|
|---|
| 6903 | % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
|
|---|
| 6904 | % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
|
|---|
| 6905 | {\catcode`\@=11
|
|---|
| 6906 | \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
|
|---|
| 6907 | \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
|
|---|
| 6908 | \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
|
|---|
| 6909 | \def\unbrace#1{#1}
|
|---|
| 6910 | \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
|
|---|
| 6911 | }
|
|---|
| 6912 |
|
|---|
| 6913 | % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
|
|---|
| 6914 | {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
|
|---|
| 6915 | \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
|
|---|
| 6916 | \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
|
|---|
| 6917 | \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
|
|---|
| 6918 | }
|
|---|
| 6919 |
|
|---|
| 6920 | % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
|
|---|
| 6921 | % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
|
|---|
| 6922 | % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
|
|---|
| 6923 |
|
|---|
| 6924 | % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
|
|---|
| 6925 | % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
|
|---|
| 6926 | % confine the change to the current group.
|
|---|
| 6927 |
|
|---|
| 6928 | % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
|
|---|
| 6929 | % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
|
|---|
| 6930 | % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
|
|---|
| 6931 |
|
|---|
| 6932 | \def\scanctxt{%
|
|---|
| 6933 | \catcode`\"=\other
|
|---|
| 6934 | \catcode`\+=\other
|
|---|
| 6935 | \catcode`\<=\other
|
|---|
| 6936 | \catcode`\>=\other
|
|---|
| 6937 | \catcode`\@=\other
|
|---|
| 6938 | \catcode`\^=\other
|
|---|
| 6939 | \catcode`\_=\other
|
|---|
| 6940 | \catcode`\|=\other
|
|---|
| 6941 | \catcode`\~=\other
|
|---|
| 6942 | \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
|
|---|
| 6943 | }
|
|---|
| 6944 |
|
|---|
| 6945 | \def\scanargctxt{%
|
|---|
| 6946 | \scanctxt
|
|---|
| 6947 | \catcode`\\=\other
|
|---|
| 6948 | \catcode`\^^M=\other
|
|---|
| 6949 | }
|
|---|
| 6950 |
|
|---|
| 6951 | \def\macrobodyctxt{%
|
|---|
| 6952 | \scanctxt
|
|---|
| 6953 | \catcode`\{=\other
|
|---|
| 6954 | \catcode`\}=\other
|
|---|
| 6955 | \catcode`\^^M=\other
|
|---|
| 6956 | \usembodybackslash
|
|---|
| 6957 | }
|
|---|
| 6958 |
|
|---|
| 6959 | \def\macroargctxt{%
|
|---|
| 6960 | \scanctxt
|
|---|
| 6961 | \catcode`\\=\other
|
|---|
| 6962 | }
|
|---|
| 6963 |
|
|---|
| 6964 | % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
|
|---|
| 6965 | % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
|
|---|
| 6966 | % where N is the macro parameter number.
|
|---|
| 6967 | % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
|
|---|
| 6968 | % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
|
|---|
| 6969 |
|
|---|
| 6970 | {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
|
|---|
| 6971 | @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
|
|---|
| 6972 | @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
|
|---|
| 6973 | }
|
|---|
| 6974 | \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
|
|---|
| 6975 |
|
|---|
| 6976 | \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
|---|
| 6977 | \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
|---|
| 6978 |
|
|---|
| 6979 | \def\macroxxx#1{%
|
|---|
| 6980 | \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
|
|---|
| 6981 | \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
|
|---|
| 6982 | \paramno=0%
|
|---|
| 6983 | \else
|
|---|
| 6984 | \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
|
|---|
| 6985 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6986 | \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
|
|---|
| 6987 | \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
|
|---|
| 6988 | \else
|
|---|
| 6989 | \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
|
|---|
| 6990 | \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
|
|---|
| 6991 | \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
|
|---|
| 6992 | \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
|
|---|
| 6993 | \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
|
|---|
| 6994 | \fi
|
|---|
| 6995 | \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
|
|---|
| 6996 | \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
|
|---|
| 6997 | \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
|
|---|
| 6998 | \fi}
|
|---|
| 6999 |
|
|---|
| 7000 | \parseargdef\unmacro{%
|
|---|
| 7001 | \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
|
|---|
| 7002 | \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
|
|---|
| 7003 | \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
|
|---|
| 7004 | % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
|
|---|
| 7005 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 7006 | \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
|
|---|
| 7007 | \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
|
|---|
| 7008 | \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
|
|---|
| 7009 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 7010 | \else
|
|---|
| 7011 | \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
|
|---|
| 7012 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7013 | }
|
|---|
| 7014 |
|
|---|
| 7015 | % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
|
|---|
| 7016 | % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
|
|---|
| 7017 | %
|
|---|
| 7018 | \def\unmacrodo#1{%
|
|---|
| 7019 | \ifx #1\relax
|
|---|
| 7020 | % remove this
|
|---|
| 7021 | \else
|
|---|
| 7022 | \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
|
|---|
| 7023 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7024 | }
|
|---|
| 7025 |
|
|---|
| 7026 | % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
|
|---|
| 7027 | % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
|
|---|
| 7028 | % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
|
|---|
| 7029 | \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
|
|---|
| 7030 | \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
|
|---|
| 7031 | \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
|
|---|
| 7032 | \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
|
|---|
| 7033 |
|
|---|
| 7034 | % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
|
|---|
| 7035 | % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
|
|---|
| 7036 | % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
|
|---|
| 7037 | % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
|
|---|
| 7038 |
|
|---|
| 7039 | % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
|
|---|
| 7040 | % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
|
|---|
| 7041 | % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
|
|---|
| 7042 | % it to # just before using the token list produced.
|
|---|
| 7043 | %
|
|---|
| 7044 | % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
|
|---|
| 7045 | % the macro is used.
|
|---|
| 7046 |
|
|---|
| 7047 | \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
|
|---|
| 7048 | \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
|
|---|
| 7049 | \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
|
|---|
| 7050 | \if#1;\let\next=\relax
|
|---|
| 7051 | \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
|
|---|
| 7052 | \advance\paramno by 1%
|
|---|
| 7053 | \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
|
|---|
| 7054 | {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
|
|---|
| 7055 | \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
|
|---|
| 7056 | \fi\next}
|
|---|
| 7057 |
|
|---|
| 7058 | % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
|
|---|
| 7059 | % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
|
|---|
| 7060 |
|
|---|
| 7061 | \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
|
|---|
| 7062 | {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
|---|
| 7063 | \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
|
|---|
| 7064 | {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
|---|
| 7065 |
|
|---|
| 7066 | % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
|
|---|
| 7067 | % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
|
|---|
| 7068 | % Much magic with \expandafter here.
|
|---|
| 7069 | % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
|
|---|
| 7070 | % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
|
|---|
| 7071 | \def\defmacro{%
|
|---|
| 7072 | \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
|
|---|
| 7073 | \ifrecursive
|
|---|
| 7074 | \ifcase\paramno
|
|---|
| 7075 | % 0
|
|---|
| 7076 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|---|
| 7077 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
|---|
| 7078 | \or % 1
|
|---|
| 7079 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|---|
| 7080 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
|---|
| 7081 | \noexpand\braceorline
|
|---|
| 7082 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 7083 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
|---|
| 7084 | \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
|---|
| 7085 | \else % many
|
|---|
| 7086 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|---|
| 7087 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
|---|
| 7088 | \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 7089 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
|---|
| 7090 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
|---|
| 7091 | \expandafter\expandafter
|
|---|
| 7092 | \expandafter\xdef
|
|---|
| 7093 | \expandafter\expandafter
|
|---|
| 7094 | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
|---|
| 7095 | \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
|---|
| 7096 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7097 | \else
|
|---|
| 7098 | \ifcase\paramno
|
|---|
| 7099 | % 0
|
|---|
| 7100 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|---|
| 7101 | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
|---|
| 7102 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
|---|
| 7103 | \or % 1
|
|---|
| 7104 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|---|
| 7105 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
|---|
| 7106 | \noexpand\braceorline
|
|---|
| 7107 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 7108 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
|---|
| 7109 | \egroup
|
|---|
| 7110 | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
|---|
| 7111 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
|---|
| 7112 | \else % many
|
|---|
| 7113 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|---|
| 7114 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
|---|
| 7115 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 7116 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
|---|
| 7117 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
|---|
| 7118 | \expandafter\expandafter
|
|---|
| 7119 | \expandafter\xdef
|
|---|
| 7120 | \expandafter\expandafter
|
|---|
| 7121 | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
|---|
| 7122 | \paramlist{%
|
|---|
| 7123 | \egroup
|
|---|
| 7124 | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
|---|
| 7125 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
|---|
| 7126 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7127 | \fi}
|
|---|
| 7128 |
|
|---|
| 7129 | \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
|
|---|
| 7130 |
|
|---|
| 7131 | % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
|
|---|
| 7132 | % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
|
|---|
| 7133 | % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
|
|---|
| 7134 | % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
|
|---|
| 7135 | \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
|
|---|
| 7136 | \def\braceorlinexxx{%
|
|---|
| 7137 | \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
|
|---|
| 7138 | \expandafter\parsearg
|
|---|
| 7139 | \fi \macnamexxx}
|
|---|
| 7140 |
|
|---|
| 7141 |
|
|---|
| 7142 | % @alias.
|
|---|
| 7143 | % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
|
|---|
| 7144 | % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
|
|---|
| 7145 | \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
|
|---|
| 7146 | \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
|
|---|
| 7147 | \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
|
|---|
| 7148 | {%
|
|---|
| 7149 | \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
|
|---|
| 7150 | \addtomacrolist{#1}%
|
|---|
| 7151 | \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
|
|---|
| 7152 | }%
|
|---|
| 7153 | \next
|
|---|
| 7154 | }
|
|---|
| 7155 |
|
|---|
| 7156 |
|
|---|
| 7157 | \message{cross references,}
|
|---|
| 7158 |
|
|---|
| 7159 | \newwrite\auxfile
|
|---|
| 7160 | \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
|
|---|
| 7161 | \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
|
|---|
| 7162 |
|
|---|
| 7163 | % @inforef is relatively simple.
|
|---|
| 7164 | \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
|
|---|
| 7165 | \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
|
|---|
| 7166 | node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
|
|---|
| 7167 |
|
|---|
| 7168 | % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
|
|---|
| 7169 | % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
|
|---|
| 7170 | % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
|
|---|
| 7171 | % @node foo , bar , ...
|
|---|
| 7172 | % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
|
|---|
| 7173 | %
|
|---|
| 7174 | \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
|
|---|
| 7175 | %
|
|---|
| 7176 | % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
|
|---|
| 7177 | % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
|
|---|
| 7178 | \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
|
|---|
| 7179 | \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
|
|---|
| 7180 |
|
|---|
| 7181 | \let\nwnode=\node
|
|---|
| 7182 | \let\lastnode=\empty
|
|---|
| 7183 |
|
|---|
| 7184 | % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
|
|---|
| 7185 | % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
|
|---|
| 7186 | %
|
|---|
| 7187 | \def\donoderef#1{%
|
|---|
| 7188 | \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
|
|---|
| 7189 | \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
|
|---|
| 7190 | \global\let\lastnode=\empty
|
|---|
| 7191 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7192 | }
|
|---|
| 7193 |
|
|---|
| 7194 | % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
|
|---|
| 7195 | %
|
|---|
| 7196 | \newcount\savesfregister
|
|---|
| 7197 | %
|
|---|
| 7198 | \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
|
|---|
| 7199 | \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
|
|---|
| 7200 | \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
|
|---|
| 7201 |
|
|---|
| 7202 | % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
|
|---|
| 7203 | % anchor), which consists of three parts:
|
|---|
| 7204 | % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
|
|---|
| 7205 | % or the anchor name.
|
|---|
| 7206 | % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
|
|---|
| 7207 | % empty for anchors.
|
|---|
| 7208 | % 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
|
|---|
| 7209 | %
|
|---|
| 7210 | % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
|
|---|
| 7211 | % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
|
|---|
| 7212 | % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
|
|---|
| 7213 | %
|
|---|
| 7214 | \def\setref#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 7215 | \pdfmkdest{#1}%
|
|---|
| 7216 | \iflinks
|
|---|
| 7217 | {%
|
|---|
| 7218 | \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
|
|---|
| 7219 | \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
|
|---|
| 7220 | \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
|
|---|
| 7221 | ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
|
|---|
| 7222 | }%
|
|---|
| 7223 | \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
|
|---|
| 7224 | \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
|
|---|
| 7225 | \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
|
|---|
| 7226 | \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout
|
|---|
| 7227 | }%
|
|---|
| 7228 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7229 | }
|
|---|
| 7230 |
|
|---|
| 7231 | % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
|
|---|
| 7232 | % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
|
|---|
| 7233 | % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
|
|---|
| 7234 | % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
|
|---|
| 7235 | %
|
|---|
| 7236 | \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
|---|
| 7237 | \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
|---|
| 7238 | \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
|---|
| 7239 | \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
|
|---|
| 7240 | \unsepspaces
|
|---|
| 7241 | \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
|
|---|
| 7242 | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
|---|
| 7243 | \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
|
|---|
| 7244 | \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
|
|---|
| 7245 | \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
|
|---|
| 7246 | % No printed node name was explicitly given.
|
|---|
| 7247 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
|
|---|
| 7248 | % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
|
|---|
| 7249 | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
|---|
| 7250 | \else
|
|---|
| 7251 | % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
|
|---|
| 7252 | % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
|
|---|
| 7253 | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
|---|
| 7254 | % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
|
|---|
| 7255 | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
|---|
| 7256 | \else
|
|---|
| 7257 | \ifhavexrefs
|
|---|
| 7258 | % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
|
|---|
| 7259 | \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
|
|---|
| 7260 | \else
|
|---|
| 7261 | % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
|
|---|
| 7262 | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
|---|
| 7263 | \fi%
|
|---|
| 7264 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7265 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7266 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7267 | %
|
|---|
| 7268 | % Make link in pdf output.
|
|---|
| 7269 | \ifpdf
|
|---|
| 7270 | {\indexnofonts
|
|---|
| 7271 | \turnoffactive
|
|---|
| 7272 | % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
|
|---|
| 7273 | % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.
|
|---|
| 7274 | \getfilename{#4}%
|
|---|
| 7275 | %
|
|---|
| 7276 | % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
|
|---|
| 7277 | {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
|
|---|
| 7278 | \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
|
|---|
| 7279 | %
|
|---|
| 7280 | \leavevmode
|
|---|
| 7281 | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
|---|
| 7282 | \ifnum\filenamelength>0
|
|---|
| 7283 | goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
|
|---|
| 7284 | \else
|
|---|
| 7285 | goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
|
|---|
| 7286 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7287 | }%
|
|---|
| 7288 | \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
|
|---|
| 7289 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7290 | %
|
|---|
| 7291 | % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
|
|---|
| 7292 | % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
|
|---|
| 7293 | % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
|
|---|
| 7294 | {%
|
|---|
| 7295 | % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
|
|---|
| 7296 | % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
|
|---|
| 7297 | \indexnofonts
|
|---|
| 7298 | \turnoffactive
|
|---|
| 7299 | \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
|
|---|
| 7300 | \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
|
|---|
| 7301 | }%
|
|---|
| 7302 | \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
|
|---|
| 7303 | % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
|
|---|
| 7304 | % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
|
|---|
| 7305 | \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
|
|---|
| 7306 | \refx{#1-snt}{}%
|
|---|
| 7307 | \else
|
|---|
| 7308 | \printedrefname
|
|---|
| 7309 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7310 | %
|
|---|
| 7311 | % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
|
|---|
| 7312 | % "in MANUALNAME".
|
|---|
| 7313 | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
|---|
| 7314 | \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
|---|
| 7315 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7316 | \else
|
|---|
| 7317 | % node/anchor (non-float) references.
|
|---|
| 7318 | %
|
|---|
| 7319 | % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
|
|---|
| 7320 | % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
|
|---|
| 7321 | % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
|
|---|
| 7322 | % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
|
|---|
| 7323 | % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
|
|---|
| 7324 | % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
|
|---|
| 7325 | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
|---|
| 7326 | \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
|---|
| 7327 | \else
|
|---|
| 7328 | % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
|
|---|
| 7329 | % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
|
|---|
| 7330 | % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
|
|---|
| 7331 | % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
|
|---|
| 7332 | % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
|
|---|
| 7333 | {\turnoffactive
|
|---|
| 7334 | % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
|
|---|
| 7335 | % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
|
|---|
| 7336 | \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
|
|---|
| 7337 | \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
|
|---|
| 7338 | }%
|
|---|
| 7339 | % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
|
|---|
| 7340 | \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
|
|---|
| 7341 | %
|
|---|
| 7342 | % But we always want a comma and a space:
|
|---|
| 7343 | ,\space
|
|---|
| 7344 | %
|
|---|
| 7345 | % output the `page 3'.
|
|---|
| 7346 | \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
|
|---|
| 7347 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7348 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7349 | \endlink
|
|---|
| 7350 | \endgroup}
|
|---|
| 7351 |
|
|---|
| 7352 | % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
|
|---|
| 7353 | % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
|
|---|
| 7354 | % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
|
|---|
| 7355 | % one that Bob is working on :).
|
|---|
| 7356 | %
|
|---|
| 7357 | \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
|
|---|
| 7358 |
|
|---|
| 7359 | % Things referred to by \setref.
|
|---|
| 7360 | %
|
|---|
| 7361 | \def\Ynothing{}
|
|---|
| 7362 | \def\Yomitfromtoc{}
|
|---|
| 7363 | \def\Ynumbered{%
|
|---|
| 7364 | \ifnum\secno=0
|
|---|
| 7365 | \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
|
|---|
| 7366 | \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
|
|---|
| 7367 | \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
|
|---|
| 7368 | \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
|
|---|
| 7369 | \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
|
|---|
| 7370 | \else
|
|---|
| 7371 | \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
|
|---|
| 7372 | \fi\fi\fi
|
|---|
| 7373 | }
|
|---|
| 7374 | \def\Yappendix{%
|
|---|
| 7375 | \ifnum\secno=0
|
|---|
| 7376 | \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
|
|---|
| 7377 | \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
|
|---|
| 7378 | \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
|
|---|
| 7379 | \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
|
|---|
| 7380 | \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
|
|---|
| 7381 | \else
|
|---|
| 7382 | \putwordSection@tie
|
|---|
| 7383 | @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
|
|---|
| 7384 | \fi\fi\fi
|
|---|
| 7385 | }
|
|---|
| 7386 |
|
|---|
| 7387 | % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
|
|---|
| 7388 | % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
|
|---|
| 7389 | %
|
|---|
| 7390 | \def\refx#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 7391 | {%
|
|---|
| 7392 | \indexnofonts
|
|---|
| 7393 | \otherbackslash
|
|---|
| 7394 | \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
|
|---|
| 7395 | \csname XR#1\endcsname
|
|---|
| 7396 | }%
|
|---|
| 7397 | \ifx\thisrefX\relax
|
|---|
| 7398 | % If not defined, say something at least.
|
|---|
| 7399 | \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
|
|---|
| 7400 | \iflinks
|
|---|
| 7401 | \ifhavexrefs
|
|---|
| 7402 | \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
|
|---|
| 7403 | \else
|
|---|
| 7404 | \ifwarnedxrefs\else
|
|---|
| 7405 | \global\warnedxrefstrue
|
|---|
| 7406 | \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
|
|---|
| 7407 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7408 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7409 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7410 | \else
|
|---|
| 7411 | % It's defined, so just use it.
|
|---|
| 7412 | \thisrefX
|
|---|
| 7413 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7414 | #2% Output the suffix in any case.
|
|---|
| 7415 | }
|
|---|
| 7416 |
|
|---|
| 7417 | % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
|
|---|
| 7418 | % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
|
|---|
| 7419 | % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
|
|---|
| 7420 | %
|
|---|
| 7421 | \def\xrdef#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 7422 | {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
|
|---|
| 7423 | % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
|
|---|
| 7424 | % mess up the control sequence name.
|
|---|
| 7425 | \indexnofonts
|
|---|
| 7426 | \turnoffactive
|
|---|
| 7427 | \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
|
|---|
| 7428 | }%
|
|---|
| 7429 | %
|
|---|
| 7430 | \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
|
|---|
| 7431 | %
|
|---|
| 7432 | % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
|
|---|
| 7433 | \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
|
|---|
| 7434 | % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
|
|---|
| 7435 | \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
|
|---|
| 7436 | \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
|
|---|
| 7437 | %
|
|---|
| 7438 | % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
|
|---|
| 7439 | \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
|
|---|
| 7440 | \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
|
|---|
| 7441 | \else
|
|---|
| 7442 | % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
|
|---|
| 7443 | \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
|
|---|
| 7444 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7445 | %
|
|---|
| 7446 | % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
|
|---|
| 7447 | % for later use in \listoffloats.
|
|---|
| 7448 | \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
|
|---|
| 7449 | {\safexrefname}}%
|
|---|
| 7450 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7451 | }
|
|---|
| 7452 |
|
|---|
| 7453 | % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
|
|---|
| 7454 | %
|
|---|
| 7455 | \def\tryauxfile{%
|
|---|
| 7456 | \openin 1 \jobname.aux
|
|---|
| 7457 | \ifeof 1 \else
|
|---|
| 7458 | \readdatafile{aux}%
|
|---|
| 7459 | \global\havexrefstrue
|
|---|
| 7460 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7461 | \closein 1
|
|---|
| 7462 | }
|
|---|
| 7463 |
|
|---|
| 7464 | \def\setupdatafile{%
|
|---|
| 7465 | \catcode`\^^@=\other
|
|---|
| 7466 | \catcode`\^^A=\other
|
|---|
| 7467 | \catcode`\^^B=\other
|
|---|
| 7468 | \catcode`\^^C=\other
|
|---|
| 7469 | \catcode`\^^D=\other
|
|---|
| 7470 | \catcode`\^^E=\other
|
|---|
| 7471 | \catcode`\^^F=\other
|
|---|
| 7472 | \catcode`\^^G=\other
|
|---|
| 7473 | \catcode`\^^H=\other
|
|---|
| 7474 | \catcode`\^^K=\other
|
|---|
| 7475 | \catcode`\^^L=\other
|
|---|
| 7476 | \catcode`\^^N=\other
|
|---|
| 7477 | \catcode`\^^P=\other
|
|---|
| 7478 | \catcode`\^^Q=\other
|
|---|
| 7479 | \catcode`\^^R=\other
|
|---|
| 7480 | \catcode`\^^S=\other
|
|---|
| 7481 | \catcode`\^^T=\other
|
|---|
| 7482 | \catcode`\^^U=\other
|
|---|
| 7483 | \catcode`\^^V=\other
|
|---|
| 7484 | \catcode`\^^W=\other
|
|---|
| 7485 | \catcode`\^^X=\other
|
|---|
| 7486 | \catcode`\^^Z=\other
|
|---|
| 7487 | \catcode`\^^[=\other
|
|---|
| 7488 | \catcode`\^^\=\other
|
|---|
| 7489 | \catcode`\^^]=\other
|
|---|
| 7490 | \catcode`\^^^=\other
|
|---|
| 7491 | \catcode`\^^_=\other
|
|---|
| 7492 | % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
|
|---|
| 7493 | % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
|
|---|
| 7494 | % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
|
|---|
| 7495 | % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
|
|---|
| 7496 | % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
|
|---|
| 7497 | % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
|
|---|
| 7498 | % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
|
|---|
| 7499 | % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
|
|---|
| 7500 | %
|
|---|
| 7501 | % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
|
|---|
| 7502 | % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
|
|---|
| 7503 | % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
|
|---|
| 7504 | %
|
|---|
| 7505 | \catcode`\^=\other
|
|---|
| 7506 | %
|
|---|
| 7507 | % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
|
|---|
| 7508 | \catcode`\~=\other
|
|---|
| 7509 | \catcode`\[=\other
|
|---|
| 7510 | \catcode`\]=\other
|
|---|
| 7511 | \catcode`\"=\other
|
|---|
| 7512 | \catcode`\_=\other
|
|---|
| 7513 | \catcode`\|=\other
|
|---|
| 7514 | \catcode`\<=\other
|
|---|
| 7515 | \catcode`\>=\other
|
|---|
| 7516 | \catcode`\$=\other
|
|---|
| 7517 | \catcode`\#=\other
|
|---|
| 7518 | \catcode`\&=\other
|
|---|
| 7519 | \catcode`\%=\other
|
|---|
| 7520 | \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
|
|---|
| 7521 | %
|
|---|
| 7522 | % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
|
|---|
| 7523 | % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
|
|---|
| 7524 | % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
|
|---|
| 7525 | % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
|
|---|
| 7526 | % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
|
|---|
| 7527 | % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
|
|---|
| 7528 | % now. --karl, 15jan04.
|
|---|
| 7529 | \catcode`\\=\other
|
|---|
| 7530 | %
|
|---|
| 7531 | % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
|
|---|
| 7532 | {%
|
|---|
| 7533 | \count1=128
|
|---|
| 7534 | \def\loop{%
|
|---|
| 7535 | \catcode\count1=\other
|
|---|
| 7536 | \advance\count1 by 1
|
|---|
| 7537 | \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
|
|---|
| 7538 | }%
|
|---|
| 7539 | }%
|
|---|
| 7540 | %
|
|---|
| 7541 | % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
|
|---|
| 7542 | \catcode`\{=1
|
|---|
| 7543 | \catcode`\}=2
|
|---|
| 7544 | \catcode`\@=0
|
|---|
| 7545 | }
|
|---|
| 7546 |
|
|---|
| 7547 | \def\readdatafile#1{%
|
|---|
| 7548 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 7549 | \setupdatafile
|
|---|
| 7550 | \input\jobname.#1
|
|---|
| 7551 | \endgroup}
|
|---|
| 7552 |
|
|---|
| 7553 |
|
|---|
| 7554 | \message{insertions,}
|
|---|
| 7555 | % including footnotes.
|
|---|
| 7556 |
|
|---|
| 7557 | \newcount \footnoteno
|
|---|
| 7558 |
|
|---|
| 7559 | % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
|
|---|
| 7560 | % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
|
|---|
| 7561 | % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
|
|---|
| 7562 | % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
|
|---|
| 7563 | % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
|
|---|
| 7564 | \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
|
|---|
| 7565 |
|
|---|
| 7566 | % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
|
|---|
| 7567 | \let\footnotestyle=\comment
|
|---|
| 7568 |
|
|---|
| 7569 | {\catcode `\@=11
|
|---|
| 7570 | %
|
|---|
| 7571 | % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
|
|---|
| 7572 | \gdef\footnote{%
|
|---|
| 7573 | \let\indent=\ptexindent
|
|---|
| 7574 | \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
|
|---|
| 7575 | \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
|
|---|
| 7576 | \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
|
|---|
| 7577 | %
|
|---|
| 7578 | % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
|
|---|
| 7579 | % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
|
|---|
| 7580 | \let\@sf\empty
|
|---|
| 7581 | \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
|
|---|
| 7582 | %
|
|---|
| 7583 | % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
|
|---|
| 7584 | \unskip
|
|---|
| 7585 | \thisfootno\@sf
|
|---|
| 7586 | \dofootnote
|
|---|
| 7587 | }%
|
|---|
| 7588 |
|
|---|
| 7589 | % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
|
|---|
| 7590 | % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
|
|---|
| 7591 | %
|
|---|
| 7592 | % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
|
|---|
| 7593 | % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
|
|---|
| 7594 | % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
|
|---|
| 7595 | %
|
|---|
| 7596 | \gdef\dofootnote{%
|
|---|
| 7597 | \insert\footins\bgroup
|
|---|
| 7598 | % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
|
|---|
| 7599 | % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
|
|---|
| 7600 | % So reset some parameters.
|
|---|
| 7601 | \hsize=\pagewidth
|
|---|
| 7602 | \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
|
|---|
| 7603 | \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
|
|---|
| 7604 | \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
|
|---|
| 7605 | \floatingpenalty\@MM
|
|---|
| 7606 | \leftskip\z@skip
|
|---|
| 7607 | \rightskip\z@skip
|
|---|
| 7608 | \spaceskip\z@skip
|
|---|
| 7609 | \xspaceskip\z@skip
|
|---|
| 7610 | \parindent\defaultparindent
|
|---|
| 7611 | %
|
|---|
| 7612 | \smallfonts \rm
|
|---|
| 7613 | %
|
|---|
| 7614 | % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
|
|---|
| 7615 | % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
|
|---|
| 7616 | % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
|
|---|
| 7617 | % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
|
|---|
| 7618 | \let\noindent = \relax
|
|---|
| 7619 | %
|
|---|
| 7620 | % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
|
|---|
| 7621 | % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
|
|---|
| 7622 | \everypar = {\hang}%
|
|---|
| 7623 | \textindent{\thisfootno}%
|
|---|
| 7624 | %
|
|---|
| 7625 | % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
|
|---|
| 7626 | % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
|
|---|
| 7627 | % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
|
|---|
| 7628 | \footstrut
|
|---|
| 7629 | \futurelet\next\fo@t
|
|---|
| 7630 | }
|
|---|
| 7631 | }%end \catcode `\@=11
|
|---|
| 7632 |
|
|---|
| 7633 | % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
|
|---|
| 7634 | % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
|
|---|
| 7635 | % would be lost.
|
|---|
| 7636 | % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
|
|---|
| 7637 | % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
|
|---|
| 7638 | % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
|
|---|
| 7639 |
|
|---|
| 7640 | % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
|
|---|
| 7641 | % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
|
|---|
| 7642 | % out prematurely.
|
|---|
| 7643 | %
|
|---|
| 7644 | \def\startsavinginserts{%
|
|---|
| 7645 | \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
|
|---|
| 7646 | \let\insert\saveinsert
|
|---|
| 7647 | \else
|
|---|
| 7648 | \let\checkinserts\relax
|
|---|
| 7649 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7650 | }
|
|---|
| 7651 |
|
|---|
| 7652 | % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
|
|---|
| 7653 | % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
|
|---|
| 7654 | %
|
|---|
| 7655 | \def\saveinsert#1{%
|
|---|
| 7656 | \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
|
|---|
| 7657 | \afterassignment\next
|
|---|
| 7658 | % swallow the left brace
|
|---|
| 7659 | \let\temp =
|
|---|
| 7660 | }
|
|---|
| 7661 | \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
|
|---|
| 7662 | \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
|
|---|
| 7663 |
|
|---|
| 7664 | \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
|
|---|
| 7665 |
|
|---|
| 7666 | \def\placesaveins#1{%
|
|---|
| 7667 | \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
|
|---|
| 7668 | {\box#1}%
|
|---|
| 7669 | }
|
|---|
| 7670 |
|
|---|
| 7671 | % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
|
|---|
| 7672 | {
|
|---|
| 7673 | \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
|
|---|
| 7674 | \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
|
|---|
| 7675 | }
|
|---|
| 7676 |
|
|---|
| 7677 | % initialization:
|
|---|
| 7678 | \def\newsaveins #1{%
|
|---|
| 7679 | \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
|
|---|
| 7680 | \next
|
|---|
| 7681 | }
|
|---|
| 7682 | \def\newsaveinsX #1{%
|
|---|
| 7683 | \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
|
|---|
| 7684 | \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
|
|---|
| 7685 | \checksaveins #1}%
|
|---|
| 7686 | }
|
|---|
| 7687 |
|
|---|
| 7688 | % initialize:
|
|---|
| 7689 | \let\checkinserts\empty
|
|---|
| 7690 | \newsaveins\footins
|
|---|
| 7691 | \newsaveins\margin
|
|---|
| 7692 |
|
|---|
| 7693 |
|
|---|
| 7694 | % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
|
|---|
| 7695 | % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
|
|---|
| 7696 | %
|
|---|
| 7697 | % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
|
|---|
| 7698 | % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
|
|---|
| 7699 | % undone and the next image would fail.
|
|---|
| 7700 | \openin 1 = epsf.tex
|
|---|
| 7701 | \ifeof 1 \else
|
|---|
| 7702 | % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
|
|---|
| 7703 | % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
|
|---|
| 7704 | \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
|
|---|
| 7705 | \input epsf.tex
|
|---|
| 7706 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7707 | \closein 1
|
|---|
| 7708 | %
|
|---|
| 7709 | % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
|
|---|
| 7710 | \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
|
|---|
| 7711 | \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
|
|---|
| 7712 | work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
|
|---|
| 7713 | it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
|
|---|
| 7714 | %
|
|---|
| 7715 | \def\image#1{%
|
|---|
| 7716 | \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
|
|---|
| 7717 | \ifwarnednoepsf \else
|
|---|
| 7718 | \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
|
|---|
| 7719 | \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
|
|---|
| 7720 | \global\warnednoepsftrue
|
|---|
| 7721 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7722 | \else
|
|---|
| 7723 | \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
|
|---|
| 7724 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7725 | }
|
|---|
| 7726 | %
|
|---|
| 7727 | % Arguments to @image:
|
|---|
| 7728 | % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
|
|---|
| 7729 | % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
|
|---|
| 7730 | % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
|
|---|
| 7731 | % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
|
|---|
| 7732 | % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
|
|---|
| 7733 | \newif\ifimagevmode
|
|---|
| 7734 | \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
|
|---|
| 7735 | \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
|
|---|
| 7736 | \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
|
|---|
| 7737 | % If the image is by itself, center it.
|
|---|
| 7738 | \ifvmode
|
|---|
| 7739 | \imagevmodetrue
|
|---|
| 7740 | \nobreak\medskip
|
|---|
| 7741 | % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
|
|---|
| 7742 | % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
|
|---|
| 7743 | % above and below.
|
|---|
| 7744 | \nobreak\vskip\parskip
|
|---|
| 7745 | \nobreak
|
|---|
| 7746 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7747 | %
|
|---|
| 7748 | % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
|
|---|
| 7749 | % environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if
|
|---|
| 7750 | % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation.
|
|---|
| 7751 | \noindent
|
|---|
| 7752 | %
|
|---|
| 7753 | % Output the image.
|
|---|
| 7754 | \ifpdf
|
|---|
| 7755 | \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
|---|
| 7756 | \else
|
|---|
| 7757 | % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
|
|---|
| 7758 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
|
|---|
| 7759 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
|
|---|
| 7760 | \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
|
|---|
| 7761 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7762 | %
|
|---|
| 7763 | \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image
|
|---|
| 7764 | \endgroup}
|
|---|
| 7765 |
|
|---|
| 7766 |
|
|---|
| 7767 | % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
|
|---|
| 7768 | % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
|
|---|
| 7769 | % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
|
|---|
| 7770 | %
|
|---|
| 7771 | \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
|
|---|
| 7772 |
|
|---|
| 7773 | % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
|
|---|
| 7774 | \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
|
|---|
| 7775 |
|
|---|
| 7776 | % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
|
|---|
| 7777 | % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
|
|---|
| 7778 | % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
|
|---|
| 7779 | %
|
|---|
| 7780 | % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
|
|---|
| 7781 | % be referable.
|
|---|
| 7782 | %
|
|---|
| 7783 | % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
|
|---|
| 7784 | % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
|
|---|
| 7785 | %
|
|---|
| 7786 | % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
|
|---|
| 7787 | % chapter-level command.
|
|---|
| 7788 | \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
|
|---|
| 7789 | %
|
|---|
| 7790 | \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
|
|---|
| 7791 | \let\thiscaption=\empty
|
|---|
| 7792 | \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
|
|---|
| 7793 | %
|
|---|
| 7794 | % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
|
|---|
| 7795 | %
|
|---|
| 7796 | % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
|
|---|
| 7797 | % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
|
|---|
| 7798 | %
|
|---|
| 7799 | \startsavinginserts
|
|---|
| 7800 | %
|
|---|
| 7801 | % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
|
|---|
| 7802 | \par
|
|---|
| 7803 | %
|
|---|
| 7804 | \vtop\bgroup
|
|---|
| 7805 | \def\floattype{#1}%
|
|---|
| 7806 | \def\floatlabel{#2}%
|
|---|
| 7807 | \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
|
|---|
| 7808 | %
|
|---|
| 7809 | \ifx\floattype\empty
|
|---|
| 7810 | \let\safefloattype=\empty
|
|---|
| 7811 | \else
|
|---|
| 7812 | {%
|
|---|
| 7813 | % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
|
|---|
| 7814 | % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
|
|---|
| 7815 | \indexnofonts
|
|---|
| 7816 | \turnoffactive
|
|---|
| 7817 | \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
|
|---|
| 7818 | }%
|
|---|
| 7819 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7820 | %
|
|---|
| 7821 | % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
|
|---|
| 7822 | \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
|---|
| 7823 | % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
|
|---|
| 7824 | % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
|
|---|
| 7825 | %
|
|---|
| 7826 | \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
|
|---|
| 7827 | \global\advance\floatno by 1
|
|---|
| 7828 | %
|
|---|
| 7829 | {%
|
|---|
| 7830 | % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
|
|---|
| 7831 | % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
|
|---|
| 7832 | % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
|
|---|
| 7833 | % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
|
|---|
| 7834 | % lists of floats.
|
|---|
| 7835 | %
|
|---|
| 7836 | \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
|
|---|
| 7837 | \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
|
|---|
| 7838 | }%
|
|---|
| 7839 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7840 | %
|
|---|
| 7841 | % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
|
|---|
| 7842 | \vskip\parskip
|
|---|
| 7843 | %
|
|---|
| 7844 | % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
|
|---|
| 7845 | \restorefirstparagraphindent
|
|---|
| 7846 | }
|
|---|
| 7847 |
|
|---|
| 7848 | % we have these possibilities:
|
|---|
| 7849 | % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
|
|---|
| 7850 | % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
|
|---|
| 7851 | % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
|
|---|
| 7852 | % @float Foo & no caption: Foo
|
|---|
| 7853 | % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
|
|---|
| 7854 | % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
|
|---|
| 7855 | % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
|
|---|
| 7856 | % @float & no caption:
|
|---|
| 7857 | %
|
|---|
| 7858 | \def\Efloat{%
|
|---|
| 7859 | \let\floatident = \empty
|
|---|
| 7860 | %
|
|---|
| 7861 | % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
|
|---|
| 7862 | \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
|
|---|
| 7863 | %
|
|---|
| 7864 | % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
|
|---|
| 7865 | \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
|---|
| 7866 | \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
|
|---|
| 7867 | \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
|
|---|
| 7868 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7869 | % the number.
|
|---|
| 7870 | \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
|
|---|
| 7871 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7872 | %
|
|---|
| 7873 | % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
|
|---|
| 7874 | % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
|
|---|
| 7875 | \let\captionline = \floatident
|
|---|
| 7876 | %
|
|---|
| 7877 | \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
|
|---|
| 7878 | \ifx\floatident\empty \else
|
|---|
| 7879 | \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
|
|---|
| 7880 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7881 | %
|
|---|
| 7882 | % caption text.
|
|---|
| 7883 | \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
|
|---|
| 7884 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7885 | %
|
|---|
| 7886 | % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
|
|---|
| 7887 | % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
|
|---|
| 7888 | \ifx\captionline\empty \else
|
|---|
| 7889 | \vskip.5\parskip
|
|---|
| 7890 | \captionline
|
|---|
| 7891 | %
|
|---|
| 7892 | % Space below caption.
|
|---|
| 7893 | \vskip\parskip
|
|---|
| 7894 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7895 | %
|
|---|
| 7896 | % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
|
|---|
| 7897 | % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
|
|---|
| 7898 | \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
|---|
| 7899 | % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
|
|---|
| 7900 | % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
|
|---|
| 7901 | % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
|
|---|
| 7902 | {%
|
|---|
| 7903 | \atdummies
|
|---|
| 7904 | %
|
|---|
| 7905 | % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
|
|---|
| 7906 | % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
|
|---|
| 7907 | % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
|
|---|
| 7908 | \scanexp{%
|
|---|
| 7909 | \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
|
|---|
| 7910 | \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
|
|---|
| 7911 | \thiscaption
|
|---|
| 7912 | \else
|
|---|
| 7913 | \thisshortcaption
|
|---|
| 7914 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7915 | }%
|
|---|
| 7916 | }%
|
|---|
| 7917 | \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
|
|---|
| 7918 | \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
|
|---|
| 7919 | }%
|
|---|
| 7920 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7921 | \egroup % end of \vtop
|
|---|
| 7922 | %
|
|---|
| 7923 | % place the captured inserts
|
|---|
| 7924 | %
|
|---|
| 7925 | % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
|
|---|
| 7926 | % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
|
|---|
| 7927 | % float. --kasal, 26may04
|
|---|
| 7928 | %
|
|---|
| 7929 | \checkinserts
|
|---|
| 7930 | }
|
|---|
| 7931 |
|
|---|
| 7932 | % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
|
|---|
| 7933 | %
|
|---|
| 7934 | \def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 7935 | \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
|
|---|
| 7936 | }
|
|---|
| 7937 |
|
|---|
| 7938 | % @caption, @shortcaption
|
|---|
| 7939 | %
|
|---|
| 7940 | \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
|
|---|
| 7941 | \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
|
|---|
| 7942 | \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
|
|---|
| 7943 | \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
|
|---|
| 7944 |
|
|---|
| 7945 | % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
|
|---|
| 7946 | % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
|
|---|
| 7947 | \def\getfloatno#1{%
|
|---|
| 7948 | \ifx#1\relax
|
|---|
| 7949 | % Haven't seen this figure type before.
|
|---|
| 7950 | \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
|
|---|
| 7951 | %
|
|---|
| 7952 | % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
|
|---|
| 7953 | \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
|
|---|
| 7954 | \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
|
|---|
| 7955 | \fi
|
|---|
| 7956 | \let\floatno#1%
|
|---|
| 7957 | }
|
|---|
| 7958 |
|
|---|
| 7959 | % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
|
|---|
| 7960 | % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
|
|---|
| 7961 | % first read the @float command.
|
|---|
| 7962 | %
|
|---|
| 7963 | \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
|
|---|
| 7964 |
|
|---|
| 7965 | % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
|
|---|
| 7966 | % distinguish floats from other xref types.
|
|---|
| 7967 | \def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
|
|---|
| 7968 |
|
|---|
| 7969 | % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
|
|---|
| 7970 | % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
|
|---|
| 7971 | % \lastsection value which we \setref above.
|
|---|
| 7972 | %
|
|---|
| 7973 | \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
|
|---|
| 7974 | %
|
|---|
| 7975 | % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
|
|---|
| 7976 | % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
|
|---|
| 7977 | %
|
|---|
| 7978 | \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
|
|---|
| 7979 | \def\temp{#1}%
|
|---|
| 7980 | \def\iffloattype{#2}%
|
|---|
| 7981 | \ifx\temp\floatmagic
|
|---|
| 7982 | }
|
|---|
| 7983 |
|
|---|
| 7984 | % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
|
|---|
| 7985 | %
|
|---|
| 7986 | \parseargdef\listoffloats{%
|
|---|
| 7987 | \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
|
|---|
| 7988 | {%
|
|---|
| 7989 | % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
|
|---|
| 7990 | % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
|
|---|
| 7991 | \indexnofonts
|
|---|
| 7992 | \turnoffactive
|
|---|
| 7993 | \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
|
|---|
| 7994 | }%
|
|---|
| 7995 | %
|
|---|
| 7996 | % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
|
|---|
| 7997 | \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
|
|---|
| 7998 | \ifhavexrefs
|
|---|
| 7999 | % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
|
|---|
| 8000 | \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
|
|---|
| 8001 | \fi
|
|---|
| 8002 | \else
|
|---|
| 8003 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 8004 | \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
|
|---|
| 8005 | \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
|
|---|
| 8006 | \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
|
|---|
| 8007 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 8008 | \fi
|
|---|
| 8009 | }
|
|---|
| 8010 |
|
|---|
| 8011 | % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
|
|---|
| 8012 | % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
|
|---|
| 8013 | % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
|
|---|
| 8014 | % has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
|
|---|
| 8015 | %
|
|---|
| 8016 | % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
|
|---|
| 8017 | % they won't appear in the aux file).
|
|---|
| 8018 | %
|
|---|
| 8019 | \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
|
|---|
| 8020 | \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
|
|---|
| 8021 | % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
|
|---|
| 8022 | % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
|
|---|
| 8023 | % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
|
|---|
| 8024 | % in pdf output.
|
|---|
| 8025 | \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 8026 | %
|
|---|
| 8027 | % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
|
|---|
| 8028 | \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
|
|---|
| 8029 | \writeentry
|
|---|
| 8030 | }}
|
|---|
| 8031 |
|
|---|
| 8032 |
|
|---|
| 8033 | \message{localization,}
|
|---|
| 8034 |
|
|---|
| 8035 | % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
|
|---|
| 8036 | % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
|
|---|
| 8037 | % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
|
|---|
| 8038 | %
|
|---|
| 8039 | {
|
|---|
| 8040 | \catcode`\_ = \active
|
|---|
| 8041 | \globaldefs=1
|
|---|
| 8042 | \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
|
|---|
| 8043 | \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames
|
|---|
| 8044 | \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
|
|---|
| 8045 | % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
|
|---|
| 8046 | \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
|
|---|
| 8047 | \ifeof 1
|
|---|
| 8048 | \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
|
|---|
| 8049 | \else
|
|---|
| 8050 | \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
|
|---|
| 8051 | \input txi-#1.tex
|
|---|
| 8052 | \fi
|
|---|
| 8053 | \closein 1
|
|---|
| 8054 | \endgroup % end raw TeX
|
|---|
| 8055 | \endgroup}
|
|---|
| 8056 | %
|
|---|
| 8057 | % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
|
|---|
| 8058 | % try txi-de.tex.
|
|---|
| 8059 | %
|
|---|
| 8060 | \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
|
|---|
| 8061 | \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
|
|---|
| 8062 | \ifeof 1
|
|---|
| 8063 | \errhelp = \nolanghelp
|
|---|
| 8064 | \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
|
|---|
| 8065 | \else
|
|---|
| 8066 | \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
|
|---|
| 8067 | \input txi-#1.tex
|
|---|
| 8068 | \fi
|
|---|
| 8069 | \closein 1
|
|---|
| 8070 | }
|
|---|
| 8071 | }% end of special _ catcode
|
|---|
| 8072 | %
|
|---|
| 8073 | \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
|
|---|
| 8074 | is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
|
|---|
| 8075 | directory should work if nowhere else does.}
|
|---|
| 8076 |
|
|---|
| 8077 | % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
|
|---|
| 8078 | % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
|
|---|
| 8079 | % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
|
|---|
| 8080 | %
|
|---|
| 8081 | % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
|
|---|
| 8082 | % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
|
|---|
| 8083 | % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
|
|---|
| 8084 | %
|
|---|
| 8085 | % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
|
|---|
| 8086 | % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
|
|---|
| 8087 | % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
|
|---|
| 8088 | % accented characters problem.)
|
|---|
| 8089 | %
|
|---|
| 8090 | \catcode`@=11
|
|---|
| 8091 | \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
|
|---|
| 8092 | % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
|
|---|
| 8093 | \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
|
|---|
| 8094 | \message{no patterns for #1}%
|
|---|
| 8095 | \else
|
|---|
| 8096 | \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
|
|---|
| 8097 | \fi
|
|---|
| 8098 | % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
|
|---|
| 8099 | \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
|
|---|
| 8100 | \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
|
|---|
| 8101 | }
|
|---|
| 8102 |
|
|---|
| 8103 | % Helpers for encodings.
|
|---|
| 8104 | % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
|
|---|
| 8105 | %
|
|---|
| 8106 | \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
|
|---|
| 8107 | \count255=128
|
|---|
| 8108 | \loop\ifnum\count255<256
|
|---|
| 8109 | \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
|
|---|
| 8110 | \advance\count255 by 1
|
|---|
| 8111 | \repeat
|
|---|
| 8112 | }
|
|---|
| 8113 |
|
|---|
| 8114 | \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
|
|---|
| 8115 | \count255=128
|
|---|
| 8116 | \loop\ifnum\count255<256
|
|---|
| 8117 | \catcode\count255=#1\relax
|
|---|
| 8118 | \advance\count255 by 1
|
|---|
| 8119 | \repeat
|
|---|
| 8120 | }
|
|---|
| 8121 |
|
|---|
| 8122 | % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
|
|---|
| 8123 | % according to the specified encoding.
|
|---|
| 8124 | %
|
|---|
| 8125 | \parseargdef\documentencoding{%
|
|---|
| 8126 | % Encoding being declared for the document.
|
|---|
| 8127 | \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 8128 | %
|
|---|
| 8129 | % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
|
|---|
| 8130 | % to compare them with \ifx.
|
|---|
| 8131 | \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 8132 | \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 8133 | \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 8134 | \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 8135 | \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 8136 | %
|
|---|
| 8137 | \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
|
|---|
| 8138 | \asciichardefs
|
|---|
| 8139 | %
|
|---|
| 8140 | \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
|
|---|
| 8141 | \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
|---|
| 8142 | \lattwochardefs
|
|---|
| 8143 | %
|
|---|
| 8144 | \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
|
|---|
| 8145 | \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
|---|
| 8146 | \latonechardefs
|
|---|
| 8147 | %
|
|---|
| 8148 | \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
|
|---|
| 8149 | \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
|---|
| 8150 | \latninechardefs
|
|---|
| 8151 | %
|
|---|
| 8152 | \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
|
|---|
| 8153 | \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
|---|
| 8154 | \utfeightchardefs
|
|---|
| 8155 | %
|
|---|
| 8156 | \else
|
|---|
| 8157 | \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
|
|---|
| 8158 | %
|
|---|
| 8159 | \fi % utfeight
|
|---|
| 8160 | \fi % latnine
|
|---|
| 8161 | \fi % latone
|
|---|
| 8162 | \fi % lattwo
|
|---|
| 8163 | \fi % ascii
|
|---|
| 8164 | }
|
|---|
| 8165 |
|
|---|
| 8166 | % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
|
|---|
| 8167 | % the default font encoding (OT1).
|
|---|
| 8168 | %
|
|---|
| 8169 | \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
|
|---|
| 8170 |
|
|---|
| 8171 | % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
|
|---|
| 8172 | \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
|
|---|
| 8173 |
|
|---|
| 8174 | % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
|
|---|
| 8175 | % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
|
|---|
| 8176 | % macros containing the character definitions.
|
|---|
| 8177 | \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
|---|
| 8178 | %
|
|---|
| 8179 | % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
|
|---|
| 8180 | \def\latonechardefs{%
|
|---|
| 8181 | \gdef^^a0{~}
|
|---|
| 8182 | \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
|
|---|
| 8183 | \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
|
|---|
| 8184 | \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
|
|---|
| 8185 | \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
|
|---|
| 8186 | \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
|
|---|
| 8187 | \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
|
|---|
| 8188 | \gdef^^a7{\S}
|
|---|
| 8189 | \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
|
|---|
| 8190 | \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
|
|---|
| 8191 | \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
|
|---|
| 8192 | \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
|
|---|
| 8193 | \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
|
|---|
| 8194 | \gdef^^ad{\-}
|
|---|
| 8195 | \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
|
|---|
| 8196 | \gdef^^af{\={}}
|
|---|
| 8197 | %
|
|---|
| 8198 | \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
|
|---|
| 8199 | \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
|
|---|
| 8200 | \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
|
|---|
| 8201 | \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
|
|---|
| 8202 | \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
|
|---|
| 8203 | \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
|
|---|
| 8204 | \gdef^^b6{\P}
|
|---|
| 8205 | %
|
|---|
| 8206 | \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
|
|---|
| 8207 | \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
|
|---|
| 8208 | \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
|
|---|
| 8209 | \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
|
|---|
| 8210 | %
|
|---|
| 8211 | \gdef^^bb{\guilletright}
|
|---|
| 8212 | \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
|
|---|
| 8213 | \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
|
|---|
| 8214 | \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
|
|---|
| 8215 | \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
|
|---|
| 8216 | %
|
|---|
| 8217 | \gdef^^c0{\`A}
|
|---|
| 8218 | \gdef^^c1{\'A}
|
|---|
| 8219 | \gdef^^c2{\^A}
|
|---|
| 8220 | \gdef^^c3{\~A}
|
|---|
| 8221 | \gdef^^c4{\"A}
|
|---|
| 8222 | \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
|
|---|
| 8223 | \gdef^^c6{\AE}
|
|---|
| 8224 | \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
|
|---|
| 8225 | \gdef^^c8{\`E}
|
|---|
| 8226 | \gdef^^c9{\'E}
|
|---|
| 8227 | \gdef^^ca{\^E}
|
|---|
| 8228 | \gdef^^cb{\"E}
|
|---|
| 8229 | \gdef^^cc{\`I}
|
|---|
| 8230 | \gdef^^cd{\'I}
|
|---|
| 8231 | \gdef^^ce{\^I}
|
|---|
| 8232 | \gdef^^cf{\"I}
|
|---|
| 8233 | %
|
|---|
| 8234 | \gdef^^d0{\DH}
|
|---|
| 8235 | \gdef^^d1{\~N}
|
|---|
| 8236 | \gdef^^d2{\`O}
|
|---|
| 8237 | \gdef^^d3{\'O}
|
|---|
| 8238 | \gdef^^d4{\^O}
|
|---|
| 8239 | \gdef^^d5{\~O}
|
|---|
| 8240 | \gdef^^d6{\"O}
|
|---|
| 8241 | \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
|
|---|
| 8242 | \gdef^^d8{\O}
|
|---|
| 8243 | \gdef^^d9{\`U}
|
|---|
| 8244 | \gdef^^da{\'U}
|
|---|
| 8245 | \gdef^^db{\^U}
|
|---|
| 8246 | \gdef^^dc{\"U}
|
|---|
| 8247 | \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
|
|---|
| 8248 | \gdef^^de{\TH}
|
|---|
| 8249 | \gdef^^df{\ss}
|
|---|
| 8250 | %
|
|---|
| 8251 | \gdef^^e0{\`a}
|
|---|
| 8252 | \gdef^^e1{\'a}
|
|---|
| 8253 | \gdef^^e2{\^a}
|
|---|
| 8254 | \gdef^^e3{\~a}
|
|---|
| 8255 | \gdef^^e4{\"a}
|
|---|
| 8256 | \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
|
|---|
| 8257 | \gdef^^e6{\ae}
|
|---|
| 8258 | \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
|
|---|
| 8259 | \gdef^^e8{\`e}
|
|---|
| 8260 | \gdef^^e9{\'e}
|
|---|
| 8261 | \gdef^^ea{\^e}
|
|---|
| 8262 | \gdef^^eb{\"e}
|
|---|
| 8263 | \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
|
|---|
| 8264 | \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
|
|---|
| 8265 | \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
|
|---|
| 8266 | \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
|
|---|
| 8267 | %
|
|---|
| 8268 | \gdef^^f0{\dh}
|
|---|
| 8269 | \gdef^^f1{\~n}
|
|---|
| 8270 | \gdef^^f2{\`o}
|
|---|
| 8271 | \gdef^^f3{\'o}
|
|---|
| 8272 | \gdef^^f4{\^o}
|
|---|
| 8273 | \gdef^^f5{\~o}
|
|---|
| 8274 | \gdef^^f6{\"o}
|
|---|
| 8275 | \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
|
|---|
| 8276 | \gdef^^f8{\o}
|
|---|
| 8277 | \gdef^^f9{\`u}
|
|---|
| 8278 | \gdef^^fa{\'u}
|
|---|
| 8279 | \gdef^^fb{\^u}
|
|---|
| 8280 | \gdef^^fc{\"u}
|
|---|
| 8281 | \gdef^^fd{\'y}
|
|---|
| 8282 | \gdef^^fe{\th}
|
|---|
| 8283 | \gdef^^ff{\"y}
|
|---|
| 8284 | }
|
|---|
| 8285 |
|
|---|
| 8286 | % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
|
|---|
| 8287 | \def\latninechardefs{%
|
|---|
| 8288 | % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
|
|---|
| 8289 | \latonechardefs
|
|---|
| 8290 | %
|
|---|
| 8291 | \gdef^^a4{\euro}
|
|---|
| 8292 | \gdef^^a6{\v S}
|
|---|
| 8293 | \gdef^^a8{\v s}
|
|---|
| 8294 | \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
|
|---|
| 8295 | \gdef^^b8{\v z}
|
|---|
| 8296 | \gdef^^bc{\OE}
|
|---|
| 8297 | \gdef^^bd{\oe}
|
|---|
| 8298 | \gdef^^be{\"Y}
|
|---|
| 8299 | }
|
|---|
| 8300 |
|
|---|
| 8301 | % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
|
|---|
| 8302 | \def\lattwochardefs{%
|
|---|
| 8303 | \gdef^^a0{~}
|
|---|
| 8304 | \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
|
|---|
| 8305 | \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
|
|---|
| 8306 | \gdef^^a3{\L}
|
|---|
| 8307 | \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
|
|---|
| 8308 | \gdef^^a5{\v L}
|
|---|
| 8309 | \gdef^^a6{\'S}
|
|---|
| 8310 | \gdef^^a7{\S}
|
|---|
| 8311 | \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
|
|---|
| 8312 | \gdef^^a9{\v S}
|
|---|
| 8313 | \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
|
|---|
| 8314 | \gdef^^ab{\v T}
|
|---|
| 8315 | \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
|
|---|
| 8316 | \gdef^^ad{\-}
|
|---|
| 8317 | \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
|
|---|
| 8318 | \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
|
|---|
| 8319 | %
|
|---|
| 8320 | \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
|
|---|
| 8321 | \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
|
|---|
| 8322 | \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
|
|---|
| 8323 | \gdef^^b3{\l}
|
|---|
| 8324 | \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
|
|---|
| 8325 | \gdef^^b5{\v l}
|
|---|
| 8326 | \gdef^^b6{\'s}
|
|---|
| 8327 | \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
|
|---|
| 8328 | \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
|
|---|
| 8329 | \gdef^^b9{\v s}
|
|---|
| 8330 | \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
|
|---|
| 8331 | \gdef^^bb{\v t}
|
|---|
| 8332 | \gdef^^bc{\'z}
|
|---|
| 8333 | \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
|
|---|
| 8334 | \gdef^^be{\v z}
|
|---|
| 8335 | \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
|
|---|
| 8336 | %
|
|---|
| 8337 | \gdef^^c0{\'R}
|
|---|
| 8338 | \gdef^^c1{\'A}
|
|---|
| 8339 | \gdef^^c2{\^A}
|
|---|
| 8340 | \gdef^^c3{\u A}
|
|---|
| 8341 | \gdef^^c4{\"A}
|
|---|
| 8342 | \gdef^^c5{\'L}
|
|---|
| 8343 | \gdef^^c6{\'C}
|
|---|
| 8344 | \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
|
|---|
| 8345 | \gdef^^c8{\v C}
|
|---|
| 8346 | \gdef^^c9{\'E}
|
|---|
| 8347 | \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
|
|---|
| 8348 | \gdef^^cb{\"E}
|
|---|
| 8349 | \gdef^^cc{\v E}
|
|---|
| 8350 | \gdef^^cd{\'I}
|
|---|
| 8351 | \gdef^^ce{\^I}
|
|---|
| 8352 | \gdef^^cf{\v D}
|
|---|
| 8353 | %
|
|---|
| 8354 | \gdef^^d0{\DH}
|
|---|
| 8355 | \gdef^^d1{\'N}
|
|---|
| 8356 | \gdef^^d2{\v N}
|
|---|
| 8357 | \gdef^^d3{\'O}
|
|---|
| 8358 | \gdef^^d4{\^O}
|
|---|
| 8359 | \gdef^^d5{\H O}
|
|---|
| 8360 | \gdef^^d6{\"O}
|
|---|
| 8361 | \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
|
|---|
| 8362 | \gdef^^d8{\v R}
|
|---|
| 8363 | \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
|
|---|
| 8364 | \gdef^^da{\'U}
|
|---|
| 8365 | \gdef^^db{\H U}
|
|---|
| 8366 | \gdef^^dc{\"U}
|
|---|
| 8367 | \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
|
|---|
| 8368 | \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
|
|---|
| 8369 | \gdef^^df{\ss}
|
|---|
| 8370 | %
|
|---|
| 8371 | \gdef^^e0{\'r}
|
|---|
| 8372 | \gdef^^e1{\'a}
|
|---|
| 8373 | \gdef^^e2{\^a}
|
|---|
| 8374 | \gdef^^e3{\u a}
|
|---|
| 8375 | \gdef^^e4{\"a}
|
|---|
| 8376 | \gdef^^e5{\'l}
|
|---|
| 8377 | \gdef^^e6{\'c}
|
|---|
| 8378 | \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
|
|---|
| 8379 | \gdef^^e8{\v c}
|
|---|
| 8380 | \gdef^^e9{\'e}
|
|---|
| 8381 | \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
|
|---|
| 8382 | \gdef^^eb{\"e}
|
|---|
| 8383 | \gdef^^ec{\v e}
|
|---|
| 8384 | \gdef^^ed{\'\i}
|
|---|
| 8385 | \gdef^^ee{\^\i}
|
|---|
| 8386 | \gdef^^ef{\v d}
|
|---|
| 8387 | %
|
|---|
| 8388 | \gdef^^f0{\dh}
|
|---|
| 8389 | \gdef^^f1{\'n}
|
|---|
| 8390 | \gdef^^f2{\v n}
|
|---|
| 8391 | \gdef^^f3{\'o}
|
|---|
| 8392 | \gdef^^f4{\^o}
|
|---|
| 8393 | \gdef^^f5{\H o}
|
|---|
| 8394 | \gdef^^f6{\"o}
|
|---|
| 8395 | \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
|
|---|
| 8396 | \gdef^^f8{\v r}
|
|---|
| 8397 | \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
|
|---|
| 8398 | \gdef^^fa{\'u}
|
|---|
| 8399 | \gdef^^fb{\H u}
|
|---|
| 8400 | \gdef^^fc{\"u}
|
|---|
| 8401 | \gdef^^fd{\'y}
|
|---|
| 8402 | \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
|
|---|
| 8403 | \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
|
|---|
| 8404 | }
|
|---|
| 8405 |
|
|---|
| 8406 | % UTF-8 character definitions.
|
|---|
| 8407 | %
|
|---|
| 8408 | % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
|
|---|
| 8409 | % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
|
|---|
| 8410 | % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
|
|---|
| 8411 | %
|
|---|
| 8412 | \newcount\countUTFx
|
|---|
| 8413 | \newcount\countUTFy
|
|---|
| 8414 | \newcount\countUTFz
|
|---|
| 8415 |
|
|---|
| 8416 | \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
|
|---|
| 8417 | \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
|
|---|
| 8418 | %
|
|---|
| 8419 | \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
|
|---|
| 8420 | \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
|
|---|
| 8421 | %
|
|---|
| 8422 | \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
|
|---|
| 8423 | \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
|
|---|
| 8424 |
|
|---|
| 8425 | \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
|
|---|
| 8426 | \ifx #1\relax
|
|---|
| 8427 | \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
|
|---|
| 8428 | \else
|
|---|
| 8429 | \expandafter #1%
|
|---|
| 8430 | \fi
|
|---|
| 8431 | }
|
|---|
| 8432 |
|
|---|
| 8433 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 8434 | \catcode`\~13
|
|---|
| 8435 | \catcode`\"12
|
|---|
| 8436 |
|
|---|
| 8437 | \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
|
|---|
| 8438 | \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
|
|---|
| 8439 | \uccode`\~\countUTFx
|
|---|
| 8440 | \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
|
|---|
| 8441 | \advance\countUTFx by 1
|
|---|
| 8442 | \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
|
|---|
| 8443 | \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
|
|---|
| 8444 | \fi}
|
|---|
| 8445 |
|
|---|
| 8446 | \countUTFx = "C2
|
|---|
| 8447 | \countUTFy = "E0
|
|---|
| 8448 | \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
|---|
| 8449 | \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
|
|---|
| 8450 | \UTFviiiLoop
|
|---|
| 8451 |
|
|---|
| 8452 | \countUTFx = "E0
|
|---|
| 8453 | \countUTFy = "F0
|
|---|
| 8454 | \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
|---|
| 8455 | \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
|
|---|
| 8456 | \UTFviiiLoop
|
|---|
| 8457 |
|
|---|
| 8458 | \countUTFx = "F0
|
|---|
| 8459 | \countUTFy = "F4
|
|---|
| 8460 | \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
|---|
| 8461 | \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
|
|---|
| 8462 | \UTFviiiLoop
|
|---|
| 8463 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 8464 |
|
|---|
| 8465 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 8466 | \catcode`\"=12
|
|---|
| 8467 | \catcode`\<=12
|
|---|
| 8468 | \catcode`\.=12
|
|---|
| 8469 | \catcode`\,=12
|
|---|
| 8470 | \catcode`\;=12
|
|---|
| 8471 | \catcode`\!=12
|
|---|
| 8472 | \catcode`\~=13
|
|---|
| 8473 |
|
|---|
| 8474 | \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
|
|---|
| 8475 | \countUTFz = "#1\relax
|
|---|
| 8476 | \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
|
|---|
| 8477 | \begingroup
|
|---|
| 8478 | \parseXMLCharref
|
|---|
| 8479 | \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
|
|---|
| 8480 | \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 8481 | \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
|
|---|
| 8482 | \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 8483 | \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
|
|---|
| 8484 | \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
|
|---|
| 8485 | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
|
|---|
| 8486 | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
|
|---|
| 8487 | \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
|
|---|
| 8488 | \endgroup}
|
|---|
| 8489 |
|
|---|
| 8490 | \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
|
|---|
| 8491 | \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
|
|---|
| 8492 | \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|---|
| 8493 | \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
|
|---|
| 8494 | \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
|
|---|
| 8495 | \parseUTFviiiA,%
|
|---|
| 8496 | \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
|
|---|
| 8497 | \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
|
|---|
| 8498 | \parseUTFviiiA;%
|
|---|
| 8499 | \parseUTFviiiA,%
|
|---|
| 8500 | \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
|
|---|
| 8501 | \else
|
|---|
| 8502 | \parseUTFviiiA;%
|
|---|
| 8503 | \parseUTFviiiA,%
|
|---|
| 8504 | \parseUTFviiiA!%
|
|---|
| 8505 | \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
|
|---|
| 8506 | \fi\fi\fi
|
|---|
| 8507 | }
|
|---|
| 8508 |
|
|---|
| 8509 | \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
|
|---|
| 8510 | \countUTFx = \countUTFz
|
|---|
| 8511 | \divide\countUTFz by 64
|
|---|
| 8512 | \countUTFy = \countUTFz
|
|---|
| 8513 | \multiply\countUTFz by 64
|
|---|
| 8514 | \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
|
|---|
| 8515 | \advance\countUTFx by 128
|
|---|
| 8516 | \uccode `#1\countUTFx
|
|---|
| 8517 | \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
|
|---|
| 8518 |
|
|---|
| 8519 | \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
|
|---|
| 8520 | \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
|
|---|
| 8521 | \uccode `#3\countUTFz
|
|---|
| 8522 | \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
|
|---|
| 8523 | \endgroup
|
|---|
| 8524 |
|
|---|
| 8525 | \def\utfeightchardefs{%
|
|---|
| 8526 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
|
|---|
| 8527 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
|
|---|
| 8528 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
|
|---|
| 8529 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
|
|---|
| 8530 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
|
|---|
| 8531 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
|
|---|
| 8532 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
|
|---|
| 8533 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
|
|---|
| 8534 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
|
|---|
| 8535 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
|
|---|
| 8536 |
|
|---|
| 8537 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
|
|---|
| 8538 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
|
|---|
| 8539 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
|
|---|
| 8540 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
|
|---|
| 8541 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
|
|---|
| 8542 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
|
|---|
| 8543 |
|
|---|
| 8544 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
|
|---|
| 8545 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
|
|---|
| 8546 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
|
|---|
| 8547 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
|
|---|
| 8548 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
|
|---|
| 8549 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
|
|---|
| 8550 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
|
|---|
| 8551 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
|
|---|
| 8552 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
|
|---|
| 8553 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
|
|---|
| 8554 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
|
|---|
| 8555 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
|
|---|
| 8556 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
|
|---|
| 8557 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
|
|---|
| 8558 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
|
|---|
| 8559 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
|
|---|
| 8560 |
|
|---|
| 8561 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
|
|---|
| 8562 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
|
|---|
| 8563 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
|
|---|
| 8564 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
|
|---|
| 8565 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
|
|---|
| 8566 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
|
|---|
| 8567 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
|
|---|
| 8568 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
|
|---|
| 8569 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
|
|---|
| 8570 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
|
|---|
| 8571 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
|
|---|
| 8572 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
|
|---|
| 8573 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
|
|---|
| 8574 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
|
|---|
| 8575 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
|
|---|
| 8576 |
|
|---|
| 8577 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
|
|---|
| 8578 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
|
|---|
| 8579 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
|
|---|
| 8580 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
|
|---|
| 8581 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
|
|---|
| 8582 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
|
|---|
| 8583 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
|
|---|
| 8584 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
|
|---|
| 8585 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
|
|---|
| 8586 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
|
|---|
| 8587 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
|
|---|
| 8588 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
|
|---|
| 8589 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
|
|---|
| 8590 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
|
|---|
| 8591 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
|
|---|
| 8592 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
|
|---|
| 8593 |
|
|---|
| 8594 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
|
|---|
| 8595 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
|
|---|
| 8596 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
|
|---|
| 8597 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
|
|---|
| 8598 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
|
|---|
| 8599 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
|
|---|
| 8600 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
|
|---|
| 8601 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
|
|---|
| 8602 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
|
|---|
| 8603 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
|
|---|
| 8604 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
|
|---|
| 8605 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
|
|---|
| 8606 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
|
|---|
| 8607 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
|
|---|
| 8608 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
|
|---|
| 8609 |
|
|---|
| 8610 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
|
|---|
| 8611 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
|
|---|
| 8612 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
|
|---|
| 8613 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
|
|---|
| 8614 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
|
|---|
| 8615 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
|
|---|
| 8616 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
|
|---|
| 8617 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
|
|---|
| 8618 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
|
|---|
| 8619 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
|
|---|
| 8620 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
|
|---|
| 8621 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
|
|---|
| 8622 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
|
|---|
| 8623 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
|
|---|
| 8624 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
|
|---|
| 8625 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
|
|---|
| 8626 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
|
|---|
| 8627 |
|
|---|
| 8628 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
|
|---|
| 8629 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
|
|---|
| 8630 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
|
|---|
| 8631 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
|
|---|
| 8632 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
|
|---|
| 8633 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
|
|---|
| 8634 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
|
|---|
| 8635 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
|
|---|
| 8636 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
|
|---|
| 8637 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
|
|---|
| 8638 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
|
|---|
| 8639 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
|
|---|
| 8640 |
|
|---|
| 8641 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
|
|---|
| 8642 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
|
|---|
| 8643 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
|
|---|
| 8644 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
|
|---|
| 8645 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
|
|---|
| 8646 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
|
|---|
| 8647 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
|
|---|
| 8648 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
|
|---|
| 8649 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
|
|---|
| 8650 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
|
|---|
| 8651 |
|
|---|
| 8652 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
|
|---|
| 8653 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
|
|---|
| 8654 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
|
|---|
| 8655 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
|
|---|
| 8656 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
|
|---|
| 8657 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
|
|---|
| 8658 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
|
|---|
| 8659 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
|
|---|
| 8660 |
|
|---|
| 8661 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
|
|---|
| 8662 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
|
|---|
| 8663 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
|
|---|
| 8664 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
|
|---|
| 8665 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
|
|---|
| 8666 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
|
|---|
| 8667 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
|
|---|
| 8668 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
|
|---|
| 8669 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
|
|---|
| 8670 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
|
|---|
| 8671 |
|
|---|
| 8672 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
|
|---|
| 8673 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
|
|---|
| 8674 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
|
|---|
| 8675 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
|
|---|
| 8676 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
|
|---|
| 8677 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
|
|---|
| 8678 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
|
|---|
| 8679 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
|
|---|
| 8680 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
|
|---|
| 8681 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
|
|---|
| 8682 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
|
|---|
| 8683 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
|
|---|
| 8684 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
|
|---|
| 8685 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
|
|---|
| 8686 |
|
|---|
| 8687 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
|
|---|
| 8688 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
|
|---|
| 8689 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
|
|---|
| 8690 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
|
|---|
| 8691 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
|
|---|
| 8692 |
|
|---|
| 8693 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
|
|---|
| 8694 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
|
|---|
| 8695 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
|
|---|
| 8696 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
|
|---|
| 8697 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
|
|---|
| 8698 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
|
|---|
| 8699 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
|
|---|
| 8700 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
|
|---|
| 8701 |
|
|---|
| 8702 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
|
|---|
| 8703 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
|
|---|
| 8704 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
|
|---|
| 8705 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
|
|---|
| 8706 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
|
|---|
| 8707 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
|
|---|
| 8708 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
|
|---|
| 8709 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
|
|---|
| 8710 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
|
|---|
| 8711 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
|
|---|
| 8712 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
|
|---|
| 8713 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
|
|---|
| 8714 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
|
|---|
| 8715 |
|
|---|
| 8716 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
|
|---|
| 8717 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
|
|---|
| 8718 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
|
|---|
| 8719 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
|
|---|
| 8720 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
|
|---|
| 8721 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
|
|---|
| 8722 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
|
|---|
| 8723 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
|
|---|
| 8724 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
|
|---|
| 8725 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
|
|---|
| 8726 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
|
|---|
| 8727 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
|
|---|
| 8728 |
|
|---|
| 8729 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
|
|---|
| 8730 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
|
|---|
| 8731 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
|
|---|
| 8732 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
|
|---|
| 8733 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
|
|---|
| 8734 |
|
|---|
| 8735 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
|
|---|
| 8736 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
|
|---|
| 8737 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
|
|---|
| 8738 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
|
|---|
| 8739 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
|
|---|
| 8740 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
|
|---|
| 8741 |
|
|---|
| 8742 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
|
|---|
| 8743 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
|
|---|
| 8744 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
|
|---|
| 8745 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
|
|---|
| 8746 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
|
|---|
| 8747 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
|
|---|
| 8748 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
|
|---|
| 8749 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
|
|---|
| 8750 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
|
|---|
| 8751 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
|
|---|
| 8752 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
|
|---|
| 8753 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
|
|---|
| 8754 |
|
|---|
| 8755 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
|
|---|
| 8756 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
|
|---|
| 8757 |
|
|---|
| 8758 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
|
|---|
| 8759 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
|
|---|
| 8760 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
|
|---|
| 8761 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
|
|---|
| 8762 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
|
|---|
| 8763 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
|
|---|
| 8764 |
|
|---|
| 8765 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
|
|---|
| 8766 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
|
|---|
| 8767 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
|
|---|
| 8768 |
|
|---|
| 8769 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
|
|---|
| 8770 |
|
|---|
| 8771 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
|
|---|
| 8772 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
|
|---|
| 8773 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
|
|---|
| 8774 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
|
|---|
| 8775 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
|
|---|
| 8776 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
|
|---|
| 8777 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
|
|---|
| 8778 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
|
|---|
| 8779 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
|
|---|
| 8780 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
|
|---|
| 8781 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
|
|---|
| 8782 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
|
|---|
| 8783 |
|
|---|
| 8784 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
|
|---|
| 8785 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
|
|---|
| 8786 |
|
|---|
| 8787 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
|
|---|
| 8788 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
|
|---|
| 8789 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
|
|---|
| 8790 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
|
|---|
| 8791 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
|
|---|
| 8792 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
|
|---|
| 8793 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
|
|---|
| 8794 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
|
|---|
| 8795 |
|
|---|
| 8796 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
|
|---|
| 8797 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
|
|---|
| 8798 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
|
|---|
| 8799 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
|
|---|
| 8800 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
|
|---|
| 8801 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
|
|---|
| 8802 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
|
|---|
| 8803 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
|
|---|
| 8804 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
|
|---|
| 8805 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
|
|---|
| 8806 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
|
|---|
| 8807 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
|
|---|
| 8808 |
|
|---|
| 8809 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
|
|---|
| 8810 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
|
|---|
| 8811 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
|
|---|
| 8812 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
|
|---|
| 8813 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
|
|---|
| 8814 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
|
|---|
| 8815 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
|
|---|
| 8816 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
|
|---|
| 8817 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
|
|---|
| 8818 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
|
|---|
| 8819 |
|
|---|
| 8820 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
|
|---|
| 8821 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
|
|---|
| 8822 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
|
|---|
| 8823 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
|
|---|
| 8824 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
|
|---|
| 8825 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
|
|---|
| 8826 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
|
|---|
| 8827 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
|
|---|
| 8828 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
|
|---|
| 8829 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
|
|---|
| 8830 |
|
|---|
| 8831 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
|
|---|
| 8832 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
|
|---|
| 8833 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
|
|---|
| 8834 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
|
|---|
| 8835 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
|
|---|
| 8836 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
|
|---|
| 8837 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
|
|---|
| 8838 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
|
|---|
| 8839 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
|
|---|
| 8840 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
|
|---|
| 8841 |
|
|---|
| 8842 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
|
|---|
| 8843 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
|
|---|
| 8844 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
|
|---|
| 8845 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
|
|---|
| 8846 |
|
|---|
| 8847 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
|
|---|
| 8848 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
|
|---|
| 8849 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
|
|---|
| 8850 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
|
|---|
| 8851 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
|
|---|
| 8852 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
|
|---|
| 8853 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
|
|---|
| 8854 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
|
|---|
| 8855 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
|
|---|
| 8856 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
|
|---|
| 8857 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
|
|---|
| 8858 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
|
|---|
| 8859 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
|
|---|
| 8860 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
|
|---|
| 8861 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
|
|---|
| 8862 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
|
|---|
| 8863 |
|
|---|
| 8864 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
|
|---|
| 8865 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
|
|---|
| 8866 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
|
|---|
| 8867 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
|
|---|
| 8868 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
|
|---|
| 8869 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
|
|---|
| 8870 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
|
|---|
| 8871 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
|
|---|
| 8872 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
|
|---|
| 8873 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
|
|---|
| 8874 |
|
|---|
| 8875 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
|
|---|
| 8876 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
|
|---|
| 8877 |
|
|---|
| 8878 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
|
|---|
| 8879 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
|
|---|
| 8880 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
|
|---|
| 8881 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
|
|---|
| 8882 |
|
|---|
| 8883 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
|
|---|
| 8884 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
|
|---|
| 8885 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
|
|---|
| 8886 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
|
|---|
| 8887 |
|
|---|
| 8888 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
|
|---|
| 8889 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
|
|---|
| 8890 |
|
|---|
| 8891 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
|
|---|
| 8892 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
|
|---|
| 8893 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
|
|---|
| 8894 |
|
|---|
| 8895 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
|
|---|
| 8896 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
|
|---|
| 8897 |
|
|---|
| 8898 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
|
|---|
| 8899 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
|
|---|
| 8900 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
|
|---|
| 8901 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
|
|---|
| 8902 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
|
|---|
| 8903 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
|
|---|
| 8904 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
|
|---|
| 8905 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
|
|---|
| 8906 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
|
|---|
| 8907 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
|
|---|
| 8908 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
|
|---|
| 8909 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
|
|---|
| 8910 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
|
|---|
| 8911 |
|
|---|
| 8912 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
|
|---|
| 8913 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
|
|---|
| 8914 |
|
|---|
| 8915 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
|
|---|
| 8916 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
|
|---|
| 8917 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
|
|---|
| 8918 | }% end of \utfeightchardefs
|
|---|
| 8919 |
|
|---|
| 8920 |
|
|---|
| 8921 | % US-ASCII character definitions.
|
|---|
| 8922 | \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
|
|---|
| 8923 | \relax
|
|---|
| 8924 | }
|
|---|
| 8925 |
|
|---|
| 8926 | % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
|
|---|
| 8927 | % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
|
|---|
| 8928 | % document encoding.
|
|---|
| 8929 | %
|
|---|
| 8930 | \setnonasciicharscatcode \other
|
|---|
| 8931 |
|
|---|
| 8932 |
|
|---|
| 8933 | \message{formatting,}
|
|---|
| 8934 |
|
|---|
| 8935 | \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
|
|---|
| 8936 |
|
|---|
| 8937 | \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
|---|
| 8938 | \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
|
|---|
| 8939 | \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
|
|---|
| 8940 |
|
|---|
| 8941 | % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
|
|---|
| 8942 | \vbadness = 10000
|
|---|
| 8943 |
|
|---|
| 8944 | % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
|
|---|
| 8945 | \hbadness = 6666
|
|---|
| 8946 |
|
|---|
| 8947 | % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
|
|---|
| 8948 | \widowpenalty=10000
|
|---|
| 8949 | \clubpenalty=10000
|
|---|
| 8950 |
|
|---|
| 8951 | % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
|
|---|
| 8952 | % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
|
|---|
| 8953 | % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
|
|---|
| 8954 | % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
|
|---|
| 8955 | %
|
|---|
| 8956 | \def\setemergencystretch{%
|
|---|
| 8957 | \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
|
|---|
| 8958 | % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
|
|---|
| 8959 | \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
|
|---|
| 8960 | \else
|
|---|
| 8961 | \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
|
|---|
| 8962 | \fi
|
|---|
| 8963 | }
|
|---|
| 8964 |
|
|---|
| 8965 | % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
|
|---|
| 8966 | % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
|
|---|
| 8967 | % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
|
|---|
| 8968 | %
|
|---|
| 8969 | % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
|
|---|
| 8970 | % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
|
|---|
| 8971 | %
|
|---|
| 8972 | \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
|
|---|
| 8973 | \voffset = #3\relax
|
|---|
| 8974 | \topskip = #6\relax
|
|---|
| 8975 | \splittopskip = \topskip
|
|---|
| 8976 | %
|
|---|
| 8977 | \vsize = #1\relax
|
|---|
| 8978 | \advance\vsize by \topskip
|
|---|
| 8979 | \outervsize = \vsize
|
|---|
| 8980 | \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
|
|---|
| 8981 | \pageheight = \vsize
|
|---|
| 8982 | %
|
|---|
| 8983 | \hsize = #2\relax
|
|---|
| 8984 | \outerhsize = \hsize
|
|---|
| 8985 | \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
|
|---|
| 8986 | \pagewidth = \hsize
|
|---|
| 8987 | %
|
|---|
| 8988 | \normaloffset = #4\relax
|
|---|
| 8989 | \bindingoffset = #5\relax
|
|---|
| 8990 | %
|
|---|
| 8991 | \ifpdf
|
|---|
| 8992 | \pdfpageheight #7\relax
|
|---|
| 8993 | \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
|
|---|
| 8994 | % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
|
|---|
| 8995 | % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
|
|---|
| 8996 | \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
|
|---|
| 8997 | \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
|
|---|
| 8998 | \fi
|
|---|
| 8999 | %
|
|---|
| 9000 | \setleading{\textleading}
|
|---|
| 9001 | %
|
|---|
| 9002 | \parindent = \defaultparindent
|
|---|
| 9003 | \setemergencystretch
|
|---|
| 9004 | }
|
|---|
| 9005 |
|
|---|
| 9006 | % @letterpaper (the default).
|
|---|
| 9007 | \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|---|
| 9008 | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
|---|
| 9009 | \textleading = 13.2pt
|
|---|
| 9010 | %
|
|---|
| 9011 | % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
|
|---|
| 9012 | \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
|
|---|
| 9013 | {\voffset}{.25in}%
|
|---|
| 9014 | {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
|
|---|
| 9015 | {11in}{8.5in}%
|
|---|
| 9016 | }}
|
|---|
| 9017 |
|
|---|
| 9018 | % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
|
|---|
| 9019 | \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|---|
| 9020 | \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
|
|---|
| 9021 | \textleading = 12pt
|
|---|
| 9022 | %
|
|---|
| 9023 | \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
|
|---|
| 9024 | {-.2in}{0in}%
|
|---|
| 9025 | {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
|
|---|
| 9026 | {9.25in}{7in}%
|
|---|
| 9027 | %
|
|---|
| 9028 | \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
|
|---|
| 9029 | \tolerance = 700
|
|---|
| 9030 | \hfuzz = 1pt
|
|---|
| 9031 | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
|---|
| 9032 | \defbodyindent = .5cm
|
|---|
| 9033 | }}
|
|---|
| 9034 |
|
|---|
| 9035 | % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
|
|---|
| 9036 | % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
|
|---|
| 9037 | \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|---|
| 9038 | \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
|
|---|
| 9039 | \textleading = 12pt
|
|---|
| 9040 | %
|
|---|
| 9041 | \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
|
|---|
| 9042 | {-.2in}{-.4in}%
|
|---|
| 9043 | {0pt}{14pt}%
|
|---|
| 9044 | {9in}{6in}%
|
|---|
| 9045 | %
|
|---|
| 9046 | \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
|
|---|
| 9047 | \tolerance = 700
|
|---|
| 9048 | \hfuzz = 1pt
|
|---|
| 9049 | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
|---|
| 9050 | \defbodyindent = .4cm
|
|---|
| 9051 | }}
|
|---|
| 9052 |
|
|---|
| 9053 | % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
|
|---|
| 9054 | \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|---|
| 9055 | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
|---|
| 9056 | \textleading = 13.2pt
|
|---|
| 9057 | %
|
|---|
| 9058 | % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
|
|---|
| 9059 | % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
|
|---|
| 9060 | % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
|
|---|
| 9061 | % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
|
|---|
| 9062 | % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
|
|---|
| 9063 | % your texinfo source file like this:
|
|---|
| 9064 | % @tex
|
|---|
| 9065 | % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
|
|---|
| 9066 | % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
|
|---|
| 9067 | % @end tex
|
|---|
| 9068 | \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
|
|---|
| 9069 | {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
|
|---|
| 9070 | {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
|---|
| 9071 | {297mm}{210mm}%
|
|---|
| 9072 | %
|
|---|
| 9073 | \tolerance = 700
|
|---|
| 9074 | \hfuzz = 1pt
|
|---|
| 9075 | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
|---|
| 9076 | \defbodyindent = 5mm
|
|---|
| 9077 | }}
|
|---|
| 9078 |
|
|---|
| 9079 | % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
|
|---|
| 9080 | % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
|
|---|
| 9081 | % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
|
|---|
| 9082 | \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|---|
| 9083 | \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
|
|---|
| 9084 | \textleading = 12.5pt
|
|---|
| 9085 | %
|
|---|
| 9086 | \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
|
|---|
| 9087 | {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
|
|---|
| 9088 | {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
|
|---|
| 9089 | {210mm}{148mm}%
|
|---|
| 9090 | %
|
|---|
| 9091 | \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
|
|---|
| 9092 | \tolerance = 800
|
|---|
| 9093 | \hfuzz = 1.2pt
|
|---|
| 9094 | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
|---|
| 9095 | \defbodyindent = 2mm
|
|---|
| 9096 | \tableindent = 12mm
|
|---|
| 9097 | }}
|
|---|
| 9098 |
|
|---|
| 9099 | % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
|
|---|
| 9100 | \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|---|
| 9101 | \afourpaper
|
|---|
| 9102 | \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
|
|---|
| 9103 | {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
|
|---|
| 9104 | {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
|---|
| 9105 | {297mm}{210mm}%
|
|---|
| 9106 | %
|
|---|
| 9107 | % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
|
|---|
| 9108 | \globaldefs = 0
|
|---|
| 9109 | }}
|
|---|
| 9110 |
|
|---|
| 9111 | % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
|
|---|
| 9112 | \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|---|
| 9113 | \afourpaper
|
|---|
| 9114 | \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
|
|---|
| 9115 | {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
|
|---|
| 9116 | {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
|---|
| 9117 | {297mm}{210mm}%
|
|---|
| 9118 | \globaldefs = 0
|
|---|
| 9119 | }}
|
|---|
| 9120 |
|
|---|
| 9121 | % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
|
|---|
| 9122 | % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
|
|---|
| 9123 | % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
|
|---|
| 9124 | %
|
|---|
| 9125 | \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
|
|---|
| 9126 | \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
|
|---|
| 9127 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
|
|---|
| 9128 | \globaldefs = 1
|
|---|
| 9129 | %
|
|---|
| 9130 | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
|---|
| 9131 | \setleading{\textleading}%
|
|---|
| 9132 | %
|
|---|
| 9133 | \dimen0 = #1\relax
|
|---|
| 9134 | \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
|
|---|
| 9135 | %
|
|---|
| 9136 | \dimen2 = \hsize
|
|---|
| 9137 | \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
|
|---|
| 9138 | %
|
|---|
| 9139 | \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
|
|---|
| 9140 | {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
|
|---|
| 9141 | {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
|---|
| 9142 | {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
|
|---|
| 9143 | }}
|
|---|
| 9144 |
|
|---|
| 9145 | % Set default to letter.
|
|---|
| 9146 | %
|
|---|
| 9147 | \letterpaper
|
|---|
| 9148 |
|
|---|
| 9149 |
|
|---|
| 9150 | \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
|
|---|
| 9151 |
|
|---|
| 9152 | % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
|
|---|
| 9153 | \catcode`\^^? = 14
|
|---|
| 9154 |
|
|---|
| 9155 | % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
|
|---|
| 9156 | \catcode`\"=\other
|
|---|
| 9157 | \catcode`\~=\other
|
|---|
| 9158 | \catcode`\^=\other
|
|---|
| 9159 | \catcode`\_=\other
|
|---|
| 9160 | \catcode`\|=\other
|
|---|
| 9161 | \catcode`\<=\other
|
|---|
| 9162 | \catcode`\>=\other
|
|---|
| 9163 | \catcode`\+=\other
|
|---|
| 9164 | \catcode`\$=\other
|
|---|
| 9165 | \def\normaldoublequote{"}
|
|---|
| 9166 | \def\normaltilde{~}
|
|---|
| 9167 | \def\normalcaret{^}
|
|---|
| 9168 | \def\normalunderscore{_}
|
|---|
| 9169 | \def\normalverticalbar{|}
|
|---|
| 9170 | \def\normalless{<}
|
|---|
| 9171 | \def\normalgreater{>}
|
|---|
| 9172 | \def\normalplus{+}
|
|---|
| 9173 | \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
|
|---|
| 9174 |
|
|---|
| 9175 | % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
|
|---|
| 9176 | % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
|
|---|
| 9177 | % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
|
|---|
| 9178 | %
|
|---|
| 9179 | % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
|
|---|
| 9180 | % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
|
|---|
| 9181 | % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
|
|---|
| 9182 | % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
|
|---|
| 9183 | %
|
|---|
| 9184 | \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
|---|
| 9185 |
|
|---|
| 9186 | % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
|
|---|
| 9187 | % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
|
|---|
| 9188 | % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
|
|---|
| 9189 | % this is not a problem.
|
|---|
| 9190 | \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
|---|
| 9191 |
|
|---|
| 9192 | % Turn off all special characters except @
|
|---|
| 9193 | % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
|
|---|
| 9194 | % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
|
|---|
| 9195 | % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
|
|---|
| 9196 |
|
|---|
| 9197 | \catcode`\"=\active
|
|---|
| 9198 | \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
|
|---|
| 9199 | \let"=\activedoublequote
|
|---|
| 9200 | \catcode`\~=\active
|
|---|
| 9201 | \def~{{\tt\char126}}
|
|---|
| 9202 | \chardef\hat=`\^
|
|---|
| 9203 | \catcode`\^=\active
|
|---|
| 9204 | \def^{{\tt \hat}}
|
|---|
| 9205 |
|
|---|
| 9206 | \catcode`\_=\active
|
|---|
| 9207 | \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
|
|---|
| 9208 | \let\realunder=_
|
|---|
| 9209 | % Subroutine for the previous macro.
|
|---|
| 9210 | \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
|
|---|
| 9211 |
|
|---|
| 9212 | \catcode`\|=\active
|
|---|
| 9213 | \def|{{\tt\char124}}
|
|---|
| 9214 | \chardef \less=`\<
|
|---|
| 9215 | \catcode`\<=\active
|
|---|
| 9216 | \def<{{\tt \less}}
|
|---|
| 9217 | \chardef \gtr=`\>
|
|---|
| 9218 | \catcode`\>=\active
|
|---|
| 9219 | \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
|
|---|
| 9220 | \catcode`\+=\active
|
|---|
| 9221 | \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
|
|---|
| 9222 | \catcode`\$=\active
|
|---|
| 9223 | \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
|
|---|
| 9224 |
|
|---|
| 9225 | % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
|
|---|
| 9226 | % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
|
|---|
| 9227 | % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
|
|---|
| 9228 | % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
|
|---|
| 9229 | \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
|
|---|
| 9230 |
|
|---|
| 9231 | % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
|
|---|
| 9232 | % parsing them.
|
|---|
| 9233 | \def\turnoffactive{%
|
|---|
| 9234 | \normalturnoffactive
|
|---|
| 9235 | \otherbackslash
|
|---|
| 9236 | }
|
|---|
| 9237 |
|
|---|
| 9238 | \catcode`\@=0
|
|---|
| 9239 |
|
|---|
| 9240 | % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
|
|---|
| 9241 | % as in \char`\\.
|
|---|
| 9242 | \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
|
|---|
| 9243 | \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
|
|---|
| 9244 |
|
|---|
| 9245 | % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
|
|---|
| 9246 | % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
|
|---|
| 9247 | {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
|
|---|
| 9248 |
|
|---|
| 9249 | % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
|
|---|
| 9250 | % in fixed width font.
|
|---|
| 9251 | \catcode`\\=\active
|
|---|
| 9252 | @def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
|
|---|
| 9253 | % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
|
|---|
| 9254 | % @let \ = @normalbackslash
|
|---|
| 9255 |
|
|---|
| 9256 | % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
|
|---|
| 9257 | % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
|
|---|
| 9258 | % catcode other.
|
|---|
| 9259 | @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
|
|---|
| 9260 | @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
|
|---|
| 9261 |
|
|---|
| 9262 | % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
|
|---|
| 9263 | % the literal character `\'.
|
|---|
| 9264 | %
|
|---|
| 9265 | @def@normalturnoffactive{%
|
|---|
| 9266 | @let\=@normalbackslash
|
|---|
| 9267 | @let"=@normaldoublequote
|
|---|
| 9268 | @let~=@normaltilde
|
|---|
| 9269 | @let^=@normalcaret
|
|---|
| 9270 | @let_=@normalunderscore
|
|---|
| 9271 | @let|=@normalverticalbar
|
|---|
| 9272 | @let<=@normalless
|
|---|
| 9273 | @let>=@normalgreater
|
|---|
| 9274 | @let+=@normalplus
|
|---|
| 9275 | @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
|
|---|
| 9276 | @markupsetuplqdefault
|
|---|
| 9277 | @markupsetuprqdefault
|
|---|
| 9278 | @unsepspaces
|
|---|
| 9279 | }
|
|---|
| 9280 |
|
|---|
| 9281 | % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
|
|---|
| 9282 | % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
|
|---|
| 9283 | @otherifyactive
|
|---|
| 9284 |
|
|---|
| 9285 | % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
|
|---|
| 9286 | % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
|
|---|
| 9287 | % a backslash.
|
|---|
| 9288 | %
|
|---|
| 9289 | @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
|
|---|
| 9290 | @global@let\ = @eatinput
|
|---|
| 9291 |
|
|---|
| 9292 | % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
|
|---|
| 9293 | % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
|
|---|
| 9294 | % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
|
|---|
| 9295 | % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
|
|---|
| 9296 | % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
|
|---|
| 9297 | %
|
|---|
| 9298 | @gdef@fixbackslash{%
|
|---|
| 9299 | @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
|
|---|
| 9300 | @catcode`+=@active
|
|---|
| 9301 | @catcode`@_=@active
|
|---|
| 9302 | }
|
|---|
| 9303 |
|
|---|
| 9304 | % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
|
|---|
| 9305 | @escapechar = `@@
|
|---|
| 9306 |
|
|---|
| 9307 | % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
|
|---|
| 9308 | @catcode`@& = @other
|
|---|
| 9309 | @catcode`@# = @other
|
|---|
| 9310 | @catcode`@% = @other
|
|---|
| 9311 |
|
|---|
| 9312 | @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
|
|---|
| 9313 | @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
|
|---|
| 9314 | @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
|
|---|
| 9315 | @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
|
|---|
| 9316 | @catcode`@'=@active
|
|---|
| 9317 | @catcode`@`=@active
|
|---|
| 9318 | @markupsetuplqdefault
|
|---|
| 9319 | @markupsetuprqdefault
|
|---|
| 9320 |
|
|---|
| 9321 | @c Local variables:
|
|---|
| 9322 | @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
|
|---|
| 9323 | @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
|
|---|
| 9324 | @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
|
|---|
| 9325 | @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
|
|---|
| 9326 | @c time-stamp-end: "}"
|
|---|
| 9327 | @c End:
|
|---|
| 9328 |
|
|---|
| 9329 | @c vim:sw=2:
|
|---|
| 9330 |
|
|---|
| 9331 | @ignore
|
|---|
| 9332 | arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
|
|---|
| 9333 | @end ignore
|
|---|